<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><TEI xmlns="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0 nzetc-p5.xsd" xml:id="MacToke" xml:lang="en">
  <teiHeader>
    <fileDesc xml:id="fileDesc-0001">
      <titleStmt>
        <title type="marc245">Ethnology of Tokelau Islands</title>
        <title type="sort">Ethnology of Tokelau Islands</title>
        <title type="gmd">[electronic resource]</title>
        <author>
          <name key="name-101716" type="person">Gordon Macgregor</name>
        </author>
        <respStmt xml:id="respStmt-0001">
          <resp>Creation of machine-readable version</resp>
          <name key="name-121582" type="organisation">TechBooks, Inc.</name>
        </respStmt>
        <respStmt xml:id="respStmt-0002">
          <resp>Creation of digital images</resp>
          <name key="name-141366" type="person">Samantha Callaghan</name>
        </respStmt>
        <respStmt xml:id="respStmt-0003">
          <resp>Conversion to TEI.2-conformant markup</resp>
          <name key="name-121582" type="organisation">TechBooks, Inc.</name>
        </respStmt>
      </titleStmt>
      <extent>ca. 664 kilobytes</extent>
      <publicationStmt>
        <publisher>
          <name key="name-121602" type="organisation">New Zealand Electronic Text Centre</name>
        </publisher>
        <pubPlace><name key="name-008844" type="place">Wellington</name>, New Zealand</pubPlace>
        <idno type="etc">Modern English, MacToke</idno>
        <availability status="unknown">
          <p>Publicly accessible</p>
          <p n="public">URL: http://www.nzetc.org/collections.html</p>
          <p>copyright 2006, by <name key="name-008371" type="organisation">Victoria University of Wellington</name></p>
        </availability>
        <date when="2006">2006</date>
      <idno type="vuw-bbid">1008221</idno></publicationStmt>
      <seriesStmt xml:id="seriesStmt-0001">
        <title>
          <name key="name-101719" type="work">Bernice P. Bishob Museum Bulletin</name>
        </title>
        <idno type="vol">146</idno>
      </seriesStmt>
      <notesStmt xml:id="notesStmt-0001">
        <note xml:id="note-0001">Line breaks have only been retained for non-prose elements.</note>
      </notesStmt>
      <sourceDesc xml:id="sourceDesc-0001">
        <biblFull>
          <titleStmt>
            <title>
              <name key="name-101717" type="work">Ethnology of Tokelau Islands</name>
            </title>
            <author>
              <name key="name-101716" type="person">Gordon Macgregor</name>
            </author>
          </titleStmt>
          <publicationStmt>
            <pubPlace>Honolulu, Hawaii</pubPlace>
            <publisher>
              <name key="name-101718" type="organisation">Bernice P. Bishop Museum</name>
            </publisher>
            <date when="1937">1937</date>
            <idno type="callno">Source copy consulted: Victoria University of Wellington, Q11 B5 B 146</idno>
          </publicationStmt>
        </biblFull>
      </sourceDesc>
    </fileDesc>
    <encodingDesc>
      <editorialDecl>
        <p>All unambiguous end-of-line hyphens have been removed, and
          the trailing part of a word has been joined to the preceding
          line.</p>
        <p xml:id="ETC">Some keywords in the header are a local Electronic
          Text Centre scheme to aid in establishing analytical
          groupings.</p>
      </editorialDecl>
      <classDecl>
        <taxonomy xml:id="nzetc-subjects">
          <bibl>
            <title>NZETC Subject Headings</title>
          </bibl>
        </taxonomy>
      </classDecl>
    </encodingDesc>
    <profileDesc xml:id="profileDesc-0001">
      <langUsage>
        <language ident="en">English</language>
      </langUsage>
      <textClass>
        <keywords scheme="http://www.nzetc.org/nzetc-subjects">
          <list>
            <item>
              <rs key="subject-000010" type="subject">Historical Māori and Pacific Islands</rs>
            </item>
          </list>
        </keywords>
        <keywords scheme="http://www.example.org/folksonomy">
          <term>
            <name key="name-123228" type="place">Tokelau</name>
          </term>
        </keywords>
      </textClass>
    </profileDesc>
    <revisionDesc>
      <change n="quickProof"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:10">21:18:10, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Text-proofing of a sample of the text</change>
      <change n="teiMarkup"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:10">21:18:10, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Conversion to TEI.2-conformat markup</change>
      <change n="scriptedMarkup"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:10">21:18:10, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Adding scripted markup</change>
      <change n="encodingDesc"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:10">21:18:10, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Addition of encodingDesc</change>
      <change n="addBibls"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:10">21:18:10, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Addition of bibls</change>
      <change n="assembleImages"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:10">21:18:10, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Assembled all images</change>
      <change n="derivativeCreation"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:10">21:18:10, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Creation of derivative images</change>
      <change n="teiValidation"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:10">21:18:10, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Validation of TEI</change>
      <change n="nameValidation"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:10">21:18:10, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Validation of names</change>
      <change n="utf8Conversion"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:10">21:18:10, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Conversion to Unicode (utf-8)</change>
      <change n="makeProduction"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:10">21:18:10, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Promotion to production</change>
      <change n="drmAddition"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:10">21:18:10, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Addition of text to access control</change>
      <change n="harvestTopicMap"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:10">21:18:10, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Harvest into Topic Map</change>
      <change n="browserCheck"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:10">21:18:10, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Checking of text using browser</change>
      <change n="corpusAddition"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:10">21:18:10, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Addition of text to corpus</change>
      <change n="catalogueAddition"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:10">21:18:10, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Addition of text to Library Catalogue<!-- BBID=1008221 --></change>
      <change n="live"><date when="2008-09-23T14:47:49">14:47:49, Tuesday 23 September 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Make text available on NZETC website</change>
    <change n="epubPreparation"><date when="2009-08-04T14:09:10">14:09:10, Tuesday 4 August 2009</date><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Preparation of EPUB (and other formats such as DaisyBook)</change></revisionDesc>
  </teiHeader>
  <text xml:id="t1">
    <front xml:id="t1-front">
      <div xml:id="t1-front-d1" type="covers">
        <p>
          <figure xml:id="MacTokeFCo">
            <graphic url="MacTokeFCo.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacTokeFCo-g"/>
            <figDesc>Front Cover</figDesc>
          </figure>
        </p>
        <p>
          <figure xml:id="MacTokeSpi">
            <graphic url="MacTokeSpi.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacTokeSpi-g"/>
            <figDesc>Spine</figDesc>
          </figure>
        </p>
        <p>
          <figure xml:id="MacTokeBCo">
            <graphic url="MacTokeBCo.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacTokeBCo-g"/>
            <figDesc>Back Cover</figDesc>
          </figure>
        </p>
        <p>
          <figure xml:id="MacTokeTit">
            <graphic url="MacTokeTit.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacTokeTit-g"/>
            <figDesc>Title Page</figDesc>
          </figure>
        </p>
      </div>
      <pb xml:id="n1"/>
      <pb xml:id="n2"/>
      <pb xml:id="n3"/>
      <titlePage xml:id="t1-front-d1-d1">
        <docTitle>
          <titlePart type="main">ETHNOLOGY OF TOKELAU ISLANDS</titlePart>
        </docTitle>
        <byline>BY<lb/>
<docAuthor>GORDON MACGREGOR</docAuthor></byline>
        <docImprint><hi rend="sc">Bernice P. Bishop Museum<lb/>
Bulletin</hi> 146<lb/>
<pubPlace><hi rend="lsc">Honolulu, Hawaii</hi></pubPlace><lb/>
<publisher><hi rend="sc">Published by the Museum</hi></publisher><lb/>
<date when="1937">1937</date></docImprint>
      </titlePage>
      <pb xml:id="n4"/>
      <pb xml:id="n5" n="[i]"/>
      <div xml:id="t1-front-d2" type="contents">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">Contents</hi>
        </head>
        <p>
          <table rows="202" cols="2">
            <row>
              <cell/>
              <cell rend="right">
                <hi rend="sc">Page</hi>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>Introduction</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n9">3</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Acknowledgments</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n9">3</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Position in Polynesia</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n10">4</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Geography</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n11">5</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Fakaofu</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n11">5</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Nukunono</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n13">7</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Atafu</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n13">7</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Olosenga</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n13">7</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Winds and Currents</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n16">10</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Water Supply</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n16">10</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Botany</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n17">11</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> People</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n18">12</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Language</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n19">13</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>History</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n22">16</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Legendary period</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n22">16</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Historical period</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n25">19</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Conquests by Fakaofu</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n25">19</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Succession of island chiefs</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n29">23</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Contacts with other islands</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n32">26</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Western contact</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n34">28</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Discovery</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n34">28</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Missions</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n38">32</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Present government</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n40">34</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>Social organization</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n41">35</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Biological family</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n41">35</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Birth</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n41">35</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Childhood</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n44">38</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Puberty</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n45">39</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Circumcision</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n45">39</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Courtship and marriage</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n46">40</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Adult life</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n48">42</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Death and burial</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n49">43</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  The household</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n50">44</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> The kindred</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n51">45</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Kinship terms</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n51">45</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Kindred relationships</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n52">46</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Organization of Atafu kindred</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n54">47</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Men's houses</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n55">48</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>Government</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n56">49</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  The high chief</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n57">50</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  The council</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n60">53</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Judge and priests</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n60">53</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>Land</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n60">53</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Division of atoll lands</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n60">53</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Atafu village divisions</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n62">55</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Laws</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n64">57</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <pb xml:id="n6" n="[ii]"/>
            <row>
              <cell>Religion</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n66">59</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Gods</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n66">59</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Supreme deity</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n66">59</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Nature gods</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n67">60</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Nature spirits</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n68">61</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Ancestral gods</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n69">62</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Totemic gods</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n70">63</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Priests</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n70">63</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Election of priests</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n71">64</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> God houses</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n72">65</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Ceremony to Tui Tokelau</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n73">66</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Land of the dead</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n76">69</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>Sickness</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n76">69</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Beliefs</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n76">69</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Treatment</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n77">70</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Massage</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n77">70</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Cauterizing</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n79">72</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Medicinal treatment</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n80">73</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>Dancing</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n80">73</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>Music</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n81">74</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Instruments</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n81">74</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Percussion instruments</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n81">74</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Wind instruments</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n82">75</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Singing</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n83">76</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>Tales</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n86">79</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Sina myths</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n87">80</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> The story of Tae-a-Tangaloa</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n92">85</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> The story of Pupunatavai</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n94">87</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>Nature lore</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n96">89</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Winds</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n97">90</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Calendar</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n97">90</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Nights in the phases of the moon</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n98">91</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>Material culture</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n99">92</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Fishing</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n99">92</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Groping and probing</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n100">93</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Lures</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n100">93</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Fish traps</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n101">94</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Spear</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n101">94</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Bow and arrow</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n101">94</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Nets</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n102">95</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Scoop nets</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n102">95</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Dip nets</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n103">96</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Seines</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n104">97</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Rites</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n105">98</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Noose fishing</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n105">98</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Turtle fishing</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n106">99</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Angling</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n107">100</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  One-piece hook</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n108">101</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Ruvettus hook</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n110">103</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Ruvettus fishing</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n112">105</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Trolling hooks</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n112">105</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Bonito rod</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n116">109</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Tapus</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n116">109</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Bonito fishing</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n117">110</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <pb xml:id="n7" n="[iii]"/>
            <row>
              <cell> Canoes</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n119">112</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Rites in canoe-building</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n120">113</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Materials</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n120">113</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Fishing canoe</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n121">114</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Construction of the hull</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n121">114</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Bow cover</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n124">117</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Stern cover</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n124">117</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Outrigger</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n124">117</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Lifting pieces and seats</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n125">118</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Bailer</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n126">119</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Care</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n126">119</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Sailing canoe</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n126">119</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Double canoe</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n127">120</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Mast and block</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n128">121</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   The sail</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n129">122</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Steering oars</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n129">122</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Sailing the double canoe</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n129">122</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Houses</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n130">123</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Types of ancient houses</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n130">123</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Dwelling house</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n130">123</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   God house</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n131">124</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Men's house</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n132">125</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Cook house</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n132">125</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Canoe house</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n132">125</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Storage house</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n132">125</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Construction</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n133">126</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Framework</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n134">127</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Thatching</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n134">127</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Plaiting</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n136">129</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Pandanus leaf plaiting</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n137">130</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Preparation of materials</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n137">130</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Dye</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n137">130</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Plaiting accessories</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n138">131</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Pandanus mats</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n138">131</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Coconut leaf plaiting</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n142">135</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Food dish</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n143">136</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Baskets</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n143">136</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Fans</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n144">137</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Cordage</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n145">138</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Bark fiber cord</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n145">138</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Sennit cord</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n146">139</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Sennit braid</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n146">139</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Coils</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n147">140</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Clothing</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n147">140</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Malo</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n148">141</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Men's kilt</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n148">141</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Women's titi</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n149">142</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Headbands and sandals</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n149">142</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Ornamentation and tattooing</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n149">142</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Food</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n152">145</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  The kitchen</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n152">145</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Cooking utensils</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n152">145</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Variety and preparation of foods</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n154">147</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Meals</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n157">150</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Food ceremony</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n158">151</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Sacred food</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n158">151</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <pb xml:id="n8" n="[iv]"/>
            <row>
              <cell> Adzes</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n159">152</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Drills, needles, and gauges</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n161">154</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Pump drill</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n161">154</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Thatching awl</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n163">156</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Thatching needle</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n163">156</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Netting needle</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n163">156</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Netting gauge</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n163">156</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Canoe-lashing needle</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n163">156</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Fishing boxes</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n164">157</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Weapons and fighting</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n164">157</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>Summary</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n166">159</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Comparisons</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n166">159</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  People and history</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n166">159</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Language</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n166">159</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Social organization</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n167">160</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Birth</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n167">160</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Burial</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n167">160</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Kinship system</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n168">161</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Men's houses</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n169">162</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Government</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n169">162</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Religion</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n169">162</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Supreme deity</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n169">162</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Nature gods</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n170">163</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Priests</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n170">163</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   God houses</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n170">163</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Maraes</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n171">164</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Ceremonies</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n172">165</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Mythology</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n173">166</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Music and dancing</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n174">167</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Nature lore</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n174">167</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Calendar</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n174">167</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  Material culture</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n176">169</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Fishing</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n176">169</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Canoes</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n176">169</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Houses</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n177">170</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Clothing</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n178">171</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Ornaments and tattooing</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n178">171</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Food</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n179">172</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Adzes</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n179">172</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>   Wooden fishing buckets</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n180">173</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Conclusions</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n180">173</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Literature cited in text</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n186">179</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Literature cited in summary</cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n187">180</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Text figures 1–25</cell>
              <cell/>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell> Plates 1–10</cell>
              <cell/>
            </row>
          </table>
        </p>
      </div>
    </front>
    <pb xml:id="n9"/>
    <body xml:id="t1-body">
      <head>Ethnology of Tokelau Islands</head>
      <byline>By <hi rend="sc"><name type="person" key="name-101716">Gordon Macgregor</name><lb/>
Bishop Museum Fellow</hi> 1931–32</byline>
      <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d1" type="section">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">Introduction</hi>
        </head>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d1-d1" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Acknowledgments</hi>
          </head>
          <p>This study of the ethnology of the Tokelau Islands is based on information collected during a two months' visit to Atafu Island from October 4 to December 10, 1932. On the voyage to Atafu the three other atolls of the group were visited for two or three days each, which allowed time only to inspect the villages, photograph, and gather lists of place names and genealogies of the high chiefs. Most of the information on the history and ancient culture of the islands was obtained from Mika, an elderly native in Atafu, whose knowledge of the past was considered greater than that of any person in the islands. Mika was a young boy when the first missionaries came to the island in 1859, and lived during the years when the last double canoes sailed back and forth to Samoa, and the old gods lived in the Tokelau world. The information that he imparted is drawn from a first-hand knowledge of the ancient Tokelau culture before it was changed by Europeans. Whatever value this book has as a record of the ancient Tokelau life and folklore is due to Mika's interest in my work and his willingness to relate all that he knew.</p>
          <p>I wish especially to thank the following for their invaluable assistance: Nikotemo, the native government head who offered much additional information not given by Mika and clarified many points by discussing them with the elders of the village in council; Longolongo, the native medical practitioner who served each day as interpreter outside his hours at the hospital; the Samoan pastor, Timoteo, and his wife, Viola, in whose home I stayed during my entire visit; the young people of their home who took care of my personal needs; and the entire community who were always interested and ready to help in the work, and particularly those who presented the many native articles, no longer in use, for exhibition in Bernice P. Bishop Museum.</p>
          <p>The material gathered has been supplemented from the few accounts which have been written by earlier visitors to the islands. I am particularly indebted to Dr. <name type="person" key="name-121404">Andrew Thomson</name> of Toronto, Canada, who generously put his unpublished notes made at Atafu at my disposal, and to Mr. Edwin H. Bryan, Jr., Curator of the Bernice P. Bishop Museum, for the use of his field notes of Fakaofu Island, taken on the Whitney South Sea Expedition, and to the members of the staff of the Museum for their helpful suggestions
<pb xml:id="n10" n="4"/>
and comments. To Dr. Alfred Tozzer of the Department of Anthropology at Harvard University and Dr. E. Craighill Handy of the Bernice P. Bishop Museum, I wish to acknowledge my especial gratitude for the thoughtful guidance and invaluable suggestions they gave during the preparation of this study for a thesis in ethnology at Harvard University.</p>
          <p>Much of the Tokelau culture is identical with that of Samoa and in gathering field data, I found “Samoan material culture” by <name key="name-202886" type="person">Te Rangi Hiroa</name> (28)<note xml:id="fn1_4" n="1"><p>Numbers in parentheses refer to Literature Cited, p. 179.</p></note> an invaluable aid in checking and comparing data as well as a short cut to recording identical techniques. Dr. Hiroa's work has become a standard of exact description and terminology for the material culture of western Polynesia, and I acknowledge with deep appreciation the labor and time devoted to this work and the time it has saved me in this field. I have borrowed freely from parts of his work where I checked identical articles and methods in the Tokelau culture instead of making full notes, and have referred to his writing when detailed restatement of his descriptions seemed superfluous.</p>
          <p>
            <figure xml:id="MacToke004a">
              <graphic url="MacToke004a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke004a-g"/>
              <head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 1.—Map of Tokelau Islands and neighboring archipelagoes.</head>
            </figure>
          </p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d1-d2" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Position in Polynesia</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The Tokelau Islands lie in the northwest corner of Polynesia on the border between this culture area and Micronesia. Together with the Ellice Islands, they form stepping stones between the Gilbert Islands of Micronesia and Samoa, the great group of northwestern Polynesia. (See <ref target="#MacToke004a">fig. 1</ref>.) Therefore they are interesting for the possibilities of revealing remnants of the <choice><orig>cul-
<pb xml:id="n11" n="5"/>
ture</orig><reg>culture</reg></choice> of peoples moving through them. The Tokelau Islands are situated east of the main line of migration but, with the Phoenix Islands to the north, form a second route beginning east of the Gilbert Islands and running directly south to Samoa. The southerly direction of current and wind in the summer is favorable, though dangerous, to such migrations passing through the Tokelau Islands.</p>
          <p>The prevailing southeasterly winds during the winter months are favorable for western migrations. The Tokelau Islands lie to the windward of the northern Cook Islands and may have been discovered and influenced by drift voyagers from these islands of central Polynesia. Many place names in Tokelau, such as Rapa and Pukapuka, suggest such eastern influence.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d1-d3" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Geography</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d1-d3-d1" type="section">
            <p>The Tokelau or Union Islands comprise four reef-surrounded atolls lying on a general northwest-southeast line, between lat. 8° and 11° S. and long. 171° and 173° W. They are due north of Samoa and east of the Ellice Islands. The four islands are: Olosenga, or Swain's Island, once known as Quiros' Island; Fakaofu, or Bowditch Island; Nukunono, or Duke of Clarence Island; and Atafu, or Duke of York Island.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d1-d3-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Fakaofu</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Fakaofu is composed of about 60 small islets which form a triangle 7.5 miles long and 5.5 miles wide. It lies in lat. 9° 23′ S. and long. 171° 14′ W. The islets are connected by a reef which is awash at high tide. The average elevation is 10 feet, the highest points being on the north and south islets and the most continuous land on the east.</p>
            <p>The village is on the western side of the island due to the location of the canoe passage and water wells and is protected from the full force of the trade winds and the heavy seas (<ref target="#MacToke006a">fig. 2</ref>). The islet is small and can hardly support its present population of 500 persons. Forced in the past to live in one village for self-protection and to keep control of the food supply, the entire population has been able to confine itself to the small area only by extending the floor of the island over the lagoon. Originally walls were built up along the lagoon front to protect the houses from high waves blown up on the lagoon and to construct toilets over the water. Gradually these walls have been pushed farther into the lagoon and the area behind them filled in with loose coral and rubbish. In this way the whole floor of the islet has been widened. On the sea front, walls have been built up to a height of 10 to 20 feet (<ref target="#MacTokeP010a">pl. 10, <hi rend="i">C</hi></ref>), but, except in the case of the landing, these have been constructed back from the original shoreline rather than beyond it.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n12" n="6"/>
            <p>
              <figure xml:id="MacToke006a">
                <graphic url="MacToke006a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke006a-g"/>
                <head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 2.—Map of Fakaofu. Numbers refer to place names as follows:<lb/>
2. (Te) Afua (islet)<lb/>
3. Afua Taulua (islet)<lb/>
7. Kokoloa (land division)<lb/>
8. Matafangilasi (land division)<lb/>
9. Onemangu (land division)<lb/>
10. Otoka (land division)<lb/>
11. Vinil (islet)<lb/>
12. Avaono (islet)<lb/>
13. Talapeka (islet)<lb/>
15. Tufafau (end section of island)<lb/>
16. Savaea (land division)<lb/>
17. Lalovaoa (land division)<lb/>
18. Te One (land division)<lb/>
19. Angasala (land division)<lb/>
22. Pukaea (land division)<lb/>
23. Langilau (land division)<lb/>
24. Onepoto (land division)<lb/>
25. Te Maile (land division)<lb/>
26. Matangi (lower division of island)<lb/>
27. Fenua tapu (village land)<lb/>
28. Palea (islet)<lb/>
29. Olokalanga (islet)<lb/>
30. Ofuna (islet)<lb/>
32. Seketai (islet)<lb/>
33. Motuloa (islet)<lb/>
34. Motu Akea (islet)<lb/>
35. Niue (islet)<lb/>
36. Motu iti (islet)<lb/>
37. Fungalei (islet)<lb/>
38. Manuafe (islet)<lb/>
39. Otafi (cluster of four small islets)<lb/>
40. Otafi Loa (islet of this cluster)<lb/>
41. Motu Ngangie (two islets)<lb/>
42. Nukuseseke (two islets)<lb/>
44. Nukumasanga-iti (tiny islet)<lb/>
45. Teoki (islet)<lb/>
46. Pangai (islet)<lb/>
47. Matakitonga (islet)<lb/>
48. Vaiasa (islet, given as Tokikimoa on Samoan chart)<lb/>
49. Falatutasi (islet)<lb/>
50. Rapa (islet)<lb/>
51. Te Sungalu (islet)<lb/>
52. Longotaua (islet, given as Longatana on charts)<lb/>
53. Motu Turatura (islet, modern name Ta-te-mola)<lb/>
54. Patamo (islet)<lb/>
55. Tafola-elo (islet)<lb/>
56. Tafola-elo (islet; 56 and 55 probably one islet)<lb/>
57. Tokikimoa (point on Tafola-elo)<lb/>
58. Otano (islet)<lb/>
59. Motu Ngangie (islet)<lb/>
60. Akengamutu (land division)<lb/>
61. Te Tialau (land division)<lb/>
62. Te Fakanava (land division)<lb/>
63. Te Koko (land division)<lb/>
64. Tangiapasu (land division)<lb/>
65. Saumatafanga (land division)<lb/>
66. Motu (islet)<lb/>
67. Te Kapi o Motu (small islet)<lb/>
69. Pukava (islet of Sakea group)<lb/>
71. Kauafua (group of five islets)<lb/>
72. Kauafua-o-tanifa (islet of Kauafua)<lb/>
73. Kauafua-uli (islet of Kauafua)<lb/>
74. Kauafua-o-sumu (islet of Kauafua)<lb/>
75. Nukulakia (islet)<lb/>
76. Te Papaloa (islet)<lb/>
77. Kauafua (two projections of bare coral above water; this name applies to any such “rocks”)<lb/>
78. Tukumatini (islet)<lb/>
79. Motu Ngangie (islet)<lb/>
80. Patalinga (islet)<lb/>
81. Toliaoso (islet)<lb/>
82. Nukumatau (islet)<lb/>
Fenua fala, shown as an islet on old maps, is not at present existent. Mulifenua is a point of land at the end of the northern island. Te Fakanava is the name of northern land sections of the long island. The islets from Mulifenua to Angasala are called Lalo. Kongaloto refers to four land sections adjoining Te Fakanava. Sakea is a group of five islets. The southeast end of Fakaofu, the islet on which the village is situated, is called Tealavaka, the northeast end, Sauma.</head>
              </figure>
            </p>
          </div>
          <pb xml:id="n13" n="7"/>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d1-d3-d3" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Nukunono</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Nukunono or Nukunonu lies 60 miles northwest of Fakaofu. Its position is given as lat. 9° 10′ S. and long. 171° 53′ 30″ W., but local ship captains say that this position is from 14 to 16 miles too far east, and they make a correction accordingly when laying a course for the island.</p>
            <p>Nukunono is the largest island in the group, being 24 miles in circumference and 1,350 acres in area. The longest land mass stretches along the eastern reef. The northern reef is bare and awash. A few islets are sprinkled across the southern side of the reef. The village is on a large islet along the southwest coast (<ref target="#MacToke008a">fig. 3</ref>). There is no anchorage or passage through the reef to the village, but the sea is protected here and jumping the reef is not very dangerous. Formerly there was a passage through to the lagoon, but it was filled in during a hurricane. In 1914 another hurricane made a deep cut through the southern end of the islet and created the present small islet, Motusanga, south of the village islet. Due to the lack of an adequate water supply, the population has always been relatively small. In 1925 it numbered 229.</p>
            <p>The names of the islets and land holdings on the accompanying map (<ref target="#MacToke008a">fig. 3</ref>) are those given by a native informant. The number of names of islets does not correspond with the number of islets given on existing maps. Sixty of the names given are land divisions on the long eastern island. There is some doubt as to whether Saumangalu and Niututalu are the names of islands or the first two holdings on the long island.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d1-d3-d4" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Atafu</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Atafu, composed of 42 islets, lies in lat. 8° 33′ 30″ S. and long. 172° 30′ W. (<ref target="#MacToke009a">fig. 4</ref>). It is the smallest atoll in the group, extending 3 miles north and south and 2.5 miles east and west, and having a land area of 550 acres. The highest land of Atafu is 15 feet above sea level. The present population is 380.</p>
            <p>Atahu or Atahumea was the ancient name given the atoll by its earliest inhabitants. However, it is not possible, with present knowledge, to connect Atafu with Atahumea, which appears in the earliest Samoan legends (27).</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d1-d3-d5" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Olosenga</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Olosenga lies in lat. 11° 3′ 30″ S. and long. 171° 5′ 30″ W., 110 miles south of Fakaofu and about 200 miles north of Samoa. Because of its geographical separation from the northern atolls it is not always included within the Tokelau group. The native population seen by Quiros in 1606 had disappeared by 1841. It is now owned by the Jennings family, who
<pb xml:id="n14" n="8"/>
<figure xml:id="MacToke008a"><graphic url="MacToke008a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke008a-g"/><head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 3.—Map of Nukunono. Numbers refer to place names as follows:<lb/>
1. Talikilangi (old malae, site of present Catholic Church)<lb/>
2. La vaka (land between church and cemetery, formerly a canoe passage to lagoon until filled by tidal wave)<lb/>
3. Asulu (site of present cemetery, and land beyond)<lb/>
4. Muli<lb/>
5. Takeletu<lb/>
6. Tumulivaka<lb/>
7. Mulifanua (piece of land and tip of island)<lb/>
8. Te Kamu (islet)<lb/>
10. Te Fakanavataulotu (islet)<lb/>
11. Vini (islet)<lb/>
16. Avakilikili (islet)<lb/>
17. Nuialemo (islet)<lb/>
18. Te Palaoa (islet)<lb/>
19. Laulauia (islet)<lb/>
20. Saumangalu (islet, name means “the coming of waves”)<lb/>
22. Lalosumu (northern end of island, land division)<lb/>
81. Matautu (land division and end of island)<lb/>
83. Motufala (islet)<lb/>
84. Motuakea (islet)<lb/>
85. Manuisi (islet)<lb/>
86. Tui Masanga (islet)<lb/>
87. Fatingausu (islet)<lb/>
88. Ahua (islet)<lb/>
90. Motusanga (southern end of village island)<lb/>
91. Sulu-o-kafa (land division in village)<lb/>
92. Tafata (division in village Talikilangi)<lb/>
The following names which appear on the map of the Government Report were not in the list given me at Nukunono: Falafala (another name for Natoli?), Atukavakava (general name for the group of islets from Avakiliki to Niututahi?), Lalo (north division of the long eastern island), Mataulanga (central division of the long eastern island), Vaitupu (southern division of the long eastern island), Nasapiti (name for Motuakea and Manuisi), Teguatautafa (name for Te Ahua), A'ai (Samoan word, probably a name given for Motosanga after the hurricane).</head></figure>
<pb xml:id="n15" n="9"/>
<figure xml:id="MacToke009a"><graphic url="MacToke009a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke009a-g"/><head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 4.—Map of Atafu. Numbers refer to place names as follows:<lb/>
1. Fongalaki-ke-lalo<lb/>
2. Fongalaki-matangi<lb/>
3. Te Oki<lb/>
4. Ofangamatuku<lb/>
5. Te Kokoloa<lb/>
6. Land division<lb/>
7. Tungafulu<lb/>
8. Te Sepu<lb/>
9. Tuangafulu<lb/>
10. Laualalava<lb/>
10a. Tatapiu (small division separating Laualalava into two pieces)<lb/>
11. Napuku<lb/>
12. Te Kapi<lb/>
13. Te Laulasi (land division, land on sea side)<lb/>
13a. Te Tipi (land division, land on lagoon side)<lb/>
14. Moutoki vaealua<lb/>
15. Te Fue<lb/>
22. Part of Na Utua called Avainia<lb/>
23. Na Utua<lb/>
31. Sa-i-fafine<lb/>
32. Te Olopuka (land division, end of long island)<lb/>
33. Motufakalalo (two islets)<lb/>
34. Sakea o Asafo (first of several islets known together as Sakea)<lb/>
35. Motuatea<lb/>
36. Sakea o Lupo<lb/>
37. Sakea Lahi<lb/>
38. Tangiakuli<lb/>
39. Tulua-a-langi-maina<lb/>
40. Sakea o Simi<lb/>
41. Tulukava<lb/>
42. Motu te niu<lb/>
43. Malatea<lb/>
44. Kauafua-o-sumu<lb/>
45. Sakea-o-soi<lb/>
46. Te Motu o Tenumi<lb/>
47. Veva<lb/>
48. Kenakena<lb/>
49. Te Fakaolu-o-fafine<lb/>
50. Motu-ite Lakia<lb/>
51. Motu-faka-kakai<lb/>
52. Tufa<lb/>
53. Kauafua-o-vae<lb/>
54. Te Malo o Futa<lb/>
55. Motu-ite Fala<lb/>
56. Tafenga<lb/>
57. Motu o Veku<lb/>
58. Kauafua to Vake<lb/>
59. Sakea-lahi<lb/>
60. Sotoma (“Sodom”)<lb/>
61. Komoro (“Gomorrah”)<lb/>
62. Sakea o Kaleopa<lb/>
63. Sapiti<lb/>
64. Motu Ateakiaki<lb/>
65. Niuefa<lb/>
66. Motu Ngangie<lb/>
68. Kauafua o Laua<lb/>
69. Te Puka<lb/>
71. Tulua o Tiu<lb/>
74. Kauafua o Folasanga<lb/>
75. Hanuia i te Tonuia (rocks)<lb/>
76. Islet</head></figure>
<pb xml:id="n16" n="10"/>
have held it since 1856. Less than a hundred people now live on the island, most of them laborers from Fakaofu and Atafu.</p>
            <p>The land was raised at one time so that the atoll formed an unbroken ring enclosing the lagoon. This became landlocked, and the water is now not too brackish for animals to drink. The greatest elevation of the island is about 20 feet. It has good soil and supports a far better vegetation and gardens than are to be found on the northern atolls.</p>
            <p>The reef completely surrounds the island and has no opening for the passage of canoes. On the western side, where the reef is narrower, a passage has been blasted out to allow whale boats to enter to transport copra. Opposite this passage is the storage shed for copra, the small village of native laborers' houses, and a church. A road goes from this settlement around the island. Along the western shore of the lagoon are deep pits bordered by mounds 8 to 10 feet high, the taro beds of the former population. These are unused today. Their depth and extent imply a population of several hundred people, at least, and a residence on the island for many generations.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d1-d3-d6" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Winds and Currents</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The Tokelau Islands are cooled by the southeasterly trades for more than half the year and are consequently comfortable for living in spite of their nearness to the equator. Because of the prevailing wind direction, the villages are built on the eastern shore of western islets of the atolls. The change in winds divides the year into two seasons, the winter months of the southeasterly trade winds and the summer months of variable northerly winds and calms, when the sun becomes blistering hot.</p>
            <p>The ocean currents about these islands change with the seasonal winds. During the trade wind season, the set of the current is from east to west, with a drift ranging from 0–20 miles per hour. In the middle of summer the current changes, descends from the north, and runs parallel to the general northwest-southeast line of the islands. It turns east below Fakaofu and finally sets to the east and northeast (33).</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d1-d3-d7" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Water Supply</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The rainfall in the Tokelau Islands comes mainly from daily showers during the trade wind season and an occasional downpour. The record of rainfall for 9 months in one year, October to July, was 134 inches (24). The rain was very irregular, however, and fell mostly at the end of the period. From the end of November to the end of February the rainfall is less and periods of drought often set in.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n17" n="11"/>
            <p>Fakaofu has several wells and a modern cistern of 11,150 gallons capacity, filled from the catchment area of the roof of the Protestant Church. Nukunono has one poor well. Atafu has three wells but only one is available to the village. This well water is slightly brackish and not extremely clean. During the dry months wells frequently dry up and the natives must rely upon coconuts to drink. Before modern cisterns were built, the natives hollowed out the lower part of the trunks of coconut trees, leaving the opening on the under side of the trunk so that the rain streaming down the trunk could be collected in a place unexposed to the sun. From these meager supplies the natives drew their drinking water. When all supplies failed over a long period without rain, the natives were forced to abandon their homes.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d1-d3-d8" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Botany</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The islets are entirely covered with sand and coral piled 8 to 10 feet above the water. The loose rubble allows all the rain to drain through immediately without collecting, except in rare instances, carrying with it all decaying vegetable matter from which soil might be formed. Since few plants can exist in sand and coral alone, the flora has little variety and agriculture is almost impossible.</p>
            <p>The following table gives a complete list of the vegetation of Tokelau. Scientific names are given from specimens, many of which were collected by E. H. Bryan, Jr.</p>
            <list type="simple">
              <head>Table of Botanical Specimens</head>
              <item>
                <p>Ateate (Fleurya ruderalis?, Wedelia biflora)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Esi (Carica papaya)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Fatae (Cassytha filiformis)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Fai (Musa paradisiaca?)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Fala (Pandanus)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Fau (Pipturus)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Fui (Ipomoea grandiflora)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Kanava (Cordia subcordata)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Katuli (Portulaca quadrifida)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Kiekie (Pandanus, Freycinetia)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Laumea (bird's-nest fern?)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Lautamatama (Achyranthes velutina)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Maile (Polypodium nigrescens?)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Maile kimoa (Nephrolepis hirsutula)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Masoa (Tacca pinnatifida)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Mati (Ficus tinctoria)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Milo (Thespesia populnea)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Mumuta (Cyperus rotundus)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Mutia (Fimbristylis cymosa var. microcephala)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Nase (Eleusine indica)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Nasevau (Procris pedunculata)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Ngangie (Pemphis acidula)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Ngasu (Scaevola frutescens)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Nguna (Lepidium bidentoides)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Niu (coconut, Cocos nucifera)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Nonu (Morinda citrifolia)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Polo (Solanum viride)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Puapua (Guettarda speciosa)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Puka, pukavaka (Hernandia ovigera)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Pukavai (Pisonia grandis)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Pulaka (Cyrtosperma chamissonis)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Taamu (Alocasia macrorrhiza)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Talo (taro, Colocasia esculentum)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Tiale (Gardenia taitensis)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Totolo, tolotolo (Triumfetta procumbens)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Vao (grass, in general)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>Vao tuitui (Cenchrus echinatus)</p>
              </item>
            </list>
            <pb xml:id="n18" n="12"/>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d1-d4" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">People</hi>
          </head>
          <p>According to existing traditions the Tokelau Islands have been populated by two groups of people. The earlier people appear to have lived only on Atafu, Nukunono, and Olosenga Islands. All of this group, except a small number at Nukunono, were driven from their islands by a people who settled at Fakaofu. This later people conquered the entire group over a long period of years and absorbed the remnant group of earlier people of Nukunono.</p>
          <p>Only the briefest recollection and tradition remains concerning the earlier population. They are believed by the present natives to have been a larger and taller people than themselves, but to have possessed a similar culture and language. The names of the earlier people and places are familiar Polynesian words: Malaelua, Lehotu, Atahumea (their name for Atafu), Pipi, Hekei, Maho, Nonu, and Letele. A surviving legend of the early people states that the first human couple were named Pipi, a man, and Hekei, a woman, who lived at Nukunono. The first high chief of this island was Talahao, whose name became the title of all the high chiefs who succeeded him.</p>
          <p>The early people who lived on Olosenga were seen by the Spaniards who came upon the island in 1606. In the four accounts (23) written of the visit, repeated references are made to the light colored skin and red hair of many of the natives. Quiros (23) describes a young boy in detail:</p>
          <p>Five natives came in a canoe, the middle one vigorously bailing the water out of the vessel. His red hair came down to the waist. He was white as regards color, beautifully shaped, the face aquiline and handsome, rather freckled and rosy, the eyes black and gracious, the forehead and eyebrows good, the nose, mouth, and lips well-proportioned with the teeth well-ordered and white.</p>
          <p>A group of soldiers sent through the island to discover water came upon a woman and several children hiding in the bush. The woman appeared (23, p. 214) “graceful and sprightly, with neck and bosom and waist well formed, hair very red, long, and loose. She was extremely beautiful and pleasant to look upon, in color very white …” Quiros also speaks of a boy who came to them, who was “so beautiful and with such golden hair that to see him was as good as to see a painted angel.” Torquemada (23, p. 428), who received a first-hand account of the trip, writes, “They [the natives] were very white, more especially the women who, if properly dressed, would have advantages over the Spanish ladies.” Quiros (23, p. 215) speaks of “tresses of very golden hair, and delicately, finely woven bands, some black, others red and grey” which were found in the houses and give evidence of a number of people with red and golden hair.</p>
          <p>Quiros (23, pp. 215–16) also writes his observations of the life and culture of this strange people:</p>
          <pb xml:id="n19" n="13"/>
          <p>In the houses of the natives a great quantity of soft and very fine mats were found, and others larger and coarser. Fine cords strong and soft, which seemed of better flax than ours, and many mother-o'-pearl shells, one as large as an ordinary plate. Of these and other small shells they made, as were seen and collected here, knives, saws, chisels, punches, gouges, gimlets and fishhooks. Needles to sew their clothes and sails are made of the bones of some animals, also the adzes with which they dress timber. They found many dried oysters strung together and in some for eating there were small pearls. Certain white hairs were seen, which appeared to be those of an animal.</p>
          <p>The land is divided among many owners and is planted with certain roots, which must form their bread<note xml:id="fn1_13" n="1"><p>Abandoned taro pits excavated around the shore of the landlocked lagoon are to be seen on the island today. Olosenga alone bears evidence of the cultivation of taro in the Tokelau group in pre-European times.</p></note>. All the rest [of the island] is a large and thick palm grove, which is the chief sustenance of the natives. Of the wood and leaves they build and roof the houses, which are of four <hi rend="i">vertientes</hi> (the sloping sides of the roof), curiously and cleanly worked, each with a roof open behind, and all the floors covered and lined with mats, also made of palms; and of the more tender shoots they weave fine cloths, with which the men cover their loins, and the women their whole bodies.</p>
          <p>The women wore fringed mat skirts and wound coconut leaves around their necks, leaving the tips hanging over their breasts. The men wore plaited mat breechcloths.</p>
          <p>On the beach were double canoes, some 60 feet long, held together by poles lashed to the hulls. The canoes were decked and had lateen sails made of mats. Quiros estimated they would hold 50 persons.</p>
          <p>The natives carried small weapons and thick lances, with points hardened in fire. They were adept in quarter-staff fighting, for one native parried the blows of a dozen or more Spaniards with a single stick and held them off for a good length of time until more men came and beat him to the ground.</p>
          <p>The Spaniards found the natives possessed small dogs.</p>
          <p>Between the time of Quiros' discovery of the island and the next reported visit by Europeans to the island in 1841, this population of Olosenga disappeared. The descendants of the second people of the islands, who came first to Fakaofu, now inhabit all the Tokelau islands (on Olosenga only as plantation laborers), and it is with their history and culture that the remainder of this study deals.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d1-d5" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Language</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The Tokelau alphabet contains five vowel sounds, <hi rend="i">a, e, i, o</hi>, and <hi rend="i">u</hi>, and the twelve consonant sounds, <hi rend="i">f, h, k, l, m, n, ng, p, s, t, v</hi>, and <hi rend="i">wh</hi>. Hale (11) adds <hi rend="i">w</hi>, but it is no longer heard in the present-day speech. The relation of this alphabet to those of other Polynesian dialects is shown in the accompanying table adapted from Hiroa (29). The dialect uses interchangeably the consonants <hi rend="i">h</hi> and <hi rend="i">s, f</hi> and <hi rend="i">wh</hi> (a sound intermediate between <hi rend="i">h</hi> and <hi rend="i">f</hi>), and formerly used <hi rend="i">v</hi> and <hi rend="i">w</hi>.</p>
          <pb xml:id="n20" n="14"/>
          <p>There are apparently two dialects in Polynesia, an older one using <hi rend="i">h</hi> and <hi rend="i">wh</hi>, and a later and intrusive one using <hi rend="i">f</hi> and <hi rend="i">s</hi> (30). The presence of these two pairs of consonantal sounds as interchangeable in the Tokelau dialect suggests that the two Polynesian dialects have been brought to these islands, and that one has never entirely supplanted the other. If we take one mode of Tokelau speech which uses <hi rend="i">h</hi> and <hi rend="i">wh</hi>, the closest parallel to it is the Manihiki-Rarotongan dialect, which also has both the <hi rend="i">v</hi> and <hi rend="i">w</hi>. If we replace the <hi rend="i">h</hi> and <hi rend="i">wh</hi> by <hi rend="i">s</hi> and <hi rend="i">f</hi>, the dialect corresponds with that of Vaitupu of the Ellice Islands. (It is this form of the dialect which is more commonly spoken today and which has been used throughout this study in spelling native names and words.) The Tokelau dialect has its closest parallels in one form to an island to the east, and in its other form to an island directly to the west. The dialect of Samoa, geographically the closest, is more divergent from that of the Tokelau Islands than are the dialects of these two islands and also Tonga.</p>
          <p>The Polynesian sound <hi rend="i">wh</hi> (as in where) can not be detected in the present-day speech; however it was clear to Hale (11) before the Samoan missionaries and school teachers had influenced the dialect. He writes: “The utterance of the people was very indistinct. The <hi rend="i">f</hi> frequently became a sound like the <hi rend="i">wh</hi> in where, and sometimes, particularly before <hi rend="i">o</hi> and <hi rend="i">u</hi>, a simple <hi rend="i">h</hi>.”</p>
          <p>Since Hale's visit there has been a tendency to give an <hi rend="i">f</hi> value to the former <hi rend="i">wh</hi> sound. It is gently breathed with the oral passage closed, and the lower teeth brought near the upper lip, giving a slight fricative sound but not a distinct <hi rend="i">f</hi> and the end of the enunciation of <hi rend="i">h</hi>. That this sound is cognate with the true Polynesian <hi rend="i">wh</hi> seems apparent from a change taking place in the Maori dialect, which is noted by Williams (35) in his dictionary:</p>
          <p><hi rend="i">Wh</hi> represents the voiceless consonant corresponding with <hi rend="i">w</hi> and is produced by emitting the breath sharply between the lips. It is a mistake to assimilate the sound of that of <hi rend="i">f</hi> in English, though it has become fashionable in recent years with some of the younger Maoris.</p>
          <p>The pure <hi rend="i">h</hi>, usually strongly aspirated, is interchangeable with <hi rend="i">s. H</hi> often becomes <hi rend="i">hi</hi> or <hi rend="i">hy</hi> before <hi rend="i">a, o</hi>, or <hi rend="i">u</hi>, especially in Atafu dialect. This same peculiarity is also found in the Manihiki dialect. Thus “to come” is rendered <hi rend="i">hiau</hi> instead of <hi rend="i">hau</hi>. The roughly aspirated <hi rend="i">h</hi> sometimes becomes sibilant but with a light stress on the <hi rend="i">s. Hau</hi> and <hi rend="i">hiau</hi> are heard as <hi rend="i">shau</hi>, a variation also recorded by Lamont (29, p. 13), an early visitor at Tongareva.</p>
          <p><hi rend="i">K</hi> is sometimes sounded as <hi rend="i">g</hi> as in <hi rend="i">higi, hiki, Miga, Mika</hi>. Hale heard <hi rend="i">k</hi> sounded like <hi rend="i">t</hi> in some words. Although Samoan is taught in the schools, widely spoken, and read, the Tokelau people never drop their <hi rend="i">k</hi>'s.</p>
          <p>The <hi rend="i">l</hi> is consistently used, but becomes quite liquid in some words.</p>
          <p>The sounds <hi rend="i">m, n, ng, p, t</hi>, and <hi rend="i">v</hi> are always constant in the present-day speech.</p>
          <pb xml:id="n21" n="15"/>
          <p>The vocabulary of Tokelau resembles that of Samoa very closely, and nearly all the words collected during my stay are in Pratt's “Dictionary of the Samoan language”. However, there are words, such as <hi rend="i">pahu</hi> (sharkskin covered drum) and <hi rend="i">tuluma</hi> (wooden fishing box), which are names of articles not found in Samoa, and a few words such as <hi rend="i">fano</hi> (to go) which have another origin. The definite articles <hi rend="i">te</hi> and <hi rend="i">ta</hi> are not Samoan. Many old songs contain words of which the meaning is now forgotten.</p>
          <p>Many place names are identical with names found on neighboring islands. For example, Pangai on Fakaofu is a common name in Tonga, meaning “meeting place”. Rapa is given by Bryan (3) as the name of a small island near Fakaofu although the <hi rend="i">r</hi> is absent in Tokelau speech. (The same island is called Lapa in the Report of the Administrator of Western Samoa.) Vaitupu and Niutao, Pukapuka, and Futuna are names found on Nukunono.</p>
          <p>
            <table rows="19" cols="9">
              <head>Table 1. Polynesian Consonants</head>
              <row>
                <cell>Sound</cell>
                <cell>Tokelau</cell>
                <cell>Manihiki</cell>
                <cell>Tongareva</cell>
                <cell>Tonga</cell>
                <cell>Samoa</cell>
                <cell>Society Islands</cell>
                <cell>New Zealand (Maori)</cell>
                <cell>Vaitupu (Ellice)</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>H</cell>
                <cell>H(or F,S)</cell>
                <cell>h</cell>
                <cell>h</cell>
                <cell>H</cell>
                <cell>(s or f)</cell>
                <cell>H</cell>
                <cell>H</cell>
                <cell>(s or f)</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>hi</cell>
                <cell>hi</cell>
                <cell>hi</cell>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell>hi(some)</cell>
                <cell>hi(some)</cell>
                <cell/>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>K</cell>
                <cell>K</cell>
                <cell>K</cell>
                <cell>K</cell>
                <cell>K</cell>
                <cell>'</cell>
                <cell>'</cell>
                <cell>K</cell>
                <cell>K</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>L</cell>
                <cell/>
                <cell>1</cell>
                <cell>1</cell>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell/>
                <cell>L</cell>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell>L</cell>
                <cell>L</cell>
                <cell>R</cell>
                <cell>R</cell>
                <cell>L</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>R</cell>
                <cell/>
                <cell>R</cell>
                <cell>R</cell>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>M</cell>
                <cell>M</cell>
                <cell>M</cell>
                <cell>M</cell>
                <cell>M</cell>
                <cell>M</cell>
                <cell>M</cell>
                <cell>M</cell>
                <cell>M</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>N</cell>
                <cell>N</cell>
                <cell>N</cell>
                <cell>N</cell>
                <cell>N</cell>
                <cell>N</cell>
                <cell>N</cell>
                <cell>N</cell>
                <cell>N</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>P</cell>
                <cell>P</cell>
                <cell>P</cell>
                <cell>P</cell>
                <cell>P(or B)</cell>
                <cell>P</cell>
                <cell>P</cell>
                <cell>P</cell>
                <cell>P</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>T</cell>
                <cell>T</cell>
                <cell>T</cell>
                <cell>T</cell>
                <cell>T</cell>
                <cell>T</cell>
                <cell>T</cell>
                <cell>T</cell>
                <cell>T</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>V</cell>
                <cell>V</cell>
                <cell>V</cell>
                <cell>V</cell>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell>V</cell>
                <cell>V</cell>
                <cell>V</cell>
                <cell>W</cell>
                <cell>V</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>W</cell>
                <cell>w</cell>
                <cell>w</cell>
                <cell>w</cell>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>Ng</cell>
                <cell>Ng</cell>
                <cell>Ng</cell>
                <cell>Ng</cell>
                <cell>Ng</cell>
                <cell>Ng</cell>
                <cell>'</cell>
                <cell>Ng</cell>
                <cell>Ng</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>F</cell>
                <cell>F</cell>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell>Wh(as F)</cell>
                <cell>F</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell>wh</cell>
                <cell>(h)</cell>
                <cell>F</cell>
                <cell>F</cell>
                <cell>F</cell>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>Wh</cell>
                <cell>wh(as hf)</cell>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell/>
                <cell>Wh</cell>
                <cell/>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>S</cell>
                <cell>S(or H)</cell>
                <cell>(h)</cell>
                <cell>S</cell>
                <cell>S</cell>
                <cell>S</cell>
                <cell>(h)</cell>
                <cell>(h)</cell>
                <cell>S</cell>
              </row>
            </table>
          </p>
          <p>Capital letter = present in alphabet.</p>
          <p>Small letter = present in speech but not in alphabet.</p>
          <p>( ) = sound absent but represented by letter in brackets.</p>
          <p>Hamzah ' = sound dropped, but represented by hamzah, is inserted for comparative purposes.</p>
          <p>Tongan <hi rend="i">B</hi>, probably modern adoption from Fijian and not an original sound.</p>
        </div>
      </div>
      <pb xml:id="n22" n="16"/>
      <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d2" type="section">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">History</hi>
        </head>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d2-d1" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Legendary Period</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The legendary accounts of the origin of the Tokelau Islands and people are of two distinct types—the evolutionary tracing of man from gods evolved from distant and abstract elements, and the western Polynesian belief in the creation of man by a preexisting god. Unrelated to these tales of the creation of man are the Maui and Lu tales describing the origin of the islands and the bringing of fire to man. These myths, derived from other islands, particularly from Samoa and Tonga, have been garbled into new stories in Tokelau. The analysis of these stories reveals much concerning the origins of Tokelau culture.</p>
          <p>Tokelau myths recording the creation of the islands and belonging to the Maui cycle have been related by Burrows (5), Smith (26), Turner (32), and Lister (14). Burrows gives the following account of the origin of the islands, probably a local adaptation of the story of the fishing up of Tonga, known by the first settlers on Fakaofu.</p>
          <p>There were three brothers who lived in Tonga and whose names were Mauimua, Mauiloto, and Mauimuli (Maui the First, Maui the Middle, and Maui the Last). One day the three brothers went out fishing in their canoe far from land. Presently Mauimua's hook got caught in the roots of a coconut tree on the bottom, so he hauled up a portion of the bottom to clear his hook. Thus an island was formed which so surprised the brothers that they called it Fakaofo. (<hi rend="i">Faka</hi> = in the nature of, <hi rend="i">ofo</hi> = surprise).</p>
          <p>They then moved farther on and continued fishing, when Mauiloto's hook got caught in the bottom, this time in the roots of a <hi rend="i">nono</hi> tree. He hauled up, and thus another island was formed. This they called Nukunono. (<hi rend="i">Nuku</hi> = island, <hi rend="i">nono</hi> = the name of a tree. Nukunono is said to have many trees about the village.)</p>
          <p>Again they moved on, and on this occasion Mauimuli's hook got foul of the roots of a <hi rend="i">kanava</hi> tree. By hauling up, the island of Atafu was formed. (Atafu has more valuable <hi rend="i">kanava</hi> trees than the other islands.) The origin and meaning of the name Atafu are not known.</p>
          <p>Olosenga is not mentioned in the myth, suggesting that the Fakaofu people did not regard this island and its former inhabitants as belonging to the Tokelau group.</p>
          <p>Since myths concerning Maui and Tikitiki exist side by side in Tokelau, it is possible that their identity was never appreciated by the inhabitants of Tokelau, and that their stories were derived from different sources. In Smith's (26) account of the formation of the islands, Tikitiki drew the islands out of the sea. In Lister's (17) account, Lu, the son of Tikitiki and Talanga, pulled up Nukunono, Atafu, and Samoa; the origin of Fakaofu is not accounted for. There the belief was that the sea and sky were always in existence and human creation took place from the stones of the ground; no further details are given. The association of Lu with Maui is probably
<pb xml:id="n23" n="17"/>
derived from the Cook Islands though his specific relationship as son is probably a local twist. Lu drew the trees and plants out of the ground and later, with the aid of the winds, pushed the sky to its present height. The following story, similar to central Polynesian tales, is told by Burrows (5):</p>
          <p>When the world was first created, the sky was very close to the earth; in fact, there was only about one yard of space between the two. At this time there was a man named Iikiiki and his wife Talanga who lived on the earth, and they had a son named Lu. Now Lu was a small boy and, as he lay on his back, could rest his feet against the sky. Lying thus one day, he began to sing:</p>
          <lg type="verse">
            <l>Sapaipai<note xml:id="fn2_17" n="2"><p>Lister gives this as “<hi rend="i">Apei pei</hi>”, which is incorrect. Burrows states that he can not trace the word <hi rend="i">sapaipai</hi> in the dictionary. It is derived from the word <hi rend="i">hapai</hi>, “to lift” and is also a Hawaiian word meaning “to lift and carry”.</p></note> ie, sapaipai ie</l>
            <l>Te langi o te Atua,</l>
            <l>E Lu tekena<note xml:id="fn3_17" n="3"><p>Lister writes “<hi rend="i">elu te kena</hi>” (until you reach god). Burrows has transcribed this in the correct form.</p></note>, e Lu tekena.</l>
          </lg>
          <lg type="verse">
            <l>Lift, lift</l>
            <l>The sky of god,</l>
            <l>By Lu's pushing, by Lu's pushing.</l>
          </lg>
          <p>As Lu sang “E Lu tekena” he straightened out his legs and pushed the sky up a little. Then he stood up and, still singing his song, pushed the sky with his hands. Then he used a tree, and finally he climbed up one tree and used another to push with.</p>
          <p>When he could reach no higher he changed his song and called the winds to his assistance. All the twelve winds obeyed his calling and came to his assistance, and by their united efforts of blowing from all directions, blew the sky up to its present position!</p>
          <p>In another Tokelau myth (5) Lu introduced the knowledge of fire into the world. He attempted to steal a burning log against which a devil, Mafuike, was leaning; but Mafuike caught Lu before he could run away. They wrestled for some time, but Lu allowed the old man to tire himself out, then seized him, and made Mafuike promise to give him the secret of fire. In this way Lu learned the secret of making fire by rubbing two sticks together and taught the people of the world.</p>
          <p>Turner (32) gives a different account, probably derived from Samoa, of how this knowledge was obtained from Mafuike. In his story, a man named Talanga went down into the nether world and obtained fire from Mafuike, an old blind woman.</p>
          <p>Much confusion of details exists in the tales of the beginning of man on Fakaofu. Perhaps the most common versions are those in which man springs from a maggot. This form of origin myth is probably derived from Samoa and appears in several different legends in Fakaofu. A dead <hi rend="i">ulua</hi> drifted ashore at Fakaofu and rotted on the beach. In time, maggots grew within it. A <hi rend="i">talanga</hi> bird flew down from the sky and pecked a maggot open. Rain fell upon the fish and from the maggot a man came to life. This man was Leua te Ilo or Te Ilo (The Maggot), who is the forefather of the Fakaofu people.</p>
          <p>In a different version, rain fell heavily on Fakaofu and with it came thunder and lightning. The thunder crashed against a great stone and split
<pb xml:id="n24" n="18"/>
it apart. A maggot (<hi rend="i">ilo</hi>) crept from the split stone, and the snipe (<hi rend="i">tuli</hi>) flew down and pecked the maggot open. Then rain fell and man grew from the maggot.</p>
          <p>Burrows (5, p. 152) gives the name of the first man as Te Ilo, and his two sons as Kava and Singano, from whom the people of Fakaofu are descended. Another account gives Kava as the first man to be created and Senga, the first woman. Lister (14) cites a tale in which Kava and Singano are the first men, created directly from stones. Turner (32) states that Kava Vasefanua, the first historical chief of the island, was born from <hi rend="i">Fatu</hi> (stone).</p>
          <p>A distinctly different form of story (26) was told by a Rarotongan teacher who visited Fakaofu with a missionary ship in 1858. The first man was born of Maui and Talanga who formed the island. His name was Kava and one of his descendants was Hi-ingano (Singano). Lister (14) gives the reverse of this account in which Maui and Talanga are descended from Kava and Singano, the first men.</p>
          <p>Still other legends attribute the beginning of the Fakaofu people to settlers from other islands. Newell (19, p. 604) mentions two such traditions. In one, the first men were Kava and Pi'o who came from Samoa. In the other, the first settlers were Kulu and Ona, a man and a woman from Samoa.</p>
          <p>The fullest account of a historical settlement is given by Burrows (5) who learned it from an old man of Fakaofu, who was a full grown boy when the missionaries arrived in 1861 and when the slavers raided the island.</p>
          <p>A canoe containing three men and three women sailing from Rarotonga was driven to the westward. They eventually landed on a reef which had a sand bank on it but no trees. This was Fakaofu, and here one man and his wife elected to stay, the others setting sail again and eventually reaching their homes. Some coconuts which were in the canoe were landed with the man and his wife, and some of these they planted.</p>
          <p>By-and-by the woman died without children, so the man built himself a canoe and sailed to Nukunonu where he obtained another wife. The family of these two were the ancestors of the present inhabitants of Fakaofu.</p>
          <p>This last tale gives evidence that Nukunono was inhabited at the time of the settlement of Fakaofu, for the Rarotongan went there to obtain his second wife. If Fakaofu was a barren sand bank without coconut trees as suggested in the tale, it explains why the earlier people never occupied it, although they visited its fishing banks.</p>
          <p>The legendary and mythical evidence accounting for the beginning of Fakaofu people have one element in common, the name Kava, sometimes paired with Singano, as the first man of Fakaofu. It is characteristic of Polynesian stories of settlement and voyaging to give only the name of the chief or chiefs of the party. Kava and Singano were probably the leaders of the group of people who either migrated or drifted to Fakaofu. All historical chiefs of the island took the name of Kava as an official title.</p>
          <pb xml:id="n25" n="19"/>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d2-d2" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Historical Period</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d2-d2-d1" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Conquests by Fakaofu</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Although the Nukunono people gave the first settler of Fakaofu a wife, the later generations did not fare well with the earlier people, and by the time the actual historical period began, Fakaofu was already embroiled in conflicts with the neighboring islands, particularly Atafu.</p>
            <p>The first of the historical chiefs of Fakaofu was Kava Vasefanua (Kava, Definer of Boundaries), who was notable for dividing the land among the heads of families. This act was made necessary by a great increase in population due either to natural expansion of the original population or to immigration. Much in the Tokelau culture, as well as definite traditions, points to Samoa as a homeland of at least part of the people. Burrows (5) states that in very early times the young men of Fakaofu made a trip to Samoa to obtain wives.</p>
            <p>Kava Vasefanua had two sons, Pio who became the high chief of Fakaofu after his father, and Te Vaka who became the leading warrior and conqueror of both Nukunono and Atafu. The actual cause and the beginning of the war with Nukunono are obscure, but all accounts agree that Fakaofu had attacked Nukunono first and had been defeated. Nukunono informants stated that in the time of Talafao, Pio and Tengafalua of Fakaofu came to Nukunono and conspired with Letele. Later Fafie, the son of Pio, made war on Nukunono and was defeated. Turner (32, p. 274) attributes the cause of the fighting to an exiled Nukunono chief who sought revenge for his banishment to Fakaofu and gathered partizans there for a war with Nukunono in which his party was defeated.</p>
            <p>Many stories are told of the successful attack led by Te Vaka. Turner (32) relates the following tale told him by a Fakaofu boy who went to the mission school in Samoa. While much of it disagrees with information given at Nukunono and Atafu and must be considered unreliable, his account of the episode of the king smearing his people with his child's blood is the most acceptable one.</p>
            <p>When preparing for another fight he [the Nukunono chief, Feuku] asked his son to give up his body to be put to death, so as to get enough blood with which to smear all the remaining people, so that the enemy might pass over them and stop fighting. It was the custom there in war that if any one was found lying down and with marks of blood on his body, he was not touched but passed over, and not killed or beheaded as in Samoa.</p>
            <p>When the expected day for another battle came, the son of the king Feuku, out of love to his father and the people, consented to be killed. His body was divided in two, and the blood smeared on all the people. All were much-excited and touched with this wonderful love of their king and his son. After some speechifying they determined to show their love in return and, when the enemy came, to rise and fight to the death rather than seek life by lying down and showing the stains of blood. This was done; the war party came from Fakaofo; Feuku's people stood up, fought bravely, defended their chief, and drove the enemy to sea and back to Fakaofo.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n26" n="20"/>
            <p>The next onslaught, led by Te Vaka, was made suddenly. The Fakaofu warriors attacked immediately, not even stopping on a nearby islet to make the usual challenge (p. <ref target="#n165">158</ref>). The fight took place on the beach and the reef. Some of the Fakaofu warriors outflanked the defense and ran into the village, killing everyone there and finally attacking the Nukunono warriors from the rear. They then circled the entire island, making claim to all the land over which they walked. When they came to the eastern islets, a Nukunono warrior, Feuku (said by Turner to be the king), swam across the lagoon with the aid of a belt of coconuts. Several women and children were hiding in the hollow of a <hi rend="i">puka</hi> tree at Tenifu on the islet Tokelau. Feuku killed one of the children, smeared himself with the blood, and lay on the ground so that he would be spared by the enemy. When the Fakaofu people had passed by, Feuku stood up.</p>
            <p>The Fakaofu party continued until they came to Ngataulanga where a woman's <hi rend="i">titi</hi> skirt, hanging up as a tapu sign, stopped their progress. This <hi rend="i">titi</hi> belonged either to a Nukunono woman, Matua, who was related to the people of Fakaofu (according to a Nukunono informant) or to Nau, a Fakaofu woman, who had previously been captured by Nukunono (5). The Fakaofu men recognized the pattern of the skirt and would not pass it. Thus this spot marked the boundary of the land owned by Fakaofu until all the conquered land was returned to Nukunono in 1911.</p>
            <p>The account of the conquest told at Nukunono contains no record of a battle. The Fakaofu men marched down the eastern side of the atoll and were not seen from the village until they reached a spot now called Fakanaitinu (Surprised). A dispute arose among the Nukunono men over fighting their enemy. Those who did not wish to fight opposed with spears those who did. The Fakaofu men proceeded unhindered until they came to the woman's skirt hanging across their path. Te Vaka turned back and sailed for Fakaofu, leaving a few men to keep the land which they had won. (It was a recognized custom that any undefeated war party marching over an island laid claim to the land they had covered.)</p>
            <p>Pio, a Fakaofu chief, came to rule the conquered territory of Nukunono. A famine followed the war and this, combined with the tax of coconuts taken by Fakaofu, left little food for the surviving original inhabitants. They were forced to steal food at night from the plantations of their overlords and finally, in despair, most of them sailed for Fakaofu or the Ellice Islands. A few of the present inhabitants trace their ancestry to Fakaofu men and aboriginal women.</p>
            <p>After he had subdued Nukunono, Te Vaka made preparation to attack Atafu. Atafu warriors had made several raids on Fakaofu and were about to make another when Te Vaka sailed off to attack them. Burrows (5) gives as the immediate cause of the war the visit at Fakaofu of eight large double
<pb xml:id="n27" n="21"/>
canoes from Atafu. The visit was made while the Fakaofu men were away, “some in Fiji, some in Samoa, and some in Tonga”. (This may have been at the time when the Fakaofu men were at Nukunono.) The women of Fakaofu rebelled at feeding the Atafu men and tried to drive them away by starvation. When this did not prove immediately effective, they frightened them away. A large number of the women went out at night in canoes, one woman in each canoe, and at dawn each put up her sail. The men of Atafu believed the great fleet of Fakaofu men was approaching and made haste to escape. As they went over the reef they took the daughter of the chief of Fakaofu and towed her behind one of their canoes to show their contempt. She was devoured by sharks. When the men of Fakaofu returned they immediately prepared for war with Atafu. The Atafuans, realizing that they would be overpowered by the Fakaofuans, fled in their canoes during the night. The warriors of Fakaofu slaughtered all those who had been unable to escape except a few who were taken back as prisoners. One was towed behind a canoe and killed to avenge the death of the chief's daughter.</p>
            <p>The story told at Atafu by an informant gives no account of fighting. Lefotu, the great Atafu warrior, had sailed to the islet Nukumatau near Fakaofu, where he hid and watched the Fakaofu fleet set out. He then raced back to Atafu and awaited Te Vaka on the beach. In order to impress Lefotu with his force, Te Vaka had mustered every canoe at Fakaofu and manned it with as few men as possible. In past raids, Te Vaka had used only eight or nine canoes; this time there were so many that the Atafuans thought Nukunono and Olosenga had joined forces with Fakaofu and prepared to flee. Lefotu remarked to his followers, “He lava taku mama” (That is not one mouthful for me). Lefotu felt he was no match for this great force and he made a speech which tradition has preserved. Since many of the words are archaic, the translation is rather free.</p>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>Tatou ka sola, Atafu ka sola.</l>
              <l>Kua he luta kau</l>
              <l>E koutou iloa te lakau ko Hue.</l>
              <l>E fano te la ma te la.</l>
              <l>Kai sakili lava te tafito o te fue ke maua.</l>
            </lg>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>We shall not run away, Atafu shall not run away.</l>
              <l>It is not equal on both sides.</l>
              <l>You know the tree of Hue (a vine)</l>
              <l>There are many branches.</l>
              <l>There is one root<note xml:id="fn4_21" n="4"><p>Root refers to Lefotu.</p></note> which they like to find.</l>
            </lg>
            <p>Then Lefotu expressed his fear for his people in a lament. The general meaning, as given by a native interpreter, is as follows:</p>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>Ala ilukaa ala ilukua kita moe,</l>
              <l>ma lota tuatua ko te momoenga te fai</l>
              <l>nei ma lote manava e savini nei kai</l>
              <l>lava sota. Kei na kaitalia lava kita</l>
              <l>kei na fai mata avanga.</l>
            </lg>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>I am not quite asleep, but am frightened.</l>
              <l>The people are lying asleep with their</l>
              <l>stomachs open (are asleep but frightened).</l>
              <l>If a man has a sister, he can lie with her.</l>
              <l>It is allowed to take a sister to wife.</l>
            </lg>
            <pb xml:id="n28" n="22"/>
            <p>Te Vaka, with his fleet, camped on one of the windward islands of Atafu for the night. The next morning he went to the village to challenge Lefotu but found that the entire population had fled. He set out with his own canoe to pursue Lefotu and sent the remainder of the fleet back to Fakaofu. Te Vaka and Lefotu were never heard of afterward. It is believed today that they arrived in Samoa, Tikopia, Sikaiana, or Ontong Java (Leuaniua). Except in Samoa, this statement is founded on stories told by native sailors who have found Polynesians on these islands who have claimed to be descendants of the Atafu people and Te Vaka. The landing in Samoa is discussed by Newell (19):</p>
            <p>Two of these boats made good their escape and were afterwards heard of in Samoa, having landed at Sangana and Malie on the island of Upolu.</p>
            <p>The tradition is confirmed in all its details in Samoa itself. At Malie the “<hi rend="i">failunga</hi>”, or village orator, bears the name of Tuiatahu, and his title is Auimatangi. In the Atafu tradition which I received from the king of Atafu, the party who drifted to Malie on Upolu were met by the then-reigning Malietoa, with whom they drank kava and by whom they were received as guests. In the conversation which then took place Malietoa asked whence they had come, to which they replied, “Ua au i matangi” (driven by the winds).</p>
            <p>Several generations after the time of Te Vaka, the high chief sent Tonuia from Fakaofu to establish a settlement on abandoned Atafu. His five married sons and two married daughters with their families and followers accompanied him and established a small village on the southern tip of Atafu Islet just below the site of the village of the early population. The descendants of this group now compose the population of Atafu.</p>
            <p>It is most probable that Fakaofu conquered Olosenga as well as Atafu and Nukunono, for annual offerings were sent to Tui Tokelau on Fakaofu from all three islands. Olosenga showed resentment to this ascendancy of Fakaofu for in the time of their chief, Tuitea, a large crew of hostile young men set sail in a double canoe to present the annual offering. The Fakaofuans were suspicious of such a large canoe and allowed it to come close to the passage of the reef without any sign of greeting. Normally it was the custom of the people to go out in their canoes and hail any traveling canoe, to inquire where it had come from, and to guide it over the reef.</p>
            <p>The Olosenga men became cautious when they saw the Fakaofu people remaining in their houses. Fakaso, leader of the canoe, crawled along the beach to the house of the high chief, completely submissive and respectful. The chief displayed his suspicions, saying, “If you have come to make war upon Fakaofu, you will return in this direction,” pointing toward the setting sun, the direction away from Olosenga, “But if you come upon a friendly visit, peacefully bearing offerings to the god Tui Tokelau, you will return in this direction,” pointing toward Olosenga. Fakaso and his followers
<pb xml:id="n29" n="23"/>
brought the offerings of their people before the stone of Tui Tokelau, and sailed away.</p>
            <p>The Olosenga canoe was driven from its course, and appeared weeks later off the coast of Savai'i in Samoa, with only two men remaining alive. They were hurled by the surf against a lava cliff which they attempted to climb. One fell off into the sea and was drowned. The second, Moko, reached a nearby village where he lived until he joined the crew of a Samoan canoe sailing for Olosenga. He told of the fate of the Olosengan canoe only after a group of Fakaofu men had landed in Olosenga and told of their chief's curse.</p>
            <p>Soon after this a drought struck Olosenga, taro and coconuts failed to grow, and famine followed. Fishing near the island became poor. Many families had no men to fish for them since the loss of the big canoe, and the fishermen could not catch enough to supply the entire population. So each day when they had finished fishing, they landed on the opposite side of the island from the beach and cooked their fish for themselves; then they returned to their people, reporting that the fish had all left the sea around Olosenga. When the villagers discovered what the fishermen were doing, they made plans to kill them. The chief ordered the fishermen to go to the god house which was being repaired. When the fishermen had gone on the roof of the house to tie the new thatch as it was passed up from below, the old men, women and older children rushed on them and killed them with weapons they had hidden under piles of thatch.</p>
            <p>The drought continued and the famine grew worse. People died from starvation, and no strong men were left to handle the heavy canoes and to fish. When the next canoe arrived from Fakaofu the entire population had been dead for some time, though a few may have survived or gone to Fakaofu. Later Masanga took a party of men and women from Fakaofu to Olosenga to start a colony. Others were brought by Kolo, Kava te Mafanga, and Lehokoala. The Fakaofuan colony was just becoming firmly established when three Frenchmen landed on the island to make coconut oil, and soon the island was ruled by Europeans.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d2-d2-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Succession of island chiefs</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Much confusion and contradiction exists in the order of succession of Fakaofu chiefs. In table 2, four varying lists of chiefs are given, divided into mythical and historical periods. In Nikotemo's list, a long time elapsed between Kava te Mafanga, the first man created, and Kava Vasefanua, the first chief of the historical period. Mika's list includes four created men, the first three of whom may all be the same character in the natives' accounts of man's creation, for they mean the rain, the maggot, Kava the old one, and
<pb xml:id="n30" n="24"/>
Kava the originator. Smith (26) lists the legendary descendants of Kava and Tikitiki. Lister (19) presents only chiefs of the historical period.</p>
            <p>
              <table rows="30" cols="3">
                <head>Table 2. Chiefs of Fakaofu</head>
                <row>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="sc">Legendary Period</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="sc">List Given by Nikotemo</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="sc">List Given by Mika</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="sc">List Given by Smith</hi>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Kava te mafanga</cell>
                  <cell>Leua te ilo</cell>
                  <cell>Tikitiki and Talanga</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell>Kava te matua</cell>
                  <cell>Kava</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell>Kava te mafanga</cell>
                  <cell>Singano</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell>Kava Vasefanua</cell>
                  <cell>Fiu</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell>Leaui</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell>Lailii</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell>Te Ilo</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="sc">Historical Period</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="sc">List Given by Lister</hi>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Kava Vasefanua</cell>
                  <cell>Kava Vasefanua (One of the first four created men)</cell>
                  <cell>Kava</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Pio and Te Vaka</cell>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell>Tai</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Fafie</cell>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell>Te Mafanga</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Leua</cell>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell>Leua</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Pio</cell>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Foua</cell>
                  <cell>Foua</cell>
                  <cell>Foua</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Te Laufue</cell>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Amatanga</cell>
                  <cell>Amatanga</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Avafatu</cell>
                  <cell>Avafatu</cell>
                  <cell>Pofou</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Leitaiolo</cell>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell>Taupe</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Poufau</cell>
                  <cell/>
                  <cell>Avafatu</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Taupe</cell>
                  <cell>Taupe</cell>
                  <cell>Savaike</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Savaiki</cell>
                  <cell>Savaiki</cell>
                  <cell>Letaiolo</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Lika</cell>
                  <cell>Lika</cell>
                  <cell>Lika</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Longotasi</cell>
                  <cell>Longotasi</cell>
                  <cell>Langitasi</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Vaopuka</cell>
                  <cell>Vaopuka</cell>
                  <cell>Vaopuka</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Te Taulu</cell>
                  <cell>Kava Taulu</cell>
                  <cell>Te Taulu</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Te Fuli</cell>
                  <cell>Te Fuli</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>Savaiki</cell>
                  <cell>Savaiki</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
              </table>
            </p>
            <p>The dates when three high chiefs of Fakaofu were living can be definitely established: Taupe was chief in 1841 when the United States Exploring Expedition visited the island; Te Taulu, in 1889 when Lister visited the island; and Savaiki, in 1916 when the last chief went out of official position. Between 1841 and 1916, a period of seventy-five years, seven high chiefs held office, each high chief reigning on an average of 10 to 11 years. This short period appears reasonable, for it was the practice at Fakaofu to elect an old man from the chiefly families to succeed the chief who had died.</p>
            <p>The Fakaofuan chiefs who were sent to rule Nukunono after its conquest did not make a permanent residence there until four generations after the time of Te Vaka. The first ruler was Pio, but Sunga was the first chief to settle there permanently. From him were descended all the chiefs of Nukunono who ruled until the abolition of the office in 1916.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n31" n="25"/>
            <p>
              <figure xml:id="MacToke025a">
                <graphic url="MacToke025a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke025a-g"/>
                <head>Table 3. Genealogy of Nukunono high chiefs<note xml:id="fn1_25" n="*"><p>The Atafu chiefs are descended from Tepine; the Nukunono chiefs are descendede from Sunga.</p></note></head>
              </figure>
            </p>
            <p>The high chieftainship passed from father to son except for Ulua who succeeded his uncle. One generation has lived on the island since Takua's generation. Allowing 25 years for each generation beginning with Sunga, the line of Nukunono chiefs began between 1783 and 1808.</p>
            <p>The chiefly line of Atafu came from Fakaofu and was a branch of the family which established the chiefs of Nukunono. Tonuia, the first chief and also supreme priest, came to Atafu two generations later. The village was so small that no chief was immediately elected to succeed him, but when the population increased, Tonuia's grandson, Foli, was chosen. Foli's brother succeeded him and then the son and grandson of two of his paternal uncles. Since then the village has been ruled by an officer appointed by the British Colonial Administration.</p>
            <p>The genealogy of Tonuia commences seven generations before him with Kava of Fakaofu. Since Tonuia five generations have lived on Atafu. But because the first generation—Tonuia's married children—and the last—the present children—have lived only half a generation on the island, the time since Tonuia is estimated at 100 years, 25 years for each generation, according to the accepted period of a Polynesian generation established by the Polynesian Society of New Zealand. Thus Tonuia came to Atafu some years before 1833, reckoning the generations from 1933.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n32" n="26"/>
            <p>The longest list of Fakaofu chiefs contains 19 names. Estimated on a basis of 11 years to each ruler, the list as given by Nikotemo would put Kava Vasefanua, the first historical chief, as reigning in 1717. But according to the genealogy of Nukunono and Atafu kings, this line began in 1633. The names of the first five historical chiefs of Fakaofu (Kava Vasefanua, Pio, Fafie, Leua, and Pio) and the first five ancestors of the Nukunono chiefs (Kava, Pio, Kolo, Fafie, and Pio) in the lists given by Nikotemo, are identical except for one name. If we assume that these two lists are in reality one, the chieftainship at Fakaofu must have passed from father to son during the first five generations of the historical period as indicated in the Nukunono genealogy, and have been held by each chief for 25 years. This would put the rule of Kava Vasefanua at about 1647, closely checking with the time of Kava, the head of the line of Nukunono and Atafu chiefs. Nikotemo's statement that Kava, the first ancestor of the Nukunono chiefs, was not Kava Vasefanua, was contradicted by a Nukunono informant. It seems probable that these two chiefs were one person. If this is true, the Atafu and Nukunono chiefs were appointed from the family of the high chief of Fakaofu, a very likely thing to have occurred.</p>
            <p>Nikotemo said that Kava married a woman belonging to the early people of Nukunono. Thus Kava may be the first man of Fakaofu, whose name we have accepted as Kava or the unnamed Rarotongan who first settled Fakaofu and took a wife from Nukunono. (See. p. <ref target="#n25">19</ref>.) It is a possibility which leads us to the point that all the stories of Kava and the first chief of Fakaofu may refer to one individual, who first settled on Fakaofu. If he is Kava Vasefanua, he appears to have lived about the middle of the seventeenth century. The history of the Fakaofu people of the Tokelau Islands then becomes a very recent event in the annals of the Polynesian peoples.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d2-d2-d3" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Contacts with Other Islands</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The Tokelau records are filled with references to visits to other islands of Polynesia; evidence from these islands of the arrival of Tokelau people corroborates these tales. At present, unauthenticated claims are made of fabulous voyages by the early Tokelau sailors. Natives who sailed on European ships to New Zealand, Tahiti, and Hawaii returned and told of the Polynesians on these islands; and in a short time names from these distant islands were incorporated in the old stories. The Cook Islands, Borabora, Hawaii, and even Rapa are mentioned now when one inquires about the lands which the ancient Tokelau navigators visited. Newell (19) says there is independent evidence, besides the tales of voyages, of direct contact with Hawaii, but he does not give the source of his information. The natives knew stars by which they say they sailed to Hawaii.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n33" n="27"/>
            <p>Although two survivors of a wreck lived on Fakaofu and Captain Morvan visited the island before Hale came to it in 1841, it is not probable that from either of these sources the natives first learned the names of the outside islands, which they gave to Hale (11, p. 166). Their history independently confirms that they visited or were visited by people from the places which Hale mentioned to them. On Atafu Hale (11) found that they knew no island but their own. “They repeated after me the names Fanua Samoa, Fanua Tongatabu, Fanua Viti [Fiji], and asked in what direction they lay, and if we came from them.” At Fakaofu, however, the natives knew of Fiji, Tonga, and Samoa, but did not know where these islands were located. They also spoke of Pukapuka (Danger Island, unknown to Hale) but did not mention any of the Ellice Islands.</p>
            <p>At Atafu, Newell heard an old song in which are narrated the exploits of Tokelau navigators who voyaged to Fiji and Tonga under the guidance of the god, Tui Tokelau. Burrows (5) states that marauding expeditions to Fiji were quite common, and one story tells of a victory won at a place called Atu Lau, which was preserved afterwards as a safe haven for canoes from the Tokelau Islands.</p>
            <p>There were attacks by Tongans on Fakaofu, but no details are remembered. A canoe with eight Tongan women was blown from its course to Nukunono. When it arrived the men of the village were working in their coconut plantations across the lagoon. The women of Nukunono went down to the beach and killed the Tongans because they knew that their men would take them.</p>
            <p>At one time a great war canoe from Samoa appeared at Fakaofu and landed at Fenua Loa Islet. It was under the command of a chief named Lekena. He launched an outrigger canoe from his double canoe and sent two men to Fakaofu. At that time there were many men fishing for bonito off shore near the village. They gave chase to the two Samoans, and after some trouble caught them and took them to the village. They were afraid to attack the men in the double canoe, however. The Samoans sailed away, leaving the two men, Folinga and Latu, at Fakaofu. Samoa seems to have been well known to the Tokelau people, and voyages between the islands were not uncommon. Atafu is also frequently mentioned in many Samoan legends of their voyages.</p>
            <p>Storms blew many canoes traveling within the group to the islands to the southwest. On a voyage from Fakaofu to Atafu, Te Fou, the brother of Te Laufue, the chief, was carried by a storm to Futuna, where he was killed by the Futunans. In 1826 and 1827 two Tokelau canoes, driven by a hurricane, arrived at Rotuma, where the castaways settled (15). Storms brought Tokelau canoes to Uvea several times, as reported by early Uvean missionaries and by Burrows (4). Among the earliest Tokelau arrivals
<pb xml:id="n34" n="28"/>
were Tua and Fafie, who came four or five generations before the arrival of the mission in 1837. Fafie returned to the Tokelau Islands, but Tua remained at Uvea. In 1832 Kiva and Singano, two more Tokelau men, were driven off their course and landed at Uvea (4).</p>
            <p>In about 1846 a hurricane devastated Fakaofu, uprooting all the coconut trees and forcing the natives to leave the island to avoid starvation. Attempting to go to a neighboring island, north winds arose and dispersed the fleet. After six weeks at sea two of the canoes eventually arrived off Uvea. The missionaries there say that the wanderers knew the island and feared to land because of the reputed cruelty of the Uveans. However, due to the influence of the Catholic missionaries, the reception was peaceful and hospitable. It is certain that other voyagers from Fakaofu had landed there not long before, for a Tokelau girl on shore recognized the shipwrecked chief as her uncle.</p>
            <p>Hale and Wilkes mention no evidence of early knowledge of the Ellice or Gilbert Islands, and it is likely that few canoes from the Ellice group ever reached Tokelau which lies directly into the wind for most of the year. However, there is a tale of one Ellice islander, Te Foe of Nukulaelae, who, while traveling between two of the Ellice Islands, was blown to Fakaofu. He and his family were looked upon as foreigners and were not allowed full social privileges of the island; they were called <hi rend="i">alatafatafa</hi>, which is said to mean people who had to keep at a distance from the council house while the chief's meetings were in order.</p>
            <p>The Wilkes Expedition found that the people of Nukufetai in the Ellice Islands were well acquainted with the Tokelau Islands and named all four islands including Olosenga (Swains Island).</p>
            <p>There is direct evidence that the Tokelau people knew of Manihiki, Tongareva, and the other atolls east of Pukapuka. Just at the beginning of European contacts 11 inhabitants of Manihiki departed to visit the other islands “to the west”. After five weeks at sea they arrived at Olosenga, and were later transported to one of the northern Tokelau Islands by a whaling ship. One of the party reached Samoa where Turner (32), who reports the story, found him. Tongareva is known by the Tokelau islanders as Manga-loalo, an islet of the atoll. Rarotonga of the Cook Islands is mentioned in a single reference in Tokelau legends (32, p. 21).</p>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d2-d3" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Western Contact</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d2-d3-d1" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Discovery</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Olosenga was the first island in the Tokelau group to be seen by Europeans. Quiros, leading a Spanish expedition across the Pacific in 1606, landed there in search of water for his ships. The natives then inhabiting
<pb xml:id="n35" n="29"/>
the island doubtless regarded the strange and magnificent craft as arrivals from the world of the gods. Quiros describes the men in the ten canoes which came out to meet him, as “… singing to the sound of their paddles, one of them leading, to whom the rest replied.” Some stood erect in the canoes, making gestures, dancing and singing “to show themselves joyful before our ships.” This joy and awe is the same attitude with which many other Polynesians received the first white men to their islands. The Spaniards, however, looked upon this with suspicion and fighting arose before a landing party could go ashore. Later in their stay, when the ships moved because a change of wind made their position close to the reef dangerous, the natives believed that the ships were departing and attempted in small boats to hold the oars of the crews. They slipped a rope about the line to the launch and tried to bring it over the reef as they did their own canoes, an action which the Spaniards interpreted as wholly hostile.</p>
            <p>Some of the natives were apparently defiant, for Quiros (23) states:</p>
            <p>At this time a very audacious old man came in one of the canoes to the <hi rend="i">Capitana</hi> with a very long and thick lance of palm wood, well-balanced. He had on a sort of cloak or hood made of a leaf dyed crimson and a hat they had given him from the launch … He made faces with his eyes and mouth. In a very loud voice he seemed to order us to surrender. With his lance brandished menacingly he made as many thrusts as he could. With the intention of making him quiet, two muskets were fired off. The others cried out and threw up their arms, but he made light of it. With great pride he showed more signs of his anger; and finding he could do nothing, he quickly passed both ships and went to where the launch was following the other canoes.</p>
            <p>This may have been a challenge to fight or, possibly, the contortions of a priest who was making a show of bravado before the gods to impress his companions and the community.</p>
            <p>Torres, who was captain of one of Quiros' ships, was sent with a party to get wood and water and to capture four boys, if possible. The natives ranged themselves on the beach against the party of whose landing Torres (23) gives the following account:</p>
            <p>All with one voice gave a <hi rend="i">pabori</hi>, which I understood to be a kind of intoned shout or war cry; and they closed with a noise very brief but terrible. They came against us, and it was necessary to attack them with vigor, owing to their being so close. The <hi rend="i">arquebuses</hi>, which are a terror to those who do not know them but see their effects, terrified them; and they fled, carrying, as they had brought, the king or chief in a litter on their shoulders, holding palm leaves to shade him.</p>
            <p>Several old men remained and welcomed the Spaniards, humbly requesting them to sit in the shade and offering them coconuts to drink. On the island the Spaniards found a village with a population numbering between 100 and 200 persons, never seen again by Europeans.</p>
            <p>Mendaña, with whom Quiros sailed at the end of the sixteenth century, passed close to the island of Atafu, though he did not see it. Two hundred
<pb xml:id="n36" n="30"/>
years later, on June 21, 1765, Byron discovered Atafu and named it “Duke of York Island”. He sent two boat parties ashore, but they found no sign of inhabitants. On June 6, 1791, Captain Edwards, knowing of Byron's discovery, came here in search of the mutineers of the <hi rend="i">Bounty</hi>. There were no permanent inhabitants, but the crew which went ashore discovered houses containing fishing gear and canoes, indicating that the island was used as a temporary residence for fishing parties. These probably came from the other islands of the group before the island was permanently colonized from Fakaofu. Hamilton (8), who accompanied Edwards as surgeon on the <hi rend="i">Pandora</hi>, adds:</p>
            <p>Stages and wharfs were likewise discovered in different parts of the creek … The skeleton of a very large fish supposed to be a whale was found near the beach; and a place of venerable aspect formed entirely by the hand of Nature and resembling a Druidical temple commanded their attention. The falling of a very large tree formed an arch through which the interior part of the temple was seen, which heightened the perspective … At the extreme end of the temple three altars were placed, the center one higher than the other two, on which some white shells were piled in regular order.</p>
            <p>Captain Edwards left mirrors and trinkets in the empty houses on the beach. Three days later, he sailed southward and discovered Nukunono which he named “Duke of Clarence Island”. He could not make contact with the people but saw “<hi rend="i">morais</hi> and burying places” and canoes sailing across the lagoons with “stages in their middle”. No stone structures resembling marae or quays now stand on the island.</p>
            <p>In 1841, Captain Hudson of the United States Exploring Expedition visited Byron's “Duke of York Island” with two ships and discovered a small population living on the island. <name type="person" key="name-120617">Horatio Hale</name> (11), ethnologist and philologist of the Wilkes Expedition, rightly believed that the people of Atafu belonged to Fakaofu.</p>
            <p>They were temporary residents at Atafu. This declaration proceeds partly from their own statement that they had no chief with them and partly from the circumstance that they had none but double canoes with them, which are best adapted for a sea voyage.</p>
            <p>Hale also assumed that they had had previous intercourse with foreigners, probably at Fakaofu, because of their desire to barter, and because of the fact that they had blue beads and a plane-iron in their possession. He estimated that there were 20 men with women and children. Wilkes gives an estimate of 40, as counted by Hudson. Possibly the overpopulation of Fakaofu, between 500 and 600 as counted by Hale, accounts for the establishment of a permanent settlement on Atafu.</p>
            <p>Captain Morvan in command of the <hi rend="i">Adolphe</hi>, a French ship from Morlaix, discovered Fakaofu in 1841. Shortly afterward the two ships of the United States Exploring Expedition came upon the island independently
<pb xml:id="n37" n="31"/>
(33). The men of these two ships believed Fakaofu to be a new discovery. The natives visited them in canoes, and a small party from the ships went ashore on the largest islet, Fenua Fala. On the second day Captain Hudson led a group ashore on the village islet. The chiefs and people were arranged to meet them on the shore, the old chief and his council of older men sitting before the rest. The natives were greatly alarmed, thrust presents upon the white men, wrapped their officers in mats, pressed noses with them, and begged them to be seated. When the fears of the natives had been allayed, the party walked into the village and inspected the houses and the temple of the supreme deity, Tui Tokelau. From an examination of this temple. Hale learned that a European ship had been previously wrecked on the atoll:</p>
            <p>At the foot of this pile of benches lay a piece of timber which was recognized as the windlass of a vessel. It was about four feet long by one foot in diameter and was much worn, as though it had been exposed to the action of the waves. When we asked from whence it came, they replied, from the sea. And in answer to further inquiries, they related that a few years ago, three or four, a vessel was lost in the surf, and that two men got ashore, Fakaaukamea, (the other's name we omitted to write) and that both have since died. On examining closer, it appeared that the windlass was not the only relic of the wreck. Three crossbeams, about twenty feet long and six inches thick, which were fastened to the center posts about ten feet from the ground had evidently beeen cut and planed by regular tools; and we found on inquiring that they were also from the vessel. As the names of two survivors had both Polynesian characters, it occurred to us that they might possibly have been Sandwich islanders and from them the natives may have obtained the word <hi rend="i">Debolo</hi>, which so much puzzled us. The Hawaiians, being Christians, would naturally apply the word to the native gods as a term of contempt; and the islanders not understanding, of course, its precise force, might adopt it as synonymous with their word <hi rend="i">atua</hi>, deity.</p>
            <p>This ship wrecked upon the reef of Fakaofu or the visit of Captain Morvan probably brought the European beads and articles which Hale and Hudson found in the possession of the natives at both Fakaofu and Atafu. There are no other records of visiting ships before 1841. The first-hand account of Hale is a picture of the Tokelau people in the virgin state of their culture when Fakaofu had become supreme in the group.</p>
            <p>In 1841 Captain Hudson sailed southward from Fakaofu to find Quiros Island, the location of which he had learned in Samoa from a whaling captain named Swain. He ran down Olosenga, and seeing no inhabitants on it, sailed around to make a running survey. He gave the atoll the name “Swains Island”, after his informant in Samoa, by which name it is now generally known.</p>
            <p>Not long after the arrival of Hudson, three Frenchmen settled on Olosenga as agents of a French company to procure oil. Natives from Fakaofu were living on the island at the time of their arrival. In 1856 an American, Eli Jennings from New Bedford, who had lived and married in Samoa, came to the island. Jennings took over the island and the native laborers from the
<pb xml:id="n38" n="32"/>
Frenchmen, who departed for Samoa. Jennings became master and sole owner of the island, and it has remained in the hands of his family since his death.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d2-d3-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Missions</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Since the latter half of the nineteenth century the atolls of Atafu, Nukunono, and Fakaofu have been in contact with the outside world through the vessels of missionaries and traders; and the history of the people is fairly well known.</p>
            <p>In 1846 a hurricane devastated Fakaofu. To escape starvation, many of the natives set out in their canoes to go, presumably, to Nukunono which had escaped the storm (p. 28). But winds dispersed the canoes and only two survived. These landed eventually at Uvea (Wallis Island) and found there the Catholic missionaries who had been converting the Wallis islanders since 1837. The discovery of Fakaofu had been known to the missionaries for only five years, and this was their first contact with the natives. In 1852 another hurricane swept over Fakaofu, and news of the subsequent havoc and starvation finally reached Samoa. Mgr. Bataillon, head of the Samoan Catholic mission, sent a ship from Samoa to Wallis, where the natives loaded 16,000 coconuts on board for the starving Tokelau people; and the ship sailed to their rescue under the leadership of Father Padel (1). South Americans had raided the island for laborers not many years before, and the Fakaofu people, in spite of their plight, refused to go on board the ship, as they feared some ruse to carry them away. Only by long hours of argument, by defying the natives' god, and by burning his temple and the mats which were bound about his stone did Father Padel finally convince the people to leave their island. However, several of the old people would not leave, and the priest was forced to send back some of the younger people to care for their elders.</p>
            <p>In 1861 Mgr. Bataillon and Father Poupinel took back to Tokelau a party of 16 men and women who had gone to Wallis in 1852. During their sojourn at Wallis they had been converted to Christianity. The people who had remained at Fakaofu would not accept the missionaries or allow the converts to preach in the island, although they would allow the latter to return to their former homes. But the missionaries would not permit this and set sail again with all their natives on board. The chief's son was among those who were to be carried away from the island for the second time. His old father, too grieved to lose his son again, at the last moment rushed out to the ship and granted permission for the missionaries to land and preach Christianity.</p>
            <p>In 1863 Father Elloy of Samoa visited Fakaofu but found that paganism still reigned. His visit was ill received by the natives. He continued to the
<pb xml:id="n39" n="33"/>
island of Nukunono, where Christianity had been brought by a native, Justin, who had been for some years with the mission in Samoa. Upon Father Elloy's arrival no natives appeared on the beach. All had fled, fearing that his ship signified another raid of the South Americans, who had carried away a great portion of the population during the interval of 1861–1863. Finally Justin came out when he saw the soutane of a Catholic priest on deck. Justin had virtually become chief of the island and had attempted to instruct his people in the Christian religion. His simple knowledge and enthusiasm had so fired the natives that in 1863 many of them sailed for Samoa to find a priest to baptize them. They arrived at Savai'i and were piloted to Apia on Upolu, where they were instructed. Later they returned to Nukunono in a European ship. In 1868 two Samoan catechists were left on the islands of Fakaofu and Nukunono. At this time only 80 people were left on Nukunono by the slave raiders.</p>
            <p>In the same years that the Catholics were introducing their faith among the Tokelau people, the London Missionary Society was sending trained native teachers from Samoa to convert the Tokelau people to Protestantism. In 1858 the mission ship <hi rend="i">John Williams</hi> had visited Fakaofu with the Rev. Murray, but the natives were not receptive to the idea of having two mission-trained Rarotongans among them, saying that there was no place for them to live and nothing to eat. Two Tokelau men aboard the ship, who had found their way to Samoa some years before, were left with the hope that they would introduce Christianity. The Reverend Murray (18) reports tersely: “We did not accomplish all that we desired.”</p>
            <p>The ship sailed to Atafu where they left the two native teachers intended for Fakaofu. The new teaching was immediately successful and the next year two canoes set out with one of the Samoan missionaries to carry Christianity to the other islands. At Nukunono they found the people already converted to Catholicism, and after spending five days there they went to Fakaofu, where the chief and his counselor opposed Christianity. The chief ruled that all those who wished to become Christians must go to Atafu to live under the leadership of Mafala, the Samoan teacher. Mafala's party got as far as Nukunono safely, but on the way to Atafu they were driven by head winds to Samoa, nearly 300 miles away. The same year they were returned to Atafu by a mission ship. The mission ships returned again in 1865 and 1868.</p>
            <p>Atafu has always been entirely Protestant, and Nukunono, Catholic, but Fakaofu has members of both churches. At Fakaofu the Catholics were molested for many years, and twice there have been fights between the two religious groups. In the fight which occurred about 1880 the high chief was killed.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n40" n="34"/>
            <p>The full account of the raids of South Americans upon these isolated and unprotected atolls can never be made. According to the reports of missionaries, the capturing of natives from the Tokelau Islands began before 1852 and lasted as late as 1867 or 1870. Both Nukunono and Fakaofu suffered much. According to the Reverend Newell (19) 247 people were taken from Fakaofu in 1863. Probably it was at this same time that Nukunono was raided, leaving only 80 inhabitants. Just before the arrival of the missionary ship in 1868 the Peruvians had taken 116 men from Fakaofu and 30 men from Atafu.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d2-d3-d3" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Present Government</hi>
            </head>
            <p>In 1877 the Tokelau Islands were nominally included under the protection of Great Britain by an Order in Council which claimed jurisdiction over all islands of the Pacific not previously ceded or claimed by other powers. In 1889 Commander Oldham on H.M.S <hi rend="i">Egeria</hi> landed at each of the three northern atolls and officially raised the Union Jack, declaring the group under the protectorate of Great Britain. In 1916 the Tokelau Islands, called officially the Union Islands, were incorporated into the Colony of the Gilbert and Ellice Islands. In 1925 the Union Islands were transferred to the Administration of Western Samoa, a New Zealand mandate. This was most acceptable to the natives who feel they have some bonds of kindship with Samoa and regard her with affection as the source of their missionaries. At this time Swains Island, Olosenga, was placed by request of the Jennings family under the jurisdiction of American Samoa.</p>
            <p>At present all government is administered by native officials. Each island has a magistrate (<hi rend="i">faipule</hi>) who combines the duties of judge and head of the village council, a mayor (<hi rend="i">pulenu'u</hi>), a chief of police and one or two policemen (<hi rend="i">leoleo</hi>), all of whom are appointed and paid by the administration at Samoa. Annually a member of the Native Office in Samoa visits the islands to judge cases outside the jurisdiction of the native official and to settle any local difficulties.</p>
            <p>Each village has a native council (<hi rend="i">fono</hi>) of men who determine all matters of village government and policy. The women have a committee, presided over by the pastor's wife, which inspects daily the sanitation of the houses and the health of the small children.</p>
            <p>One native medical practitioner is the health officer for all the islands, though each village has a dresser and a nurse to do the superficial medical work. At Atafu there is a hospital to which the serious cases of sickness are sent from all the islands.</p>
            <p>Fakaofu has a wireless station operated by a native boy who communicates daily with Apia, Samoa.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
      </div>
      <pb xml:id="n41" n="35"/>
      <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3" type="section">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">Social Organization</hi>
        </head>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d1" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Biological Family</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d1-d1" type="section">
            <p>The individual is a member of two divisions of society throughout life. The first and more definite grouping is the kindred, a vertical division of society, based either on recognized lineal descent from a common ancestor or adoption. Descent is reckoned primarily through the patrilineal line, though the matrilineal line determines many social relations and activities. The second grouping is the generations, a horizontal division based on age, cutting across kindred. Five generations may live during the lifetime of the individual, but only three function actively in the life of society—the children, the adolescents and young married people who make the body of the community, and the older people who direct the welfare of society.</p>
            <p>Each individual living a full span of life passes through these three periods and in each his position in the family and community changes. In childhood, he has few responsibilities. Through adolescence, he is a junior member of his family group and of society, a worker providing food, doing most of the menial labor, and caring for his elders. During this period marriage usually takes place and the individual establishes his own family. In the last period, the individual no longer does the manual labor but becomes head of his household and shares in the direction of the kindred and community affairs. The passage from one period to the next is marked by rites or initiatory preparations which allow the individual to pass safely into the following phase of life.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d1-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Birth</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The physiological processes of conception and the part of fatherhood in the production of children were fully appreciated here as elsewhere in Polynesia. The offspring was known to be descended from both the father's and the mother's lines.</p>
            <p>The time of birth was calculated from the cessation of menstruation, which was recognized as the symptom of pregnancy. In former times delivery was expected after nine moons had passed. The projection of the umbilicus from the distended abdomen of the woman was considered also as a sign of the month of the delivery. At the end of her pregnancy the woman was massaged every day and taken on walks which were thought to bring on an easy delivery. No food tapus were placed upon her. The only restriction was that she must always be accompanied by other people when she entered the plantations and gardens beyond the village or traveled to other islets. At night a man always accompanied her to protect her from the attacks of spirits.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n42" n="36"/>
            <p>Birth took place in the home of the mother's parents. At the commencement of labor pains, the husband sent for the midwife (<hi rend="i">sisiki</hi>), and the husband and two or three women of the wife's family aided at the delivery. The woman was screened by mats at one end of the house. Relatives gathered in the outer chamber but were not allowed to witness the operations.</p>
            <p>A young boy or girl was sent to watch the tide, for it was thought very propitious for the ease of the mother that her delivery take place at flood tide. As the full tide turned and ebbed it was believed a magical influence of like producing like would aid the woman in labor. The tide was watched particularly if the labor pains were protracted and delivery delayed. Messengers were constantly sent for reports on the sea, and as full tide was reached the woman was fed the very soft pith from the top of a coconut tree, which acted as a stimulant. As soon as the child was born and had begun to cry, the women relatives set up a shout of “Tulou! Tulou!” to hide the cries of the baby from any evil spirit hovering to steal the soul of the child.</p>
            <p>Either of two positions was taken by the woman during the accouchement. She lay on her back with her husband sitting behind her head or reclined in his lap while he held her under her arms. This second position, however, was not commonly practiced. Lying on the floor the woman put her arms behind her and clasped her husband around his neck to brace herself during the delivery. The midwife sat opposite the husband and received the child on a soft mat. If the delivery was delayed, the midwife massaged the woman's abdomen, and expertly inserted her hand to turn the child.</p>
            <p>A bed of soft <hi rend="i">puka</hi> leaves was placed under the woman's thighs before delivery, and after the birth a pad of these leaves was placed against her vagina and held firmly in place by a plaited bandage (<hi rend="i">noafaele laupuka</hi>) attached to a belt. It was also customary to wrap a band (<hi rend="i">noa faele</hi>) of soft matting made of pandanus (<hi rend="i">laukie</hi>) 4 or 5 inches wide around the woman's abdomen as a support and to help her regain her natural figure. This band is unfortunately no longer worn by the Tokelau women.</p>
            <p>As soon as the child lay fully on the mat, the midwife inspected it. She sucked the mucous from its mouth and nose, and if it was pale and lifeless she blew into its mouth. If any blood was pulsating from the mother, she pressed it into the child by working on the umbilical cord (<hi rend="i">pito</hi>) with two fingers, for the blood was considered the life of the child and would cause it to cry. Then the cord was immediately tied with a thread of hibiscus bark (<hi rend="i">fau</hi>) and cut with a pearl shell knife (<hi rend="i">tifa</hi>). If it continued to bleed unnaturally the end was stopped with a fine white powder scraped from a fresh coconut stipule (<hi rend="i">kaka</hi>).</p>
            <p>The child was bathed with warm water and wrapped in soft <hi rend="i">puka</hi> leaves. On the first day it was fed the juice of very young coconuts and the milk or cream squeezed from grated coconuts. For the first-born this feeding
<pb xml:id="n43" n="37"/>
was continued for five days before the child was given the breast. During these five days the mother was fed only coconut juice and a little food.</p>
            <p>After birth the severed cord and placenta were buried beneath a stone, and a coconut was planted over them. The tree growing from the nut became the property of the child. A mutual sympathy existed between child and tree. As the tree grew, so the child grew—straight and strong, or bowed and weak. When the two reached maturity the tree bore fruit for its owner.</p>
            <p>When the child was one day old, magical influence was practiced to bring him success in the most important part of his life's work. A male child was given pieces of raw bonito to suck so that he might become a skilled fishing captain. A baby girl was given the tips of a squid's tentacles to play with and suck, so that she might become a clever fisherwoman on the reefs.</p>
            <p>The mother of a first-born child remained in the house for five days and then went to the beach to bathe herself, after which she was massaged and rubbed with coconut oil. Then she dressed in her finest mats, a necklace, and head wreath of flowers, and paraded through the village and into the meeting house (<hi rend="i">falefono</hi>). She was accompanied by a young woman of the family and followed by several male relatives, who were armed with spears. The rest of the village gathered in the meeting house or along the way and joined in singing while admiring her beauty, considered in its prime at this time. After the display she returned to her house where she suckled her baby for the first time. According to Burrows (5) this public appearance of the mother after the birth of the first child took place ten days after delivery. If a woman moved to another island of the group and had a child there, the same ceremony was performed whether it was her first child or not.</p>
            <p>As soon as a birth had taken place, relatives who were waiting in the home began preparations for a birth feast (<hi rend="i">katamunga</hi>). Mats, which had been plaited after the announcement of conception, were brought as gifts (<hi rend="i">sanga o te alopo'u</hi>). The small <hi rend="i">epe epe</hi> mats were plaited of <hi rend="i">fala</hi> pandanus; the <hi rend="i">kiekie</hi> mats were plaited of <hi rend="i">kie</hi> pandanus.</p>
            <p>Little importance was attached to the naming of children. The name was chosen by the parents either before or after the birth.</p>
            <p>No true religious rites were performed for the benefit of new-born babies or the protection of the mothers. If the parents of a child were especially delighted and wished to demonstrate their appreciation to the gods, they made a special offering for the child to the supreme deity, Tui Tokelau, at the annual ceremony following the birth of the child.</p>
            <p>It was believed that twins were the result of overwork during pregnancy. Twins had but one “soul” or spirit between them, and if one should die the other would probably follow. (Improper feeding is the chief cause of infant mortality and, as twins receive identical treatment, both are likely to die if improperly treated.) It was recognized that twins are likely to appear in
<pb xml:id="n44" n="38"/>
the same families in successive generations. Boy and girl twins are called <hi rend="i">masanga alei</hi>; twins of the same sex, <hi rend="i">masanga</hi>.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d1-d3" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Childhood</hi>
            </head>
            <p>A child stayed with his mother, or with a wet-nurse living outside the home, until he was weaned—a period which often lasted two years. Adoption was common, and a child frequently left home when he was one or two years old. No strong feeling of solidarity existed within the family proper and children were freely exchanged. Collateral relatives of the parents who were childless often brought up a child. When a child was old enough to assist in the work of the household and had several young brothers and sisters, he was sent to help his grandparents, if they were not living in the home of his parents, or to an aunt or uncle who needed extra help. Children frequently left home of their own accord. In the simple village life, where the children roamed in and out of every house, the separation from parents was not absolute. A child always knew who his true parents were and understood his relationship to his foster parents.</p>
            <p>An eldest girl grew up in the house of her mother and remained there. The eldest son usually was taken before he was weaned and was nursed by his adoptive mother, the father's eldest sister, or another aunt in her house, who took especial care of him as the heir in her kindred by direct lineal descent in the male line. She was his <hi rend="i">matua sa</hi> (sacred mother) and he was her <hi rend="i">tama sa</hi> (sacred child). His cousins, the true children of his adoptive mother or aunt, who were living in the household, became his brothers and sisters. The close relationship of these cousins is shown in the extension to them of the same kinship terms used for actual brothers and sisters.</p>
            <p>While the children were young they were unclothed and intermingled without regard to sex or relationship, but as soon as brothers and sisters approached puberty they observed strict rules of avoidance, carried on throughout life between all relatives of the same generation who were termed brother or sister by one of the opposite sex. This usually included all cousins to the fourth degree. All communication between a brother and sister was passed through the intermediary of their mother. A boy must not utter any indecent or obscene language before his sister or conduct himself incorrectly; he must not sit on a mat with her or enter a house where she was. A sister left the presence of a brother unless he was much younger. This avoidance was more rigorous between true brothers and sisters and first cousins than between more distant relatives, but the freedom that existed between unrelated girls and boys was never permitted.</p>
            <p>As soon as a child could run about he played outdoors in the village or on the beach under the guardianship of an older brother or sister. His play
<pb xml:id="n45" n="39"/>
was much of his education, for in it he imitated the practices of older people, and learned much of reef fishing, plaiting, and the preparing and cooking of food. As soon as he was old enough he was put to work by his elders.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d1-d4" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Puberty</hi>
            </head>
            <p>At the first signs of puberty young boys put on a plaited leaf breechcloth (<hi rend="i">malo</hi>); young girls wore the thick pandanus leaf skirt (<hi rend="i">titi</hi>). The boys left their homes where their sisters and female cousins slept and lived in the men's houses (<hi rend="i">fale pa</hi>).</p>
            <p>In former times the village contained several men's houses. All the unmarried male members of a family belonged to one house, which was used as a clubhouse as well as for sleeping quarters. Here men spent their leisure time talking or performing the lighter crafts, such as making fishhooks or twisting fiber into cord and rope.</p>
            <p>While living in the men's houses the education of the boys was completed. They went as crew in the canoes on fishing excursions or across the lagoon to the plantations of coconut and pandanus on the windward islets to gather food. They prepared ovens and built fires and did much of the cooking and serving for the men in the house. They learned to make all the implements used in fishing, and the sons or nephews of a carpenter (<hi rend="i">tofunga</hi>) often learned from him to build houses or canoes. After work the boys sat about and listened to the tales of the older men.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d1-d5" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Circumcision</hi>
            </head>
            <p>All male members of society were circumcised, sometimes at puberty, but usually five or six years later. When the village council decided that there were enough uncircumcised boys for a group operation, the operator (<hi rend="i">to-funga</hi>), Te Nifo (the Tooth, because he operated with a shark's tooth), was ordered to confine them in a single house for the operation. The operation, which was, strictly speaking, superincision, was performed by pulling the foreskin forward and raising it on to a small, flat stick. A longitudinal slit was then made with a shark's tooth. Nothing was applied to aid the healing or to cover the incision.</p>
            <p>The boys were forced to remain in the house until they were well healed. It was tapu to leave even for food. The sons of their father's sisters (<hi rend="i">ilamutu</hi>) accompanied the operator each day to bring food which consisted solely of coconuts in the <hi rend="i">niumata</hi> stage. Fish was tapu.</p>
            <p>When the healing was completed the families of the boys gave a feast of announcement (<hi rend="i">te kainga o te katala faele</hi>). At this time the boys repaid their cousins with gifts for the supply of food which they had brought.</p>
            <p>A woman considered an uncircumcised man unfit to marry.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n46" n="40"/>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d1-d6" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Courtship and marriage</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The tapu placed on men and women of blood relationship was the only restriction on unmarried people in sexual matters. Both boys and girls entered upon a series of love affairs and experiences, which received the tacit consent of their parents as long as they did not become scandalous.</p>
            <p>Marriage took place when the children were 16 or 18 years old and was usually the result of parental planning. The family council, which decided the matter of a boy's marriage, was composed chiefly of members of the paternal side of the family from whom the boy would receive the greater part of his inheritance.</p>
            <p>In making formal suit, the boy called upon the parents of the girl and presented them with a gift of food (<hi rend="i">kainiu</hi>) which they accepted. After the formal and evasive remarks which always preface the conversation of Polynesians soliciting for one another, the boy made the most indirect and brief allusion to the object of his visit and departed. The girl's family made inquiries about the boy's character and ability to fish and work. The immediate kin of the girl met to discuss the proposed alliance and then informed the boy of their decision. He carried the news to his own family.</p>
            <p>Frequently a match was initiated by the boy's father in order to unite two prominent families or to secure a girl of wealth and prestige. The girl's father usually desired an industrious youth, able to work the land and heir to large holdings in his own line. The preliminary arrangements were made by the fathers of the couple.</p>
            <p>When the boy decided the question of marriage himself he usually sent an intermediary, some boy friend, who carried to the young girl a flower or a head wreath made by the suitor and announced to her who had sent it. The girl showed her interest by accepting the gift, and if she was willing to marry the young man she wore it in public where he would be sure to see her. If there had been much intimacy between the two, the boy might make his proposal directly at some secret meeting on the beach or in the plantations beyond the village.</p>
            <p>If love matches were disapproved by the parents as being socially unsuitable, the couple took a canoe and paddled across the lagoon, living perhaps in some little hut used by food gatherers. In a few days they returned and the families reluctantly submitted to the inevitable and allowed the two to set up their own household in the village or to reside with the girl's parents as a married couple of the community.</p>
            <p>The relatives on both sides helped in preparing for the marriage. The boy's eldest paternal aunt (<hi rend="i">matua sa</hi>), as female head of the father's line, decided how many mats were to be made as gifts to the couple, and divided the work among the women of her kindred. She also took charge of the preparation of the food for the wedding. Her daughters, the boy's female
<pb xml:id="n47" n="41"/>
cousins (<hi rend="i">ilamutu</hi>) also prepared mats for him. The boy's maternal relatives prepared mats as gifts for the wedding, but the marriage was less important to them.</p>
            <p>The girl's mother and her eldest maternal aunt, who controlled the female side of the mother's kindred, took charge of the girl's affairs. The mother's eldest brother had more authority at this time and more interest than the father, gathering the food for the wedding feast and directing the work of the kindred. The wedding feast consisted of a few large fish, perhaps a turtle, a pile of coconuts, and dishes of cooked coconut meat and pandanus fruit, for the island produced no garden fruits or fowls.</p>
            <p>A group of the villagers marched among the houses singing and shouting the formal announcement to all the community: “Kaitaoso, Kaitaoso, Kaikati, te mafua, ngutu” (Jump like a fish, jump like a fish, eat by biting the small fish bait in your mouth). This was sung to the bridegroom who secured his bride (literally, the bait) in the wedding. The wedding ceremony consisted only of the presentation of gifts and feasting. All relatives of the couple came to the wedding feast (<hi rend="i">kainganiunga</hi>) bearing the gift mats which they placed before the bride and groom. The bride received the mats of the groom's family, divided them, and presented them to the members of her family who had brought mats. The groom took the mats of the bride's family and distributed them among his relatives. All who aided in preparing for the wedding or contributed to the family display of wealth by the presentation of mats were repaid from gifts brought by relatives of the son-in-law or daughter-in-law. The couple received little of the wealth which passed through their hands. When the distribution was completed, the couple sat together for most of the day, eating with the guests who had come to pay their respects. No symbolic joining of the two, other than their remaining together on a mat throughout the day, signified their marriage. The groom remained at his wife's house and was allowed to sleep with her on the first night. The consummation was called <hi rend="i">moemuli</hi>. Virginity was not held at great premium, and no tests or formal proof were made to the family of the groom.</p>
            <p>Because of fear of incest all cousins within four degrees of kinship on either side of the family were barred from marriage. However, many marriages between third and fourth cousins are found in the genealogy of the first settler of Atafu, and it is probable that on atolls where the populations were never large the extreme limits of the tapu have been disregarded through necessity.</p>
            <p>Polygyny (<hi rend="i">taunonofo</hi>) was practiced, but cases of it are few in the records of early observers on the islands. Pio, one of the first men from Fakaofu to settle on Atafu, had two wives and two separate establishments. The children of his two wives are reckoned separately in the genealogies of
<pb xml:id="n48" n="42"/>
his line. The difficulty of supplying food for two households was the chief restraint in the practice of taking more than one wife.</p>
            <p>Men had recognized mistresses whom they visited in the women's houses and who were called wives (<hi rend="i">avanga</hi>) of the man but were free to marry other men in the village. Women who easily granted their favors to men of the village were called <hi rend="i">fafine taka</hi>, and a man who was known to cohabit regularly with one woman was termed <hi rend="i">moe fale pa</hi>. (This latter term suggests that the woman went to the men's house (<hi rend="i">fale pa</hi>) to sleep (<hi rend="i">moe</hi>) with her lover.) This license doubtlessly existed mainly among the unmarried group, for adultery was regarded as one of the most serious crimes against society. If a woman was found to be unfaithful to her husband, she suffered <hi rend="i">siki te fua</hi> (lifting the jealousy or avenging the husband). The family of the husband destroyed the woman's house, canoe, and property which was owned by her close blood relations, who dared not resist. The public shame and guilt were shared by all members of the family as well as by the iniquitous woman. This act freed the husband from any ties to his wife or obligations to her family. A mutual agreement of separation was common between husbands and wives who found life together unpleasant or incompatible. This constituted divorce if the separation continued over a long period of time.</p>
            <p>No modern substitute has been found for the punishment of adultery and the separation of incompatibles. Without the fear of the old law, abolished by government and church, much promiscuity exists.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d1-d7" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Adult Life</hi>
            </head>
            <p>After marriage, the husband lived in the house of his wife's family and worked and fished with her kindred, but his social group remained primarily that of his father. He took part in the activities of his own kindred and received a share of the fruits of his father's land when they were needed. His father or the head of his kindred still exercised authority over him in all interests of their kindred.</p>
            <p>The girl remained a daughter of her family's house and continued her daily work of caring for the small brothers and sisters, and assisting her mother and the older women of the house in all their work. With the news of her pregnancy, her position became more honored. The news was heralded with great rejoicing by both families and a feast of the first pregnancy was immediately planned. The cherished hope of both families for an heir was now promised and the marriage was considered a success.</p>
            <p>When the young couple had children, they still remained in the home of the wife's parents if she was the eldest daughter of the family; but if she was a younger daughter, they frequently set up their own home on the land of the kindred of either side. There is still much variation in this final
<pb xml:id="n49" n="43"/>
settlement, depending upon the number of children in the family of either the wife or the husband, and upon the wealth in land of the respective kindreds. If the husband was the eldest son in his family, he set up his household on his father's land. Before building a house, the consent of the assembled kindred was necessary to occupy the land and take building materials from the plantation.</p>
            <p>When a man had established a household of his own and had become skilled in man's crafts, he assumed an authoritative position within his kindred and retired from active participation in the work for the household, now done by his sons and sons-in-law. He became a member of the village council, a position corresponding to that of the <hi rend="i">matai</hi> of Samoa, who is elected head of his kindred ('<hi rend="i">ainga</hi>) and inherits the family title. If a man was a skilled bonito fisherman, he was given a second position of importance, that of fishing captain (<hi rend="i">tautai</hi>) in the family canoe.</p>
            <p>A man never gave up his fishing until he had become too infirm to paddle his canoe. If he lived to be 65 or 70 years old he joined the chief council group of the village who, with the high chief, governed the community. He and his wife moved to a small house and were cared for by two or three of their elder grandchildren who brought them food from the family oven.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d1-d8" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Death and Burial</hi>
            </head>
            <p>After death, the body of a man was prepared for burial by his father's sister, the body of a woman by her mother's sister. With the aid of other women she washed and oiled the body and dressed it in a new garment of coconut or hibiscus leaf, decorating it with flowers and a wreath on the head. It was finally wrapped in new mats before burial which took place on the day of death. With it were put the mats and pearl shell ornaments (<hi rend="i">lei</hi>) which friends and family had presented.</p>
            <p>The death of a member of the family was an important event to all relatives, who immediately came to express their grief over the body. As soon as the freshly dressed corpse was laid on mats in the center of the house, the family gathered about it and commenced wailing (<hi rend="i">tangi</hi>) and calling the name of the deceased. Each new arrival wailed vociferously for several minutes but, quickly exhausting himself, his cries subsided to the occasional moaning of the others who had already spent themselves and sat rocking their bodies back and forth, gazing at the corpse before them. In modern times this is the only sign of grief except on the part of the wife, who visits the grave of her husband to wail and call upon him to come back. In the past, close relatives shaved off their hair, burned their skin with small burning points of wood, and displayed their grief with much suffering. Relatives performed dances and songs of the dead outside the house of mourning.
<pb xml:id="n50" n="44"/>
The dances (<hi rend="i">taualofa, tangi</hi>) were performed with arm motions while the performers were seated (14).</p>
            <p>The immediate family was confined within their own house under a tapu for a period of 10 days (<hi rend="i">falemanu</hi>) to placate the gods and particularly the spirit of the deceased. Wall screens were dropped and the family sat quietly inside, forbidden to disturb anything or to leave the house for any social observance, even though it were a call to the deathbed of another relative. Anyone who broke the tapu would be killed by a god. A screen of mats was arranged from the house to the sea in order that the inmates might pass to the sea unobserved to perform their toilet. During this time no cooking could be done by the family. All food was brought by neighbors or distant relatives, who left promptly. No other visitors were permitted.</p>
            <p>Burials are made today with the bodies extended, but Lister (14, p. 55) says of former customs:</p>
            <p>The body was placed in the grave, lying on the back, and with the knees bent to the utmost extent, so that the leg was parallel with the thigh. The thigh was extended in line with the body. Two leaflets were laid transversely across the chest. No food or weapons were placed in the grave with it.</p>
            <p>The natives say that formerly graves were made without marks of identification, but Lister (14) states:</p>
            <p>The grave was about 3 feet deep; a mound of coral shingle was raised over it, with a vertical slab of stone at the head and other slabs laid on the top and sides of the mound.</p>
            <p>The grave was made close to the house or in the floor of the house and when the body was lowered into it the eldest sister of the deceased sat at the head of the grave. Since Christianity has been introduced into the islands, separate cemeteries have been made outside the confines of the village, in which the graves are 6 or 7 feet long (<ref target="#MacTokeP010a">pl. 10, <hi rend="i">A</hi></ref>).</p>
            <p>Lister (14, p. 55) writes:</p>
            <p>For five nights after the burial the relatives came to the grave, and, removing the stone which lay over the region of the head, poured coconut oil into the heap … with a cry of mourning. This anointing the grave with oil is still performed in Tonga.</p>
            <p>After two or three days the body was disinterred and brought into the house. The family again washed and oiled it, wrapped fresh mats about it, and buried it again. The new grave was made a fathom deep.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d1-d9" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">The Household</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The family consisting of father, mother, and children is considered a biological unit. It is the source of the living group or household, but not a social entity, participating in social life as a self-contained group. In its
<pb xml:id="n51" n="45"/>
origin the household corresponds with the family, but new members, not necessarily related by blood, are frequently added.</p>
            <p>The determining factor in the arrangement and function of the household is economic. The household is a cooperative domestic unit, in which the members share the land, its produce, and the work. They live together in one house or in nearby sleeping huts and use a common cook shed and fishing canoe. Household affairs are directed by the senior mother and her husband.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d2" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">The Kindred</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d2-d1" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Kinship Terms</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Kinship is extended to persons connected by lineal descent and collateral relationship in both the mother's and the father's family, but genealogies are reckoned by patrilineal descent. In counting generations or tracing relationship, personal names are used. Kinship terminology is applied to contemporary relations with whom the individual is normally associated. This terminology classifies the two preceding and two succeeding generations in lineal descent and collateral relationship. Table 4 is arranged with the generation of the individual in the middle of the horizontal divisions, the first and second preceding generations above, and the first and second succeeding generations below.</p>
            <p><hi rend="i">Matua sa</hi> or <hi rend="i">matua tauaitu</hi> was given as the general term for the father's sister. Actually this term is applied only to the father's eldest sister, who has a particular relationship to her brothers' children and a magical power to curse her brothers and their children, which is reflected in the term <hi rend="i">tauaitu</hi>. The younger sisters of the father are potential <hi rend="i">matua sa</hi>, for if the eldest sister dies, the sister next in age assumes the position of <hi rend="i">matua sa</hi> and inherits the power to curse. The term <hi rend="i">ilamutu</hi> is given for all children of the father's sisters, but the children of the eldest daughter fulfill most of the <hi rend="i">ilamutu's</hi> obligations.</p>
            <p>All ancestors of three generations or more before the individual are termed <hi rend="i">tupunga</hi>, not <hi rend="i">tupuna</hi>, the term for grandparent. All descendants of two generations or more after the individual are termed <hi rend="i">makupuna</hi>.</p>
            <p><hi rend="i">Uso</hi>, which in Samoa means sibling of the same sex as the speaker, is used in the Tokelau dialect with the same meaning, but is also used as a term embracing all one's closer collateral relatives, aunts, uncles, and cousins. <hi rend="i">Tausonga</hi>, which in Samoa means sibling of the opposite sex to the speaker, refers only to the distant relatives of one's kinship group, irrespective of generation. The meaning of “close” and “distant” in the terms <hi rend="i">uso</hi> and <hi rend="i">tausonga</hi> was neither substantiated nor denied by several informants and is perhaps a recent and secondary usage.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n52" n="46"/>
            <p>Specific affinitive terms are lacking except the single term for one's mate, <hi rend="i">avanga</hi>. The sex of the person spoken of is obvious from the use of the word by the speaker. Other relationships by marriage are designated descriptively as: <hi rend="i">tamana taku avanga</hi> (the father of my husband or wife), <hi rend="i">avanga taku tama fafine</hi> (the husband of my daughter), <hi rend="i">matua taku avanga</hi> (the mother of my husband or wife).</p>
            <p>A child is <hi rend="i">tama</hi>, and to designate sex, <hi rend="i">tane</hi> (boy) or <hi rend="i">fafine</hi> (girl) is added. <hi rend="i">Tamafine</hi> was heard in conversations and is probably a synonym for girl. <hi rend="i">Ataliki</hi> (son) and <hi rend="i">afafine</hi> (daughter) are common terms and were said by one informant to be used by both father and mother. This is contrary to Samoan usage, where only the father designates his children thus.</p>
            <p>Foster children or brothers and sisters are designated by the same terms as blood relations with the addition of <hi rend="i">fai</hi> (made). <hi rend="i">Tamana fai</hi> is used to distinguish an adopted son from <hi rend="i">tama moni</hi> (true son) or <hi rend="i">taku tama</hi> (my son). <hi rend="i">Tamana moni</hi> distinguishes a true father from <hi rend="i">tamana</hi>, who may be a father or a father's brother.</p>
            <p>Parallel cousins are distinguished as either brothers or sisters of the speaker. Parallel cousins of the opposite sex on the father's side of the family are classed as <hi rend="i">taina fetau taina</hi> and on the mother's side as <hi rend="i">tuafafine fetau taina</hi>.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d2-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Kindred Relationships</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The functional social group based on blood relationship is the kindred or persons reckoning descent and inheriting property from a common ancestor. Theoretically kinship is reckoned with all those who can trace descent from the earliest common ancestor, but for the requirements of exogamic marriage, the social obligations of blood relatives, and the practical division of land the kindreds trace their origin from a later ancestor.</p>
            <p>The kindred is directed by the eldest living male. When he dies the position passes to his younger brothers, and when they die, to the eldest son of the first head. In this succession system the Tokelau custom of giving the leadership of a group to the eldest man is combined with the usual Polynesian custom of inheriting chieftainship directly from father to eldest son. Formerly the kindred head (<hi rend="i">matai</hi>) received an hereditary title, but due to the modern tendency of society towards a greater independence of the family and household and private ownership of land, this, and the use of the term <hi rend="i">matai</hi>, have been dropped. The kindred head superintends the care and use of kindred lands and directs the affairs and councils of the kindred. However, his residence is in his wife's house, and the land he works is the property of his wife's kindred. Because of his absence from the daily life of his own kindred and his residence away from the land, his eldest sister assumes a position of great importance. She resides on her kindred's property,
<pb xml:id="n53"/>
<table rows="21" cols="11"><head>Table 4. Kinship Terms<note xml:id="fn1-46" n="*"><p>Unless otherwise designated, all terms are for either man or woman speaking.</p></note></head><row><cell/><cell><hi rend="sc">Collateral—Male Side</hi></cell><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell><hi rend="sc">Lineal</hi></cell><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell><hi rend="sc">Collateral—Female Side</hi></cell><cell/></row><row><cell>Male</cell><cell/><cell>Female</cell><cell/><cell/><cell>Male</cell><cell/><cell>Female</cell><cell/><cell/><cell>Male</cell><cell>Female</cell><cell/></row><row><cell>granduncle</cell><cell/><cell>grandaunt</cell><cell/><cell/><cell>grandfather</cell><cell/><cell>grandmother</cell><cell/><cell/><cell>granduncle</cell><cell>grandaunt</cell><cell/></row><row><cell>tupuna</cell><cell/><cell>tupuna</cell><cell/><cell/><cell>tupuna</cell><cell/><cell>tupuna</cell><cell/><cell/><cell>tupuna</cell><cell>tupuna</cell><cell/></row><row><cell>father's brother</cell><cell/><cell>father's sister</cell><cell/><cell/><cell>father</cell><cell/><cell>mother</cell><cell/><cell/><cell>mother's brother</cell><cell>mother's sister</cell><cell/></row><row><cell>tamana</cell><cell/><cell>matua sa, matua tauaitu or matua</cell><cell/><cell/><cell>tamana</cell><cell/><cell>matua</cell><cell/><cell/><cell>tuatina</cell><cell>matua</cell><cell/></row><row><cell>father's brother's</cell><cell/><cell>father's sister's</cell><cell/><cell/><cell>brother</cell><cell>self</cell><cell>sister</cell><cell/><cell/><cell>mother's brother's</cell><cell>mother's sister's</cell><cell/></row><row><cell>son</cell><cell>daughter</cell><cell>son and daughter</cell><cell/><cell/><cell>taina m. s.</cell><cell/><cell>tuafafine m. s.</cell><cell/><cell/><cell>son and daughter</cell><cell>son</cell><cell>daughter</cell></row><row><cell>taina m. s.</cell><cell>tuafafine m. s.</cell><cell>ilamutu or fakatau tuatina</cell><cell/><cell/><cell>tuangane w. s.</cell><cell/><cell>taina w. s.</cell><cell/><cell/><cell>tuatina</cell><cell>taina m. s.</cell><cell>tuafafine m. s.</cell></row><row><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell>oldest</cell><cell/><cell>oldest</cell><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell>tuangane w. s.</cell><cell>taina w. s.</cell></row><row><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell>kimua or fakamua</cell><cell/><cell>kimua</cell><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/></row><row><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell>youngest</cell><cell/><cell>youngest</cell><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/></row><row><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell>kimuli</cell><cell/><cell>kimuli</cell><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/></row><row><cell>father's brother's children's</cell><cell/><cell>father's sister's children's</cell><cell>brother's son</cell><cell>daughter's son</cell><cell>son</cell><cell/><cell>daughter</cell><cell>sister's son</cell><cell>daughter's son</cell><cell>mother's brother's</cell><cell>mother's sister's</cell><cell/></row><row><cell>son</cell><cell>daughter</cell><cell>son and daughter</cell><cell>tama m. s.</cell><cell>tama fafine m. s.</cell><cell>tama or ataliki</cell><cell>tama fafine or afafine</cell><cell/><cell>ilamutu m. s. or fakatau</cell><cell>ilamutu m. s. or fakatau</cell><cell>children's</cell><cell>children's</cell><cell/></row><row><cell>tama</cell><cell>tama fafine</cell><cell>ilamutu</cell><cell>tamasa w. s.</cell><cell>tama sa w. s.</cell><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell>son and daughter</cell><cell>son</cell><cell>daughter</cell></row><row><cell/><cell/><cell>fakatau tuatina</cell><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell>tuatina</cell><cell>tama</cell><cell>tama fafine</cell></row><row><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell>tuatina</cell><cell>tuatina</cell><cell/><cell/><cell/></row><row><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell>tama w. s.</cell><cell>tama fafine w. s.</cell><cell/><cell/><cell/></row><row><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell>grandnephew</cell><cell>grandniece</cell><cell>grandson</cell><cell/><cell>granddaughter</cell><cell>grandnephew</cell><cell>grandniece</cell><cell/><cell/><cell/></row><row><cell/><cell/><cell/><cell>makupunu</cell><cell>makupunu</cell><cell>makupuna</cell><cell/><cell>makupuna</cell><cell>makupuna</cell><cell>makupuna</cell><cell/><cell/><cell/></row></table>
<pb xml:id="n54" n="47"/>
and the men of her household and her sisters' husbands use the kindred plantations which she controls. Because of her residence in the chief household of the kindred, she is termed the <hi rend="i">fatupaepae</hi> (rock of the house foundation). She is the head of the female side of the kindred and directs particularly the work of the women. Due to matrilocal marriage, she also adopts the eldest son of the male head of the kindred, to rear him within the chief household of his own kindred, of which he is representative of the male line and heir to the headship.</p>
            <p>The kindred is not a stable institution but increases with each generation. When it becomes too large to function as a unit, it gradually regroups itself into new kindreds. The common ownership of land is, however, the determining factor in the formation of the kindred, for when the land of a kindred is divided, new groups form in the succeeding generations, each based on the ownership and inheritance of one of the new land divisions.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d2-d3" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Organization of Atafu kindred</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The development of kindred groups from the division of lands at Atafu during its short history of five generations illustrates the formation and organization of the Tokelau kindred. The Atafu community, established by Tonuia and his family with a few followers from Fakaofu, was originally composed of his five married sons, Pio, Malokie, Laufati, Vaovela, and Taua; his two daughters, Fekei and Levao; Fekei's husband, Faunga, and Levao's husband, Nofoloa; and five others, Folosanga and his two sons, Fuati and Folosanga; and Pepe and Fakavanga, brothers of Laufali's wife. Tonuia was chief and priest of the community by appointment of the high chief at Fakaofu, but he was also head authority by right, as the eldest man of the kinship group, which, except for three members, comprised the entire community.</p>
            <p>Before Tonuia's death he divided the land among his sons and daughters. Each of them had an individual household whose membership was increased by the marriage of children with people brought from Nukunono and Fakaofu. With increasing size and separate land rights, each household became more self-sufficient and occupied with its own existence, although still belonging in the kindred.</p>
            <p>Tonuia's children redivided among their children the shares of land they had received in the original division. Some of Tonuia's grandchildren lived in the original households, and others established new homes. Except in one line, where the land division was inherited in the second generation by one person who redivided it again, the complete subdivision of the land among individual owners ended with the generation of Tonuia's grandchildren. Since then the descendants of each grandchild have inherited and owned these divisions in common, the individual receiving the right to use his kindred's land.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n55" n="48"/>
            <p>The mode of inheritance by these later generations has been very irregular. In some families a right to the use of a share of the land was given to each child of the next generation. In other families the whole was passed on to the eldest son or a daughter, who allotted subdivisions to the brothers and sisters. In all families, the eldest son has directed the use of the land. When two people, both descended from Atafu families, marry, they and their descendants have a claim to the use of the land of both kindreds. However, they usually use the land of only one kindred and succeeding generations drop the secondary kinship. From Tonuia's original kindred there developed secondary kindreds of his children, split into still other kindreds by his grandchildren. The subdividing ended with the cessation of distributing the land among individuals.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d2-d4" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Men's Houses</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Within each village were several large houses (<hi rend="i">fale pa</hi>) where the men gathered in leisure hours and the unmarried men and older boys slept. Membership in these houses was probably originally based on kinship. In Fakaofu the seven <hi rend="i">fale pa</hi> were named: Tolunga fale (the council house), Safiti, Saletama, Sakimoa, Sakoaa, Polokaa, and Satuiatafu; the three at Atafu were: Tepokulu (the council house), Afekei, and Alato; the five at Nukunono were: Fale fono (the council house), Satau, Tenofoaliki, Salei, and Teakafitau. Seven of these names begin with the prefix <hi rend="i">sa.</hi> In Samoa <hi rend="i">sa</hi> means “family of” (all the descendants of a first ancestor); in Tonga the corresponding <hi rend="i">haa</hi> means “lineage” or “tribe”. My informant in Tokelau stated that the membership of the <hi rend="i">fale pa</hi> was based on neighborhood and that <hi rend="i">sa (ha)</hi> meant “all the people of one district of the village”. But if <hi rend="i">sa</hi> originally meant a family, it would come to mean the people of a village district who lived together as a group through kinship and inheritance of a piece of land from the original family. With the increase in numbers of each kindred and the subdividing of kindred lands, the original kindred as a <hi rend="i">kau-kainga</hi> was redivided through the generations, but a wider common kinship was preserved in the <hi rend="i">fale pa.</hi> The <hi rend="i">sa</hi> was probably the largest kinship grouping within the village, whose existence is inferred through the <hi rend="i">fale pa.</hi></p>
            <p>At Atafu the <hi rend="i">fale pa</hi>, whose organization was brought from Fakaofu but not based on the <hi rend="i">sa</hi>, existed only during the first three generations. Afekei was the <hi rend="i">fale pa</hi> of the people of the north end of the village which is still called by the same name. Alato was the <hi rend="i">fale pa</hi> of Asanga, the southern part of the village.</p>
            <p>In Fakaofu the men of the <hi rend="i">fale pa</hi> of Safiti and Saletama were the guardians and police of the village under the direction of the village council. The name <hi rend="i">fale pa</hi> (wall house) suggests that these houses may have originally been on the sea walls and had a secondary purpose as garrisons for defense.
<pb xml:id="n56" n="49"/>
Such garrisons (<hi rend="i">tausoa</hi>) with hereditary membership are reported by Kennedy (13) in Vaitupu in the Ellice Islands:</p>
            <p>In the village of Fale, there were seven <hi rend="i">tausoa</hi>, named Avatele, Asau, Suloi, Tuamaeu, Satalia, Naunaua, and Patiku. It is thought that their principal function was originally to divide the population into sections for purposes of defense … of a certain part of the island coastline and approaches to the village… . The high chief and his principal officials belonged to Avatele <hi rend="i">tausoa</hi>; minor officials were included in the membership of the other <hi rend="i">tausoa</hi>.</p>
            <p>The ranking men's house in Tokelau was the government seat, to which the eldest men of the other <hi rend="i">fale pa</hi> were elected to act as the village council under the head chief of the village. At Nukunono this council house was called Falefono, the general name of the Samoan meeting house, possibly a modern name. At Fakaofu it was formerly called Tolunga Fale, now Falefono. At Atafu, the council house Pokulu is now supplanted by the Faleloa, which serves as a general rendezvous for the men of the village as well as the meeting place for the <hi rend="i">komiti</hi> or village government.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d3" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Government</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d3-d1" type="section">
            <p>Each island had a chief and council which governed its society. While Nukunono and Atafu were subject to Fakaofu, the chief of Fakaofu was the supreme authority of all the islands. He was looked upon as king by the first missionaries and referred to by this title in their writings. All chiefs and council members were elders of their community, for advanced age was a requirement, if not the primary qualification, to hold office. The social principle that age and long experience were essential to gaining wisdom and sound judgment pervaded the whole social order. Even the heads of the kindreds were selected on this basis in preference to following the eldest line of patrilineal descent if this would bring a younger man into office. Even among the elders there was gradation of position according to age, which is illustrated in the order of seating at feasts. The high chief sat in the position of first rank, and the eldest men (<hi rend="i">kailau</hi>) sat beside him. Their juniors (<hi rend="i">kaikava</hi>) and the older men of the community sat next to them. The men of the <hi rend="i">kailau</hi> and <hi rend="i">kaikava</hi> were appointed by the high chief. It was tapu for others to sit among them or even for a <hi rend="i">kaikava</hi> to sit among his seniors; such a breach of etiquette or infraction of law would bring death by sickness upon the offender.</p>
            <p>The importance of age is perhaps nowhere else in Polynesia so highly developed. Certainly the existence of only one or two hereditary offices is unusual. Nineteenth century visitors to Fakaofu were particularly impressed with the stress laid on age; they felt that age alone was the basis of election to council and high chieftainship. From the evidence Williamson (36) even suggests that the government of Fakaofu was once “purely gerontocratic”,
<pb xml:id="n57" n="50"/>
and that a single chieftainship developed later, after which there was an extension of the complimentary title of chief to other members of the actual chief's family. This is pure speculation, and ignores the evidence of Newell (19), on which Williamson chiefly relies, that the chieftainship at one period passed directly from father to son.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d3-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">The High Chief</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The high chief of the Tokelau Islands was a patriarchal head. He had full authority over all the people and established their laws, which he enforced by his power to curse any one to death. He was also at one time priest to the supreme deity, Tui Tokelau, through whom he brought a plentiful supply of food, sufficient rain, and stormless weather to his people.</p>
            <p>His title is not clear. At Atafu he was referred to as the <hi rend="i">tupu</hi>, a term for the highest rank a chief can attain in the Samoan islands of Upolu and Savai'i, and Vaitupu in the Ellice Islands (13). The term is translated in the Samoan Bible as “king”, but never used in literature for the chief of the islands. Newell states that the high chief alone bore the title, <hi rend="i">ariki.</hi> The natives of Atafu used the word <hi rend="i">aliki</hi> to Hale (11) in referring to their chief who resided at Fakaofu. I believe that <hi rend="i">aliki</hi> is the original title for the high chief and that <hi rend="i">tupu</hi> refers to his supreme rank and may have been recently adopted. Turner says that the high chief was called Tui Tokelau, a term also used by an Atafu informant in referring to the high chief in his capacity as high priest and as living representative of this god. Newell suggests that Tui Tokelau may have been the first great chief of Fakaofu, who later became deified, and his title given to his successors but its use was tapu. The high chief was sometimes called Kava, the name of the first historical high chief and also of one of the first settlers in Fakaofuan tradition from whom three of the four chiefly lines are descended. Avafatu (the opening of stone), still another title of the high chief, is probably a figurative term referring to the mythological creation of man from the splitting open of a stone.</p>
            <p>The succession of the high chief theoretically passed from father to eldest son but in actual practice often varied from this rule, due to the precedence given to age. A younger brother of a deceased high chief was appointed in preference to the eldest son if he were not at least a middle-aged man. The appointment was decided by election in the village council. Four lines were eligible to succession to the chieftainship, according to the most detailed information given by Newell (19):</p>
            <p>The <hi rend="i">ariki</hi> is always the oldest male member of the four principal families of Fakaofu, all of whom trace their descent from the two brothers above referred to—namely, Kava and Pi'o. [Kava and Pio came from Samoa and were the first discoverers and owners of the land of Fakaofu, according to one tradition.] Their genealogical tree is thus given:</p>
            <pb xml:id="n58" n="51"/>
            <p>
              <figure xml:id="MacToke051a">
                <graphic url="MacToke051a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke051a-g"/>
              </figure>
            </p>
            <p>When the <hi rend="i">ariki</hi> dies the oldest man then living among these four families becomes <hi rend="i">ariki</hi>. No others possess this title, and there are no clan names or titles outside this circle. The Samoan custom of conferring the name of the head of the family upon the heir does not exist in the Tokelaus. No young man would under any circumstances become head of the clan so long as an older man was left to take the headship.</p>
            <p>Turner (32) supports Newell's evidence by the statement: “There were three families from which the king was selected, and they always selected an aged man.”</p>
            <p>Newell (19) assumes that, as in several other Polynesian islands, at one time the offices of chief and high priest were combined in one person whose power was later divided between two descendants of the same family:</p>
            <p>Dr. Turner says that Tuitokelau was both king and priest. I was, however, informed that the king or <hi rend="i">ariki</hi> was not also <hi rend="i">vakatua</hi> or priest of the god. It seems probable that the two offices were originally combined in one person, but that afterwards as is now affirmed by the people of Fakaofo, the son of the <hi rend="i">ariki</hi> became king, but the son of his sister became priest.</p>
            <p>[In a footnote Newell adds] As we have seen, this law of heredity with regard to the office of <hi rend="i">ariki</hi> does not now obtain on Fakaofo. I transcribe the exact words of the statement made to me about the offices of king and priest: “O tamafafine na fai ma vakatua; o tamatane na fai ma ariki”—Daughters became priestesses; sons became chiefs.</p>
            <p>No evidence exists to indicate that women were ever priestesses. The translation of Newell's information should read, “The children of a sister became priests; the sons of the father became chiefs,” which was the correct order of succession. The use of the terms <hi rend="i">ariki</hi> and <hi rend="i">vaka atua</hi> by the natives does not show which one held higher rank.</p>
            <p>From the change in mode of succession it seems probable that the offices of chief and high priest were divided. However, the dual division may have always existed until the appearance of Christian missionaries who stamped out the priesthood. When Newell came to Fakaofu, the office of high priest had already been abolished and he found only a secular high chief at the head of the native social order.</p>
            <p>The high chief was a sacred person whose body could not be touched by others. He lived apart from the daily activities of the community attended by his family and household. He associated with the group of priests and the elder councillors, and attended only the most important of the village councils. The families of the village consecutively supplied him with food, which his own family prepared and served him on a coconut-leaf dish, plaited by a technique used only for this purpose. He had his own lands for additional food supply and a share of the best fish from every large catch. Turtles, which were sacred food, were presented to him, but only the head
<pb xml:id="n59" n="52"/>
was taken as his rightful share. The high chief might demand anything he saw from the food supply or property of others. Visitors noted that the best shirts, knives, and ornaments, for which the natives had traded their manufactures on shipboard, shortly came into the possession of the high chief.</p>
            <p>The insignia of office, worn whenever the high chief walked abroad or performed any religious rite, was a chaplet of coconut leaflets attached to a section of midrib in front, divided to pass about his neck, and knotted so that the tips projected upward behind his head. A coconut leaflet, as a protecting flag or charm, was held by an escort sitting before the high chief when he went out in his canoe to meet European ships (32).</p>
            <p>When the high chief died, a fire was lit in his house and large fires were built around the village and even in the trees. These burned throughout the night, an exception to the tapu which forbade any lights after dark, for they were in honor of the priest of Tui Tokelau, the god of fire. The high chief's death was also marked by the planting of coconuts, prohibited at all other times.</p>
            <p>The family of the high chief and the members of the council gathered in his home and wailed over the body for three days where they remained in seclusion during the entire period of mourning. Outside, the people formed a great circle to sing death songs and to dance the funeral dances which they performed in a sitting position. Every person brought a mat or pearl shell pendant (<hi rend="i">lei</hi>) as a gift offering. If the fishing had been exceptionally good during the reign of the high chief, the fishing captains bestowed great numbers of these <hi rend="i">lei</hi> or bonito-hook shanks upon him for his good offices. The <hi rend="i">lei</hi> were made into a necklace and hung about the high chief's neck. Mats also were placed with the body and buried with him.</p>
            <p>Before the body was interred, it was well rubbed with coconut oil and dressed in the finest of the family mats. In a peculiar ceremony (<hi rend="i">fakanofoanga</hi>) the body was paraded around the interior of the house by two priests, each holding an arm of the high chief across his shoulders with one hand, and moving a leg with the other hand. The other persons in the house sat in the center of the floor and sang. The body was then temporarily interred in the burying ground of the high chiefs, beside the council house, Tolunga Fale. It was removed after a few days, rubbed again with oil, and redressed in fresh mats. It was kept in the house for a day or two and replaced in the grave, this time at a greater depth than in the first burial. The grave was filled with smooth white coral pebbles (<hi rend="i">kapitilekamea</hi>) collected on the beaches, and the surface was covered with coral slabs. This monument was erected only on the grave of a high chief.</p>
            <p>If any of the high chief's relatives came to Fakaofu from one of the other islands in the first few months after his death, his family exhumed the body in order that the visitors might see their beloved relative once more.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n60" n="53"/>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d3-d3" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">The Council</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Membership in the village council, <hi rend="i">kau kolomatua</hi> (the company of old men), was confined to heads of kindreds. These heads were the eldest of the senior generation of their kindreds and at Fakaofu were elected by the <hi rend="i">fale pa</hi>. The approval of the high chief was necessary before they could take office.</p>
            <p>The council deliberated on all land disputes, and serious infractions of the law under the advice of or by the consent of the high chief. It also directed community enterprises, decided the times for ceremonial fishing by the village fleet, and the gathering of food from the plantations.</p>
            <p>The high chief was supreme head over the council, but the active leadership was carried on by a head of council who was also the executive officer of the high chief. He directed most civil matters, voiced the high chief's desires to the council, and acted as intermediary for the council and the people to the high chief. He was called the <hi rend="i">faipule</hi> by Atafu informants, but this is a term for the modern head of council, which was borrowed from Samoa and which was probably not used formerly. The term <hi rend="i">puseve</hi> for head of council is given by Thomson (31). Bird (2) considers the “speaker” (head of council) the real ruler.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d3-d4" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Judge and Priests</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Lister (14) states that in the government organization there was a judge (<hi rend="i">palapalau</hi>) who settled disputes not taken to council, but pronounced his decisions only after consultation with the high chief and priests. The priests were consulted by the high chief in all civil actions.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d4" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Land</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d4-d1" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Division of Atoll Lands</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Land is the chief wealth and the dominant interest of the Tokelau native, and the main source of his subsistence and building materials. Rights to land are based on relationship to kindreds which forces everyone to know his genealogy accurately. Without land one can not exist in the community. This vital necessity for land is shown in the refusal of the Fakaofu natives to accept a Rarotongan teacher brought by the missionaries (p. <ref target="#n39">33</ref>). The natives inquired “Where is he to live? There is no food for him and he will die of starvation.” All the land of Fakaofu had been divided among the people, and there was none to be given to a stranger.</p>
            <p>An individual's holding or subdivision consists of one large piece or several small pieces planted with coconuts, pieces of wooded land, and land in the village for houses or cook sheds. The boundaries of plantation land
<pb xml:id="n61" n="54"/>
extend into the water to the edge of the reef and along the lagoon shore for a short distance. Fishing rights in the water covering this land belong to the land holders, but the privilege of fishing is not withheld from others at the present time.</p>
            <p>The land of every atoll has been completely divided. At Fakaofu the land was divided by the first historical high chief, Kava Vasefanua, among the heads of families then living on the island, except for two islets kept for the use of the high chief and his family, and parts of other islets retained as communal lands to grow a reserve food supply. The land that was given to the heads of families became the common property of the kindreds descended from them. Each member of the kindred received the right to use a section of the land. These sections have been redivided by succeeding generations until at present, with the increased population, there are several families who have no land within the village on which to build their homes.</p>
            <p>Part of Nukunono was once owned by Fakaofu. When the islands were included in the British Colony of the Gilbert and Ellice Islands, this land was returned to Nukunono and paid for by copra. All the land is now divided among the kindreds of the island. Land is still plentiful, for the area is large and the population has remained small since the depletion suffered from slave raiders.</p>
            <p>At Atafu two pieces of land were set aside by Tonuia as communal land. The coconuts and pandanus fruit on this land are harvested by the village only in times of necessity, and timber, coconut, and <hi rend="i">fala</hi> pandanus leaves are reserved for communal enterprises.</p>
            <p>The islet on which the village of Atafu is located was used jointly by the kindred during Tonuia's lifetime. After his death his children divided the land north of the village, which extends from the village to the well in the northwestern corner of the islet. The remaining northeastern end of the islet was divided later among his grandchildren and the men then living on Atafu. A piece of land near the northeastern tip was given to two missionaries, a Rarotongan and a Samoan. When they left, the land was divided again.</p>
            <p>During a hurricane in 1914, the sea currents deposited sand and loose coral at the end of the village, filling in the canoe passage and adding a few acres of new land. The present new canoe passage was made by the water flowing from the lagoon. The new land was divided by the village council between the church and all the adult men of the village. Fourteen strips were marked out, each strip being 30 feet wide and extending from the old shore line to the new one. Each strip was given to two men who held the land as their personal property exclusive of their kindred holdings. The second section was made communal land for the pastor's house and school.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n62" n="55"/>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d4-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Atafu Village Divisions</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The first settlement was made at the site of the present village at the southern end of Atafu Islet, where there was a canoe passage from the lagoon to the open sea (<ref target="#MacToke055a">fig. 5</ref>). The houses were erected along the lagoon shore 8 or 9 feet above water level to receive the cooling trade winds which blow across the atoll. They were protected from devastation by high tides and storm waves by breakwaters built in front of parts of the village and backed by a fill of coral rubble.</p>
            <p>
              <figure xml:id="MacToke055a">
                <graphic url="MacToke055a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke055a-g"/>
                <head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 5.—Map of part of Atafu Islet showing the village of Fale established by Tonuia, site of the ancient settlement, and Atakei, Alato, and Pokulu, the men's houses: <hi rend="i">a</hi>, breakwaters (<hi rend="i">pa</hi>); <hi rend="i">b</hi>, paved hole for soaking coconut husks; <hi rend="i">c</hi>, piers; <hi rend="i">d</hi>, canoe houses; <hi rend="i">e</hi>, god house, with two erect slabs before it and sacred repository (<hi rend="i">sai</hi>) for discarded paraphernalia; <hi rend="i">g</hi>, cook houses; houses of first settlers belonging to: <hi rend="i">h</hi>, Laua; <hi rend="i">i</hi>, Laufali; <hi rend="i">j</hi>, Kaufala; <hi rend="i">l</hi>, Te Pasu; <hi rend="i">m</hi>, Pio; <hi rend="i">n</hi>, Tongia; <hi rend="i">o</hi>, Levao; <hi rend="i">p</hi>, Fekei; <hi rend="i">q</hi>, Tonuia; <hi rend="i">r</hi>, Fuati; <hi rend="i">s</hi>, Ngaluava; <hi rend="i">t</hi>, Malokie; <hi rend="i">u</hi>, Vaovela; <hi rend="i">v</hi>, Lou; <hi rend="i">w</hi>, Kiao; <hi rend="i">x</hi>, Kapa.</head>
              </figure>
            </p>
            <p>The first houses were those of the five sons of Tonuia: Vaovela, Pio, Malokie, Laua, and Laufali; his two daughters, Lovao and Fekei; and Ngaluava and Tuati, the sons of Folasanga who accompanied Tonuia. Their homes were built surrounding the house of Tonuia which served for a time as the god house of the community. Later Laua built two more houses; his son, Tongia, built a house for himself and his wife; Pio built a second house for his second wife; and five men, who had brought their families to Atafu after Tonuia, built houses at each end of the village. Of these five men, Kafa, Kiso, and Lou built close to the shore at the north end; Kaufala and Tepasu built their houses beside that of Laufali. There were three men's houses—Pokulu, Afekai, and Alato—built along the eastern shore and a god house at the northern end of the <hi rend="i">malae</hi> away from the houses. Several canoe sheds were built along the lagoon beach north of the southern breakwater and pier. The cook houses were all across the lagoon passage away from the trade wind. There was no systematic arrangement of the village; houses
<pb xml:id="n63" n="56"/>
were built close together and connected by narrow paths through uncleared scrub and trees; and pigs were allowed to wander about the village.</p>
            <p>The first breakwater was constructed by three men who came to Atafu shortly after Tonuia and built their houses at the northern end of the village. Later another section was built near the southern end of the islet. Between these two sea walls three stone piers were built into the lagoon from the village shore. They were 10 feet long, 5 feet wide, and 2 or 3 feet above sea level. At the end of each was a small house for a toilet that rested partly on the end of the pier and partly on piles in the water (pl. 16, <hi rend="i">A</hi>).</p>
            <p>
              <figure xml:id="MacToke056a">
                <graphic url="MacToke056a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke056a-g"/>
                <head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 6.—Map of present village of Atafu showing lagoon, canoe passage, reef and village sections: Asanga and new land deposited by sea in 1914; Afekei and extension of original village along lagoon shore; Lomaloma, hospital grounds; <hi rend="i">malae</hi> on which have been built village garden, church, and cricket ground; <hi rend="i">b</hi>, schoolhouse and boys' dormitory; <hi rend="i">c</hi>, cook house; <hi rend="i">d</hi>, dwelling; <hi rend="i">e</hi>, steps in breakwater to lagoon; <hi rend="i">f</hi>, council house (<hi rend="i">fale loa</hi>); <hi rend="i">g</hi>, pig pens; <hi rend="i">h</hi>, hospital; <hi rend="i">k</hi>, women's work house; <hi rend="i">l</hi>, basketball ground; <hi rend="i">m</hi>, missionary's house; <hi rend="i">o</hi>, ancient graves marked by coral slabs; <hi rend="i">p</hi>, breakwater; <hi rend="i">r</hi>, reservoir; <hi rend="i">s</hi>, storage house; <hi rend="i">t</hi>, combined toilet and storage shed; <hi rend="i">v</hi>, canoe beach; <hi rend="i">y</hi>, copra shed; <hi rend="i">z</hi>, cricket crease. Broken lines show boundaries of village land divisions. Parallel lines show paths with low slab curbing.</head>
              </figure>
            </p>
            <p>The modern village was laid out when the island was under the administration of the Gilbert and Ellice Islands Colony (<ref target="#MacToke056a">fig. 6</ref>). The paths, the arrangement of the modern, cooler types of houses, the segregation of the pigs from the village, and the clearance of all undergrowth were planned and accomplished under governmental supervision. However, the ownership of plots of land within the village and the two early divisions of the village, Afekei and Asanga, were not disturbed. Their division is marked by the
<pb xml:id="n64" n="57"/>
crosspath running from the council house and is indicated on the map (<ref target="#MacToke056a">fig. 6</ref>) by a broken line. The land that was built up in the hurricane of 1914 is now part of Asanga division. The two sections which were given to the men of the village and the church are divided by the end of the main walk which runs through the village. The present missionary has had built on the church or communal land a round-ended Samoan house for himself and family and two large Tokelau houses for his school. The older boys of the school sleep in one, which has supplanted to a degree the old men's house. Beyond the schoolhouse is a basketball ground. The upper portion of the new land is used mainly for cook houses.</p>
            <p>Afekei, the northern district, includes the newer part of the village. Lomaloma is the hospital group at the extreme northern end of the village. The name has been adopted from the name of a town, Lomaloma, in the Fiji group by the present native medical practitioner, Longolongo.</p>
            <p>The old <hi rend="i">malae</hi> in the center of the village is unoccupied and has only a few shade trees. The church and reservoir have been built in the middle of it. The lower end is used for cricket matches and drying copra; the northern end has been turned into a communal garden, planted with an introduced taro (<hi rend="i">taamu</hi>), bananas, and papayas.</p>
            <p>The entire village, from Lomaloma to the end of the eastern shore, is now protected by a breakwater, except for the intervals left for canoe beaches. At several points in the wall steps have been made to allow the people to descend to the water to bathe. The height of the breakwater above the water varies in different sections constructed at different times; the newer parts have an average height of 5 feet; the older walls are slightly lower. The last parts of the breakwater to be completed were the end sections. The Lomaloma end at the edge of the hospital grounds district was built under the direction of the present native medical practitioner; the southern end, which turns and runs inland 10 or 15 feet to a higher level, was built under the direction of the present missionary.</p>
            <p>The outlet of the lagoon, which serves as a canoe passage, has changed its position three times during human habitation on the island. In the period of the early or pre-Fakaofu settlement the passage ran from the present mouth across the modern village parallel to the crosswalk ending at the council house. When the first settlement was made from Fakaofu, the outlet had moved to the boundary of the new land; in 1914 it changed to its present position.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d3-d4-d3" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Laws</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The holder of a subdivision of kindred land may pass on his tenancy to his children in any manner he chooses. Normally the control and direction goes to the eldest son, who divides the holding among his brothers and sisters. Brothers who have sufficient land for their use in their wives' <choice><orig>prop-
<pb xml:id="n65" n="58"/>
erty</orig><reg>property</reg></choice> often do not receive an actual division of land but only a share in the food that is gathered from it. In present times they also receive a share of the money made by selling copra produced on the kindred plantations. Many landholders have left the complete control of the land to the eldest daughter of the family, and the sons have only a share in the products. In some families the children all inherit alike; in others the eldest son and daughter receive larger shares than the younger children. The wife or husband does not inherit any share of the land of the other. Only by the consent of every claimant to the land can any part of it be given or sold to any person who has no right to it by heritage.</p>
            <p>When a person dies without children, the land reverts to his kindred. The reallotment is completely discussed by a council of the kindred and by the council of village elders, who hear all claims that any of the villagers may make. When the right to inheritance is disputed, the village councillors decide who among the members of the kindred shall receive the land. The use of the land is usually given to younger married relatives of the deceased.</p>
            <p>The Report of the Administrator of Samoa (24) states:</p>
            <p>When a young man marries they [the village council members] sit in council and allocate a piece of land to him… . The old men of the village are looked upon as <hi rend="i">Matais</hi> or chiefs, who each have their own area of land and assume the power to divide up the land as they think fit.</p>
            <p>The village council is composed mostly of kindred heads who own the lands, but not by virtue of their membership in the council; they have no power to divide arbitrarily or give away lands which are kindred property. They control absolutely the use of the communal lands. They can forbid by tapu the trespassing and taking of coconuts from areas of the kindred plantations. Plantation lands are still set aside in rotation for the production of copra under the old system of tapuing land (<hi rend="i">lafu</hi>). Formerly the council of Fakaofu and the high priest placed a tapu on visiting all plantations of the atoll. Every few days the tapu was removed and all the people visited their plantations at the same time to gather food. This custom prevented the theft of coconuts and pandanus and kept a check on the food supply. If anyone broke the tapu, he died of a wasting sickness brought on by the curse of the high chief.</p>
            <p>The landholder has the right to take coconuts, pandanus fruit, leaves and wood, except <hi rend="i">kanava</hi>, from his plantation. The division of these among members of the kindred outside the household is made by the kindred head or his eldest sister. A strict law forbids the cutting of any <hi rend="i">kanava</hi> trees without the consent of the kindred head. Thus the law controls the supply of <hi rend="i">kanava</hi> wood, used in making many articles, and ensures to each household material for a canoe. In pre-Christian times <hi rend="i">kanava</hi> trees were tapued by consecrating them to a god. (See p. <ref target="#n68">61</ref>.)</p>
          </div>
        </div>
      </div>
      <pb xml:id="n66" n="59"/>
      <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d4" type="section">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">Religion</hi>
        </head>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d4-d1" type="section">
          <p>The elements in the religion of the Tokelau people were characteristic of the religions of western Polynesia. The pantheon was comprised of a supreme deity who resided in the sky and a group of nature gods who dwelt in the world. No stone maraes or platforms were erected to the gods. Ritual was very slight and almost entirely confined to an annual ceremony to the supreme deity. Communication was held with ancestral spirits. Nature spirits abounded in the woods and sea.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d4-d2" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Gods</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d4-d2-d1" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Supreme Deity</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The supreme deity was Tui Tokelau, or Tui Tokelau Sili (Tui Tokelau, the highest), who resided in the sky. The name does not appear among the gods elsewhere in Polynesia, and his title, Tui, is the Tongan and Samoan term for chief, which suggests that he was a deified chief. This is supported by an account (26) written by the Rarotongan native teacher who visited Fakaofu in 1848:</p>
            <p>The people set up their gods and gave them names, Tui Tokelau being the principal and most powerful. His advent at Tokelau was witnessed by the people. He descended from the sky and his arrival was accompanied by thunder and lightning. He is a cannibal god and appears in the night when all are asleep, with a coconut leaf in his hand with which he snares the spirit of man from his body, and when daylight comes, that man who has thus been acted upon dies.</p>
            <p>Wilkes (34) states that Tui Tokelau was also called Tangaloa i lunga i langi (Tangaloa above in the sky). Tangaloa was a Samoan god who appeared in the mythology of Tokelau but not in the pantheon of gods. It is probable that some of his attributes were ascribed to Tui Tokelau.</p>
            <p>Tui Tokelau controlled all nature and the food supply of the people. He was propitiated each year with offerings to make the fish and coconuts plentiful and to send sufficient rain. A coral slab erected to Tui Tokelau at Fakaofu had certain supernatural powers, according to Lister (14):</p>
            <p>Good and bad fortune and diseases were sent by the Tui Tokelau. The bad fortune came as punishment for failure in the proper observances in his honor.</p>
            <p>Sick people were washed with coconut water, some of which had previously been sprinkled over the stone.</p>
            <p>If a person wished to die, he would crawl to the foot of the stone and remain there. His friends might bring him food and he might eat it, but in the course of two or three days he would die—and people had been known to die in this manner, so great was the power of their belief.</p>
            <p>If a good haul of fish was taken, part of it would be offered before the stone by the king, and afterwards it was distributed among the Taulaitu—the priests.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n67" n="60"/>
            <p>A sacred bird (<hi rend="i">manu sa</hi>) called the <hi rend="i">talanga</hi> belonged to Tui Tokelau. Its appearance was considered an omen that the god was approaching the island, and said by some to be the god himself.</p>
            <p>Fire was sacred to Tui Tokelau, and only during the month of his worship was it permitted to have lights after dark. At other times three necessary exceptions were permitted: fish caught at night could be cooked in the kitchen shacks, for otherwise they would spoil during the warm night; and lights could be made at night during the care of a woman in childbirth and in honor of the death of the high chief, the priest of Tui Tokelau.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d4-d2-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Nature Gods</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The minor gods were personifications of natural elements and resided in the world. According to Monfat (17) the god second in rank was Te Moana, the son of Tui Tokelau. Te Moana was a sea god who took form in a waterspout. When Fakaofu was attacked, the priest of Te Moana prayed to him to create high waves and a strong wind to drive off and drown the enemy fleet.</p>
            <p>Nothing is remembered of Tonuailangi who resided beyond the horizon except his ability to prophesy. Through his priest he foretold events which happened on the other atolls, and which were later verified by visitors from these atolls to Fakaofu. Because the European ships came from behind the horizon, the natives at first believed them to be vessels of Tonuailangi.</p>
            <p>Toikia was physically the strongest of the minor gods. Little is remembered about him besides his part in the wrestling match between Fafie and Leua, two semi-mythical characters. In the match Fafie threw his opponent and held him down, but Vevea pulled Fafie off by his hair. Fafie called upon the god Toikia to assist him, and Toikia appeared and wrenched Vevea away. Although the other gods were present at the match, they were helpless against Toikia. When the king of the gods saw that Vevea was defeated by Toikia, he ordered that Vevea should be killed. The others threw him upon a fire and burned him to death.</p>
            <p>Fakafotu was the god of storms and hurricanes; thunder was called the anger of Fakafotu. He also appeared in the form of a great tree. A coral slab was erected to him beside the slab of Tui Tokelau at Atafu, but at Fakaofu his god house and slab were separate from those of Tui Tokelau and Te Moana. Fakafotu has the name of the primary female parent of the gods and men in Tongareva (29), New Zealand, and eastern Polynesian islands.</p>
            <p>The god Fafie took the form of a great canoe. He lived in traveling canoes and ruled over the destinies of voyagers on their journeys between the atolls and Samoa or neighboring groups of islands.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n68" n="61"/>
            <p>Te Lio appeared as a great mat and lived near the beach along the lagoon, of which he was the god.</p>
            <p>Mafola was a god of the sea. Requests addressed to him through his priest were always fulfilled.</p>
            <p>All <hi rend="i">kanava</hi> trees were consecrated to Na Tongaleleva and could never be used without the removal of the tapu by the chief priest. Any man violating this tapu was killed by the deity. When it was necessary to cut a sacred <hi rend="i">kanava</hi> on one of the outside atolls, the chief priest of Fakaofu appointed a priest to travel to the atoll and perform the rites. Tonuia, the chief of Atafu, broke this tapu and cut down a tree of Tongaleleva. Later he journeyed to Fakaofu, and on his return he was blown to sea and lost. His death was reported by the priest of Na Tongaleleva, who ascribed the cause to the breaking of the tapu. Tongaleleva also brought to his priest the song Tonuia sang at his death which has become a popular ballad.</p>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>Ko taku sala ia e ko iloa</l>
              <l>Ko te ulu o na Tongaleleva</l>
              <l>Na ko taia kupu kese lava</l>
              <l>Fakaofu e kona e mamala.</l>
            </lg>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>My wrong is known</l>
              <l>The head of Tongaleleva</l>
              <l>The mature tree was cut far away</l>
              <l>Fakaofu is poisoned and diseased.</l>
            </lg>
            <p>The god Te Laumua lived with the mischievous spirits (<hi rend="i">ngaveve</hi>). He was very kind and made amends for the pranks of his implike fellows. When he was prayed to through his prophet, he restored the souls that had been stolen by the <hi rend="i">ngaveve</hi>.</p>
            <p>The god Salevao had many of the characteristics and propensities of the <hi rend="i">ngaveve</hi> spirits. He resided in the bush at the northern end of the village on Atafu and flew about the villages snatching souls with a flying-fish net. The natives often heard the flick of Salevao's net overhead, which they interpreted as an omen of death. He had a great liking for pretty women, especially when they were pregnant. A very bad odor often indicated his presence at home, but it was customary for anyone noticing it to flatter the god by crying out, “What a delightful scent I smell!”</p>
            <p>Hale (11) mentions another god, Atua Tafito, who was referred to as “O Debolo”, a word probably learned from shipwrecked sailors on the atoll.</p>
            <p>Luafine was given as the name of another god, and at Nukunono the names Mona and Fenua were given as local gods of that island. Thomson (31) adds the name of a god, Aeooa, worshiped at Atafu, to whom a stone slab was erected.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d4-d2-d3" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Nature Spirits</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Two bands of spirits, <hi rend="i">tupua maiuta</hi> (spirits from inland) and <hi rend="i">tupua maitai</hi> (spirits from the sea), inhabited all the islands and the neighboring sea. The <hi rend="i">tupua maiuta</hi> were friendly spirits of the Tokelau people and
<pb xml:id="n69" n="62"/>
waged a continual war upon the foreign spirits (<hi rend="i">tupua maitai</hi>). When the <hi rend="i">tupua maitai</hi> were victorious, troubles multiplied for the people.</p>
            <p>Another group of elfish and mischievous spirits (<hi rend="i">ngaveve</hi> or <hi rend="i">kaufiola</hi>) lived among the trees outside the village boundaries and in the plantations of the other islets. They spent their lives in merriment, laughing, dancing, and playing pranks on human beings. Their greatest sport and chief danger to mortals was their custom of running away with men's souls. Their thefts were temporary, but the soulless bodies of men talked wildly and incomprehensively and were apt to go mad. These irresponsible sprites also ran off with children to bewilder their parents. Tito, who is now an old man on Atafu, related his experience with the <hi rend="i">ngaveve</hi> when he was a small boy:</p>
            <p>His parents had left him in the middle of the long islet on the eastern side of Atafu while they went torch fishing. Tito remembers being carried by the <hi rend="i">ngaveve</hi> to the northern end of the islet and then down to the southern end of the islet, where they left him. During all this time he was unable to move his body but was conscious of where he traveled. His parents found him where the <hi rend="i">ngaveve</hi> had deposited him.</p>
            <p>There is another well-known tale of a girl who was carried from her house to one of the windward islets of Nukunono. For several months her captor played with her and fed her on the food of the <hi rend="i">ngaveve</hi>. One day the spirit carried the girl back to her house and placed her by a bowl into which a woman was cutting up <hi rend="i">fala</hi> pandanus fruit. The woman did not see the child eating the fruit from the bowl and cut off one of the girl's fingers while she had her hand in the wooden bowl. The <hi rend="i">ngaveve</hi> immediately flew back with the girl to the windward islet, where he made his home, and left her by herself. Some people from the village of Nukunono found her with a finger lost from her hand.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d4-d2-d4" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Ancestral Gods</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The souls of men (<hi rend="i">aitu</hi>) were less powerful than <hi rend="i">atua</hi> and had no influence over the forces of nature. The <hi rend="i">aitu</hi> advised their descendants and helped them in times of sickness and trouble. One <hi rend="i">aitu</hi>, Fafie, whose name is fourth in the list of high chiefs, was a deified high chief of Fakaofu. He was worshiped even before his death, according to Newell (19):</p>
            <p>Fafie here referred to was the god (<hi rend="i">aitu</hi>) of the clan Sulu. He became on the death of Leua (King of Fakaofu) king of that island. But before this no less than two hundred people made allegiance and offered sacrifice to him.</p>
            <p>A spirit named Fenu, who dwelt at Nukunono, is classed as an <hi rend="i">aitu</hi>, though his character is not typical. At one time Nukunono had a fresh-water well and Fakaofu had none. A Fakaofu <hi rend="i">aitu</hi><note xml:id="fn5_62" n="5"><p>Burrows (5) gives his name as Semoana in the Fakaofu version.</p></note> came to Nukunono and carried off the well in a coconut-shell cup. Fenu chased him, caught him at the islet, Motu Akea, and hit his hands, spilling some of the stolen water he
<pb xml:id="n70" n="63"/>
was carrying which formed a well. The <hi rend="i">aitu</hi> fled to Fakaofu where he made wells on all the islets, but he used most of the water to create the large well on the village islet. In retaliation, Fenu flew to Fakaofu, stole the <hi rend="i">kie</hi> pandanus, and planted it in Nukunono. Today Nukunono has but one small well, and the <hi rend="i">kie</hi> pandanus, though recently introduced, is said to grow poorly on Fakaofu.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d4-d2-d5" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Totemic Gods</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Certain forms of fish and sea life were venerated as gods (<hi rend="i">kolinga</hi>) by every kindred. These were: a small striped fish (<hi rend="i">mutu</hi>), a flat fish (<hi rend="i">api</hi>) of the lagoon, squid (<hi rend="i">feke</hi>), and a variety of eel (<hi rend="i">pusi</hi>). Although these gods were not regarded as ancestors, they show some totemic characteristics. They were never caught or eaten by those to whom they were tapu. The eel, Te Pusi, was the most important. It was classed by informants on Atafu and Nukunono as an <hi rend="i">atua</hi> but was never worshiped by an entire community. On Atafu, Te Pusi was the family god of Tonuia, the first ancestor. It was possible for any member of a family holding Te Pusi sacred to ask him, through his prophet, to take vengeance upon an enemy. At an opportune time Te Pusi would bite this enemy and bring upon him a lingering sickness from which he would waste away. Thomson (31) states:</p>
            <p>In the old days every family had a spirit which lived in some form of animal life—eel, turtle, fish, or bird. The sons all took the father's totem… . I am in doubt as to the truth. Other informants told me, in contradiction, that a son took, or was given, a totem which differed, as a rule, from that of his father. During his father's life, as a matter of courtesy, the son paid respect to his father's totem, but afterwards, the son held no reverence for it.</p>
            <p>No family injured, much less ate, the flesh of their family god. If the spirit of the god entered a man, his skin turned scaly like a fish's or whatever animal the god might be, and in time the man was changed into the form of the god. The visitation of the spirit might be only a temporary one, however, and the man would speak involuntarily as the mouthpiece of his spirit, revealing secrets of the past and future. In each family one member had the power to communicate with the transformed spirits.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d4-d3" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Priests</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d4-d3-d1" type="section">
            <p>The priests (<hi rend="i">taulaitu</hi>) at Fakaofu probably belonged to a superior social group including the high chief and the council of elders. They were venerated because of their age as well as their sacred character.</p>
            <p>The chief priest was the priest of Tui Tokelau. Other gods also had their own priests, but little is remembered of their offices and powers. Prophets and shamans, called <hi rend="i">vaka atua</hi> (literally, the canoe of the god, the transporter or hull of the god), did not officiate at any religious ceremonies but acted as intermediaries to the gods. When a prophet was in communication with his patron deity he usually threw himself into a frenzy. The god was believed to possess (<hi rend="i">tokaia</hi>) his body and employ his voice to speak in
<pb xml:id="n71" n="64"/>
thunderous tones to those who desired advice or explanations. The activities of a <hi rend="i">vaka atua</hi> are described by Turner (32):</p>
            <p>After death, the friends of the deceased were anxious to know the cause of death. They went with a present to the priest and begged him to get the dead man to speak and confess the sins which caused his death. The priest might be distant from the dead body, but he pretended to summon the spirit and to have it within him. He spoke in his usual tone and told him to say before them all what he did to cause his death. Then he, the priest, whined out in a weak, faltering voice, a reply as if from the spirit of the departed, confessing that he stole coconuts from such a place, or that he fished at some particular spot forbidden by the king or that he ate the fish that was the incarnation of his family god. As the priest whined out something of this sort, he managed to squeeze out some tears and to sob and cry over it. The friends of the departed felt relieved to know the cause, got up, and went home.</p>
            <p>These shamans or prophets were consulted for omens and advice of the gods before undertaking any important activity. Before people journeyed away from their island they prayed to Tui Tokelau and his son for aid. Ancestors were called upon in time of any family trouble, sickness, or imminent death, through the family <hi rend="i">vaka atua</hi>. For these services the shaman received an offering of food or a mat. Direct offerings were not made to the gods when conferring with their mediums.</p>
            <p>It was believed that a god would perform any task or grant any request if properly approached through his <hi rend="i">vaka atua</hi>. If the <hi rend="i">vaka atua</hi> could not succeed in bringing about the desired result, he announced that a stronger deity, over whom he had no control, had driven his own deity away.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d4-d3-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Election of Priests</hi>
            </head>
            <p>At the death of a priest his successor was selected by spinning a wooden ball (<hi rend="i">niufilo</hi>) in the center of a circle of the candidates. This ball was about 15 inches in diameter and had a notch or mouth cut on one side. The man toward whom this notch pointed when the ball ceased spinning was the candidate selected by the god. The name <hi rend="i">niufilo</hi> (coconut that spins) suggests that a coconut may have been used, as at Vaitupu (13). The <hi rend="i">niufilo</hi> was kept in the god house of Tui Tokelau.</p>
            <p>Further confirmation of the selection of the priest was made by a pair of crossed sticks (<hi rend="i">filifili</hi>) hung low over the heads of the candidates. If the sticks moved when the name of the candidate indicated by the <hi rend="i">niufilo</hi> was spoken, it was believed that the god had verified the choice.</p>
            <p>The high chief, with his principal officers, conducted the divination, and spun the divining ball. It is said that he often turned it to select his personal choice, but it was believed that such an action would bring great distress to the king and his family. Once a chief, Kakaia, was spinning the ball, which stopped with its mouth opposite Pakao, but Kakaia turned it to point to Savaiki. The father of Pakao jumped up and cursed the people of <choice><orig>Faka-
<pb xml:id="n72" n="65"/>
ofu</orig><reg>Fakaofu</reg></choice> with exile and torture at the hands of strangers for permitting this trick. The hurricane which subsequently drove many people to sea and the raids of blackbirders are believed to be the fulfillment of his curse.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d4-d4" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">God Houses</hi>
          </head>
          <p>Each village in Tokelau had the usual Polynesian meeting ground called <hi rend="i">malae</hi>, where most of the religious ceremonies, all the dances, the ceremonial division of fish, turtles, and whales, and other community festivities took place. At Atafu the <hi rend="i">malae</hi> had an area of about 180 square feet and was covered with sand and pebbles. A god house (<hi rend="i">fale atua</hi>) stood at one end, some distance from the village. One informant stated that it contained three coral slabs representing Tui Tokelau, Te Pusi, and Te Lio. A second informant said that two slabs of Tui Tokelau and Fakaofu stood before the god house, and none were inside it. These slabs were <hi rend="i">tupua</hi>, the residences of the gods during ceremonies. One of the slabs was taken by a missionary (Powell or Davis of the London Missionary Society) in 1884, and the other was put into the walls of the present church.</p>
          <p>Thomson (31) inspected the site of the god house and coral slabs with a native who had seen them and the ceremonies performed before them in pre-Christian times. Two slabs 7 feet high, 6 feet wide, and 1.5 feet thick stood side by side and about 40 feet in front of the god house which was a rectangular frame building 40 feet long and 20 feet wide, standing on a low platform or foundation and similar in appearance to the present Atafu council house (<ref target="#MacTokeP005a">pl. 5, <hi rend="i">C</hi></ref>). Within the house was a chamber walled off by mats, the most sacred part, entered only by the priest. To the right side of the sacred <hi rend="i">malae</hi>, about 60 feet from the coral slabs and facing at a 45° angle toward the front, was a stone enclosure (<hi rend="i">sai</hi>) 18 by 18 feet square and 3.5 feet high. The rotted mats which were removed from the coral slabs during the annual ceremony were deposited here. They were absolutely tapu, and anyone daring to disturb them would die from contact with such sacred objects. The whole area was a sacred precinct which only the priest and his assistants might enter.</p>
          <p>Fakaofu had two <hi rend="i">malae</hi> (26): one to the god, Tui Tokelau, and his son, O te Moana, and one to Fakafotu. Wilkes (34) describes the god house of Tui Tokelau and the two coral slabs or idols of the god and his son erected before it (<ref target="#MacTokeP006a">pl. 6, <hi rend="i">B</hi></ref>):</p>
          <p>Their gods or idols were placed on the outside nearby. The largest of these was 14 feet high and 18 inches in diameter. This was covered or enveloped in mats, and over all a narrow one was passed, shawl-fashion, and tied in front, with the ends of the knot hanging down … The small idol was of stone, and 4 feet high, but only partially covered with mats. About 10 feet in front of the idol was one of the hewn tables, which was hollowed out. It was 4 feet long by 3 broad, and the same in height.</p>
          <pb xml:id="n73" n="66"/>
          <p>The ancient god house was the largest structure at Fakaofu. Around the inside of the eaves was hung a string of mother-of-pearl shell <hi rend="i">lei</hi> made from the annual offerings of these ornaments to the god. The huge house posts were ornamented with sennit bindings, according to Hale (11):</p>
          <p>In the center of the house, about the largest post, were piled confusedly together a dozen massive benches, or large stools, 2 feet high, as many broad, and about 3 feet long. They were of clumsy make, very thick and heavy, each one being apparently carved from a single block. The natives called them seats of the god, and we supposed that they might be for the elders of the village when they meet in council or for religious celebration.</p>
          <p>Leaning against the largest post of the house were several spears all much worn and battered, which the natives said were from the sea. They were called <hi rend="i">lakau taua</hi> (wood of war).</p>
          <p>The last god house at Fakaofu was destroyed by Father Padel in 1852 (p. <ref target="#n38">32</ref>). The only sacred objects that he reported inside the god house were two rusty guns salvaged from a wreck. He did not mention the great posts, the seats, or the table seen by Hale and Wilkes. Possibly these were destroyed in the hurricane of 1846 or 1852.</p>
          <p>Worship and communication with family gods was conducted in the homes. Ancestral spirits came in visitations to priests or mediums who were descended from the ancestor. Many houses contained two or three coconut water bottles reserved for the ancestral spirit. They were suspended from a post or rafter, and fresh water was poured into them each day.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d4-d5" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Ceremony to Tui Tokelau</hi>
          </head>
          <p>In May every year the chief priest at Fakaofu set aside four weeks for the worship of Tui Tokelau and appointed emissaries to announce the time to the other islands. The time was determined by the rising of the full moon in June which also determined the time of worship of Tangaloa in Samoa. After the announcement, all property was repaired and tidied. Houses were rethatched and swept, canoes mended, and new garments were plaited. Bands of young people picked up debris from the village <hi rend="i">malae</hi> and disposed of it in the sea. When the households and lands were in order, the village council declared that the following two weeks were to be devoted to gathering food. For seven days all active men and women gathered coconuts and <hi rend="i">fala</hi> pandanus fruit from their plantations. The next seven days were set aside for fishing and every canoe in the village went out to sea. The men at home fished with their nets, and the women combed the reefs for squid and shell fish. In the kitchens the younger people and old women prepared the simple puddings of coconut and <hi rend="i">fala</hi> pandanus, and broiled and dried the fish in the sun.</p>
          <pb xml:id="n74" n="67"/>
          <p>Many new mats, mother-of-pearl pendants, the unused halves of the shells made into bonito shanks, pandanus malo and coconut leaf skirts, and sennit braid were made and collected to send to Fakaofu as offerings. Food was gathered for the crew of the canoe bearing the offerings and as gifts to the chief priest.</p>
          <p>The journey of the canoe bearing these offerings was a sacred mission and a heavy tapu was placed on the captain. It was believed that any disorder among his crew would cause the canoe to be blown off its course. Many other canoes accompanied this vessel to join in the festival. However, disaster would immediately befall them if they entered the passage at Fakaofu before the sacred canoe. Vaovela, a son of Tonuia from Atafu, broke this tapu; in going over a reef, a wave upset him and the hull of the canoe crushed the foot of his son against the coral. When the ships approached Fakaofu the mats to be presented were hung on the mast and displayed.</p>
          <p>Burrows (5) believes that these offerings represented tribute to the overlordship of Fakaofu, but they were held so sacred that it is not probable that they were taken by the Fakaofu people as presents.</p>
          <p>A tapu was placed on all activity at the end of the seven days of fishing and the ceremony of worship to Tui Tokelau began. The religious ceremonies were conducted during the first days and were followed by a longer period of dancing and feasting. No one could leave the village; when not on the <hi rend="i">malae</hi>, people had to keep to their houses. Prayers and dancing were made far into the night in the light of great torches burnt in honor of Tui Tokelau.</p>
          <p>The ceremony began by removing the rotten garments and gifts of the preceding year from the coral slab of Tui Tokelau and replacing them with new offerings. It was said that the old offerings were burned, but Turner (32) reports that they were set aside and left to decay, being too sacred for anyone to touch. Lister (14) describes the ceremony as follows:</p>
          <p>When they [the travelers] landed, the mats were wrapped round the stone [of Tui Tokelau] to remain until they rotted away, and the pearl shells were placed along the eaves of the house sacred to the gods, close at hand. The stone was anointed with coconut oil scented with flowers; then the king was carried in front of the stone, seated in his chair, with the coconut leaf emblem of royalty around his neck, and a black line of charcoal drawn over his forehead, the people following in procession with shouts of “Tu-tu” and general rejoicing.</p>
          <p>Then the high chief, as the priest of Tui Tokelau, commenced his prayer for good weather and a plentiful supply of fruits and fish. This was followed by dancing in which first the women and then the men participated.</p>
          <pb xml:id="n75" n="68"/>
          <lg type="verse">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Prayer to Tui Tokelau</hi>
            </head>
            <l>Tulou, tulou, tulou, tulou..u..u</l>
            <l>Fanake la ki to langi.</l>
            <l>He tai<note xml:id="fn6_68" n="6"><p><hi rend="i">Tai</hi> means “a number of” (22), probably used here in the sense of “plenty” or “let there be plenty of.”</p></note> ua,</l>
            <l>He tai malino,</l>
            <l>He tai malama,</l>
            <l>Fanaifo<note xml:id="fn7_68" n="7"><p>This is an ancient word now forgotten. It is probably derived from <hi rend="i">fana</hi>, shoot or drive, and <hi rend="i">ifo</hi>, down.</p></note> ki to ulufenua,</l>
            <l>He tai taume,</l>
            <l>He tai singano,</l>
            <l>Fanaifo ki to uluulu.</l>
            <l>He tai manini,</l>
            <l>He tai,</l>
            <l>Fanaiko ki to moana.</l>
            <l>He tai fonu,</l>
            <l>He tai atu,</l>
            <l>Fanaifo ki to namo.</l>
            <l>He tai fasua,</l>
            <l>He tai tifa,</l>
            <l>He tai paikea,</l>
            <l>He tai.</l>
          </lg>
          <lg type="verse">
            <l>Tulou (word of apology often used today as “excuse” or “pardon”).</l>
            <l>Rise there to the heavens.</l>
            <l>Let there be plenty of rain,</l>
            <l>Let there be plenty of calm,</l>
            <l>Let there be plenty of light,</l>
            <l>Send down to the plantations.</l>
            <l>Plenty of (sheaths of the) coconut blossoms,</l>
            <l>Plenty of young hala pandanus fruit,</l>
            <l>Send down to the reef.</l>
            <l>Plenty of manini (small fish),</l>
            <l>Let there be plenty,</l>
            <l>Send down to the deep sea.</l>
            <l>Plenty of turtle,</l>
            <l>Plenty of bonito,</l>
            <l>Send down to the lagoon.</l>
            <l>Plenty of Tridacna shell,</l>
            <l>Plenty of mother-of-pearl shell,</l>
            <l>Plenty of grubs,</l>
            <l>Let there be plenty.</l>
          </lg>
          <p>Smith (26) gives a similar prayer in Rarotongan asking for abundant food and “addressed to these evil spirits”. He adds:</p>
          <p>After the incantation has been recited, the food is partaken of by the chiefs and priests, after which the food is distributed to all the people and a feast is held.</p>
          <p>The following description of the ceremony at Atafu is taken from the notes of Dr. <name type="person" key="name-121404">Andrew Thomson</name> (31), former Director of the observatory at Apia, Samoa, who was in Tokelau in 1928.</p>
          <p>The ceremony took place in June on the evening of the full moon. In the early afternoon the people deposited their offerings 40 or 50 feet before the god house. These were large mats measuring 12 by 6 feet, to be used as clothing (malo) for the stone column of Tui Tokelau.</p>
          <p>The ceremony commenced in the early evening before moonrise. The priest, appointed to Atafu from Fakaofu, began with a long prayer during which he looked at the heavens and asked that the sun might continue to shine and the rain be plentiful, then he looked at the sea and asked that fish be numerous during the year, and finally he looked at the land and asked that coconuts might grow in great quantities. All this time the people looked up to the sky. The men stood within 15 or 20 feet of the god house during the ceremony, but the women and children remained several hundred feet away.</p>
          <p>After the prayer the priest carried the mat offerings into the inner chamber of the god house and divided them into two portions—one for the immediate ceremony and the other for the ceremony at Fakaofu. He brought outside again the mats to be wrapped on the Atafu slab of Tui Tokelau and removed the rotted mats with which the slab
<pb xml:id="n76" n="69"/>
had been clothed the year before. He deposited these in the stone enclosure beside the god house. Ten chosen men assisted the priest to wind on the new mats <note xml:id="fn8_69" n="8"><p>Neither Thomson's information nor mine stated whether or not the stone slab of Fakafotu or Te Moana was wrapped with mats during the ceremony. The illustration from Wilkes (<ref target="#MacTokeP006a">pl. 6, <hi rend="i">B</hi></ref>) shows both stones covered.</p></note>. This concluded the ritual after which there was a feast continuing into the middle of the night.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d4-d6" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Land of the Dead</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The spirits of the dead (<hi rend="i">nganga</hi>) were thought to go to Tualiku, where the god Te Sesema reigned. Tualiku was not localized, but the meaning of the name, “the back of the sea”, suggests that it lay over the rim of the horizon. It was a true paradise of Polynesian imagination, where the blessed danced and ate all day and night and wore flowers in their ears, and pearl shell ornaments (<hi rend="i">lei</hi>) around their necks, forbidden to all common men in life. In Tualiku there was also a purgatory where the souls of men who were damned by never having been circumcised in life (<hi rend="i">ngatino seki faeloa</hi>) walked through eternity with great stone discs like grindstones on their backs.</p>
          <p>The natives believed that their spirits could select their residence for the afterlife. As death was approaching, a man told his friends that he was going to the moon or to some part of the heavens where he might be seen by his friends. A soul might also elect to remain on earth in the grave, according to Turner (32), who adds:</p>
          <p>They believed, moreover, that there were certain evil spirits always on the watch for human beings, and that, if any were caught, their souls were dragged up and down the universe forever, as the slaves of these demons, and never found a resting place. Hence it was a common saying at Tokelau, “Take care of the soul. It lives forever. Never mind the body, it rots in the grave!”</p>
        </div>
      </div>
      <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d5" type="section">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">Sickness</hi>
        </head>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d5-d1" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Beliefs</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The Tokelau people believed that sickness was caused by malicious gods or the infraction of tapus. According to Turner (32), there was a specific disease-making god. Only by making presents of mats to his priest were the sick able to recover. The priest then prayed to the god and massaged the affected part of the sick person with coconut oil. This cure was evidently to be accomplished through spiritual power imparted by the god, for Turner (32) says:</p>
          <p>He used no particular oil. When he sat down he called some one of the family to hand him some oil and, dipping his hand in the cup, passed it gently over the part two or three times.</p>
          <p>When an epidemic, <hi rend="i">kuanga mai aitu</hi> (sickness from the gods), spread rapidly or ringworms afflicted more than the usual number of people, they believed that the gods of other islands had sent the sickness upon them. By
<pb xml:id="n77" n="70"/>
a decree of the chief and priests the village united in driving the sickness from their island. First, each person of the village collected a few feathers and a segment of coconut husk which he burned out to make a rude model canoe. Then they assembled at the far end of the village from the beach and commenced a drive toward the sea. With sticks and spears they rushed through the village, hurling their weapons at everything they came to, piercing old bowls or coconuts, upturning rocks and logs about the houses, and beating any object till they came to the water's edge. Here they set up the feathers as sails in their model canoes and launched them into the sea, supposedly carrying on board the spirits that had inflicted the epidemic. By this pantomime and magic the sickness that had been sent to them was passed on to another island.</p>
          <p>In each community there were medicine men (<hi rend="i">matai fau</hi>) and assistants (<hi rend="i">fofo</hi>) who were not priests or prophets of gods. They treated the sick according to prescribed methods based on theories of what took place in the body when particular symptoms showed. This lore was handed down from parent to child and is still practiced today by descendants of the ancient native doctors. All the people have a general knowledge of household remedies and freely practice massage with coconut oil to remove soreness and bodily pains. But doctors are relied upon in any serious trouble because of their greater knowledge.</p>
          <p>The chief doctor's medical kit included: a set of lancets (<hi rend="i">nifomanga</hi>), shark teeth lashed to light sticks for opening ulcers and cutting away flesh; a bottle of coconut oil (<hi rend="i">niulolo</hi>); and a few leaves, roots, and pieces of bark. These medicines were usually procured from the bush and prepared as they were needed.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d5-d2" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Treatment</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d5-d2-d1" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Massage</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Massage with coconut oil is the general treatment for all pains and soreness. After strenuous work or when a person is exceedingly tired, it is customary to have two young girls or boys of the house massage (<hi rend="i">lomilomi</hi>) and pummel (<hi rend="i">tukituki</hi>) the whole body. In sickness from any cause the aching part is rubbed. Aside from the relief that massage usually gives, it is believed that pain and fever can be rubbed out. Soreness moves into other parts of the body from the stomach through the arteries and veins, and by massage can be pushed back.</p>
            <p>Massage for a feverish headache is intended to carry the fever out of the head, through the neck, and back into its seat in the lower abdomen. The doctor commences by rubbing the neck in a downward motion with the tips of his fingers over the jugular vein. He then works on the forehead, <choice><orig>com-
<pb xml:id="n78" n="71"/>
mencing</orig><reg>commencing</reg></choice> with his fingers deep in the eye socket and against the bridge of the nose and stroking upward and outward across the eyebrows and temples. The stroking is continued upward and outward, gradually moving higher from the center of the forehead until the hair line is reached. Then the massaging moves to the “center of the head”, a point measured from the tip of the nose to the point on the top of the skull by stretching the thumb and tip of the second finger. With thumbs pressed on this point, the massagist rubs with his finger tips down the sides of the head and up the occipito-parietal suture and down again over the occiput into the neck, rubbing this part well. In the next step he rubs the back muscles along the spine until he reaches the small of the back. Here he rubs across the sacrum “putting the fever back into its place”. He finishes by cauterizing the two muscles that run from the back of the neck to the shoulder.</p>
            <p>Soreness in the arm and shoulder is supposed to be centered in the scapula (<hi rend="i">ivi sa</hi>). Pressure applied with the thumbs to the center of this bone and a few inches down on the arm from the shoulder is thought to relieve the pain. This is followed by cauterization along an artery in the axillary region, through which the pain is supposed to pass into the arm. For inflammation and swelling in the axillary region, common in the beginning of filariasis, a ring of five spots is cauterized, surrounded by lighter burns. If pain is located in the upper arm, the elbow is cauterized twice on the inside and once on the outside. For a pain in the forearm, the wrist is cauterized three times in a line on the back and again on the inside.</p>
            <p>Soreness in the chest is removed by massage and cautery. Rubbing begins at the shoulders and moves along the clavicle to the breast bone and then along the intervals between each rib, massaging away from the breast bone to carry the soreness into the back. Finally pressure is applied by the hands over the diaphragm.</p>
            <p>Earache is treated by massaging along the anterior border of the mastoid process, along the lower mandible away from the ear, and then over the rim of the ear to the auricle, which is pulled several times to extract the pain which has been forced into it.</p>
            <p>For stiffness in the neck the massagist kneads and rubs the neck muscles downward, continuing the pressure along the inner border of the scapula. At the end of each stroke he holds his fingers down and pulls the skin taut, keeping the cause of the soreness from reëntering the neck. When he has completed the massage, he cauterizes the stiff part of the neck in three places. A sore throat is relieved by massage and drinking the juice of coconuts heated on an oven.</p>
            <p>Hydrocele in the scrotum, caused by filaria, is not infrequent among the men. To relieve the enlargement the scrotum is massaged until it breaks. Massage is also employed to enlarge the scrotum, in some cases even drawing
<pb xml:id="n79" n="72"/>
it as far down as the knees. This is believed to be a relief and to cure it from further swelling.</p>
            <p>The new-born child is massaged daily by some woman of the house and by the mother as soon as she is able. The chief purpose is to make a well-shaped body with straight limbs. Especial attention is paid to the head and nose to insure natural formation, although the bridge of the nose is often pinched to make it high. No attempts are made to change the natural shape of the occiput or to flatten the <hi rend="i">alae</hi> of the nose, as is practiced among the Tongans. The child is carefully laid on one side and then on the other to avoid flattening one side of the head more than the other. The buttocks are shaped to give them full roundness, and the genitals massaged to make them well formed and to prevent swelling of these parts in later life. This is an attempt to avoid the advanced symptoms of filarial infection. It is also done to older children who continue to wet their mats after an age when the habit should be overcome. The anus is gently pressed in during the early months of life to prevent a dropping of that part in old age.</p>
            <p>A broken bone is set by careful massaging. It is wrapped in a soft padding of <hi rend="i">puka</hi> leaves encased in a pliable young sheath (<hi rend="i">taume</hi>) of a coconut blossom. This splint is removed every two days and the fracture rubbed lightly with coconut oil, after which the limb is wrapped in a fresh sheath.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d5-d2-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Cauterizing</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Ringworm (<hi rend="i">pita</hi>) (<hi rend="i">Tinea imbricata</hi>), which is known throughout the islands to the south as “Tokelau ringworm”, was introduced into Tokelau by an infected Gilbertese named Peter who came to Fakaofu on a whaling ship. The native name of the disease, <hi rend="i">pita</hi>, is taken from his name. It is rampant in the islands and covers the entire body of many natives. A second form of ringworm (<hi rend="i">lafa</hi>) blackens the skin. <hi rend="i">Tane</hi>, common also in Samoa and Tonga, leaves light pigmented spots on the affected parts of the body. These three forms of skin disease are treated in the same manner. The ringworm is first rubbed with coconut oil and then burned off with a wick made by chewing a piece of pandanus root to loosen the fibers and twisting it into a small rope after it has dried.</p>
            <p>Sores that manifest themselves in yaws are sometimes cauterized by wicks, but usually they are scalded. A coconut shell cup with a small perforation at the base is filled with boiling water and placed over the sore. The hot water dropping on the sore reduces the inflammation.</p>
            <p>For lung trouble in which the patient breathes rapidly and with difficulty, the upper abdomen is cauterized. Nine burns in three vertical rows are made under the ribs; the first between the base at the breast plate and the navel, and a row on each side. Each spot is cauterized twice. The doctor
<pb xml:id="n80" n="73"/>
feels with the flat of his hand, and if the affliction appears to be deep in the chest, judged by the throbbing in the patient's back, cauterization is applied along the spine. The first burn is made just below the neck over the cervical vertebra, the second the width of four fingers below it, the third the same distance below the second. Cautery is applied at two points on either side of the juncture of the sacrum and lowest lumbar vertebra; one burn is made on the back of each knee and ankle. It is believed that an artery (<hi rend="i">ua</hi>) runs from the head to the foot and if the line of this is followed with cauterized spots, the flow of the ailment can be stopped.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d5-d2-d3" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Medicinal Treatment</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Wounds are washed out with water and covered with a ball of <hi rend="i">maile</hi> leaves which have been previously chewed and mixed with saliva. If the wound bleeds profusely it is covered with <hi rend="i">taususu</hi> leaves as a styptic compress and is then bandaged with narrow strips of plaited <hi rend="i">kie</hi> pandanus.</p>
            <p>Abscesses are brought to a head with hot compresses of <hi rend="i">nonu</hi> leaves cut into small pieces and wrapped in the fibrous stipule (<hi rend="i">kaka</hi>) of a coconut leaf. The compress is dipped into heated coconut oil and gently pressed around the eruption to force out the pus. A little of the compress is left on the head of the abscess while the massaging and pressing is continued. When the sore is in the proper condition it is opened with a shark's tooth lancet, tapped by the operator with a light stick.</p>
            <p>Headaches are cured by massaging the head and applying an ointment made of eight buds of the <hi rend="i">maile</hi> tree and a young root of <hi rend="i">fala</hi> pandanus, the thickness of a man's finger and half an arm in length, pounded in a coconut shell cup (<hi rend="i">ipu</hi>).</p>
            <p>Earache is relieved by pouring into the ear and then drawing out an extract made from the bark of the <hi rend="i">tausunu</hi>.</p>
            <p>The growth over the conjunctiva of the eye, usually the result of irritating an eye infected with conjunctivitis, is scraped away with leaf stems of <hi rend="i">lau puka</hi>. For conjunctivitis and other inflammations of the eye an extract is secured by squeezing the scraped pulp of a coconut leaf midrib. The outer surface of a young leaf is removed and the fibrous pulp is scraped into a receptacle. The juice or sap is expressed through the clothlike stipule of the coconut leaf.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
      </div>
      <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d6" type="section">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">Dancing</hi>
        </head>
        <p>Very few ancient dances are remembered in Tokelau. Their performance was forbidden by the early missionaries, and they were soon forgotten. Modern dances consist mainly of gestures interpreting the words of the accompanying song and retain little of the ancient form. They are usually held in the evening in the meeting house and are accompanied by a drummer beating
<pb xml:id="n81" n="74"/>
on a box or roll of mats and by a group of singers behind the dancing line. A group of 8 or 12 dancers, either men or women, sit on the floor in rows of 4. Shortly after the song is started they rise and go through their motions in unison, joining in the song. The dances are alternated between two groups at the ends of the house. According to Burrows (5), this style of dancing is similar to that of the Ellice Islands and to one type of dancing in Samoa. The modern Samoan <hi rend="i">siva</hi> is often performed in Tokelau.</p>
        <p>During the field trip on Atafu an exhibition of ancient dances was given, accompanied by the singing of the performers. The dancers stood abreast in a single line throughout the dancing. They moved 1 or 2, or sometimes 3 steps; but the principal movements were made with their arms or canoe paddles (<hi rend="i">foe</hi>), used in some dances in place of the ancient dance paddles (<hi rend="i">paki</hi>). The exhibition was led by a woman who had learned the songs and movements from her father.</p>
        <p>A second form of dancing was performed by a group of women in celebration of a victorious cricket match. The dancers formed in single file, standing close together, and paraded around the cricket ground with short, light steps, pausing regularly to sway in unison or to make an arm movement or gesture with the leaves held in their hands. They kept time by striking their open hands with these leaves. All movements were led by the first woman in the file. Several times she made spiral figures in which she worked herself into the center of the circulating dancers and then unwound the figure by turning and dancing out between the converging lines. Burrows (5) and Lister (14) witnessed similar performances of this ancient dance at Fakaofu. Lister saw men dance, accompanied by women who beat time and chanted. Burrows saw women dance, maintaining time by beating a piece of wood with the open hand, but not singing. Wilkes (34) describes a similar tripping dance performed at Nonuti in the Gilbert Islands.</p>
      </div>
      <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d7" type="section">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">Music</hi>
        </head>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d7-d1" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Instruments</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d7-d1-d1" type="section">
            <p>Tokelau people employed three types of percussive instruments for beating time and for their dances, and two wind instruments, a flageolet and the conch shell.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d7-d1-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Percussion Instruments</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The Tongan wooden gong (<hi rend="i">lali</hi>), made from the hollowed section of a tree trunk, is used in the Tokelau Islands (<ref target="#MacToke075a">fig. 7</ref>). Most of the modern gongs have been imported from Samoa, where the <hi rend="i">puapua</hi> trees from which the gongs are made, grow larger. The gong is about 4.5 feet long, 1.5 feet wide, and 2 feet deep. The upper surface is slit lengthwise within the ends
<pb xml:id="n82" n="75"/>
of the log and the interior is hollowed out, following the curvature of the log's circumference. At the ends the upper surface is gouged out 3 or 4 inches deep, leaving a lip between this hollow and the interior opening.</p>
            <p>
              <figure xml:id="MacToke075a">
                <graphic url="MacToke075a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke075a-g"/>
                <head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 7.—Wooden gongs and beaters.</head>
              </figure>
            </p>
            <p>Gongs were struck with two or three sticks held by two drummers who beat in different rhythm. Small wooden gongs were played with a fast rhythm to keep time in the old dances. The ancient name of the wooden gong was <hi rend="i">kaulalo</hi>, but it is referred to today by the Tongan and Samoan term, <hi rend="i">lalo</hi>.</p>
            <p>The Tokelau drum (<hi rend="i">pasu</hi>) was made from a section of a <hi rend="i">kanava</hi> tree trunk, one end of which was burned and hacked out to a depth measured from the finger tips to the elbow. Over the open end a shark skin was pulled taut and lashed under the rim. The Wilkes party found one of these on the <hi rend="i">malae</hi>. The presence of the drum in Tokelau is unusual for it is an instrument of eastern Polynesia, conspicuously absent in western Polynesia. The Tokelau name <hi rend="i">pasu, pahu</hi>, is also found in Hawaii and other eastern Polynesian islands.</p>
            <p>Long, thin boards (<hi rend="i">papa</hi>), used for stretching and scraping bark to be made into fiber, were also employed as sounding boards struck with two sticks to tap out the rhythm for dances. Mat-covered boxes or kerosene tins have supplanted the boards because of their more resonant tones.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d7-d1-d3" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Wind Instruments</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Flageolets (<hi rend="i">fangufangu</hi>) were formerly made from the pithy stems of young <hi rend="i">kanava</hi> plants, but are now made from the recently introduced papaya tree, whose young branches are hollow and easily cut. The modern flageolets, usually played by young girls, vary in the number of notches cut on the upper surface from 1 to 6.</p>
            <p>Whistles are made by the children from strips of pandanus or coconut leaves wound into a spiral- or cone-shaped trumpet.</p>
            <p>Large conch shells (<hi rend="i">fao</hi>) (<hi rend="i">Charonia tritonis</hi>) are collected by divers in the lagoon at Atafu. A mouthpiece is formed by breaking off the point of the shell and a hole is chipped through one of the whorls a few inches below the broken point. Fishing captains use conch shells to call together the fleet. They were once used in the village to assemble the people but have been supplanted by the wooden gong and the penny whistle.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n83" n="76"/>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d7-d2" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Singing</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d7-d2-d1" type="section">
            <p>In ancient times songs played a large part in community activities in Tokelau. Songs of worship or propitiation were sung before any great undertaking and in connection with feasts, funerals, and other rites. Hale (11) says the natives of Atafu constantly broke into song for their white visitors, probably to placate them. The numerous references in literature and legend to songs indicate that once there was great variety in singing. A few ancient songs are remembered at Atafu, but most of them were forgotten when dancing was forbidden by the missionaries.</p>
            <p>The modern singing in Tokelau has been greatly influenced by foreign music. Samoan teachers have introduced modern Samoan songs and Christian hymns, which the natives enjoy singing in the evenings. Sailors from the Ellice Islands and other parts of Polynesia have taught songs of their islands. Many of the words written by local lyrists are based on reports of events and places of the outside world; Auckland Harbor and the new wireless are subjects of present popular songs.</p>
            <p>The following ancient songs, translated by Mika, were sung as accompaniment to the paddle dances performed at Atafu. Many lines refer to forgotten events and several words are no longer in the dialect. <hi rend="i">H</hi> and <hi rend="i">f</hi> were pronounced in the words and are reproduced here without transcribing them to the <hi rend="i">f</hi> and <hi rend="i">s</hi> form of the dialect used in other parts of the text. I could procure no translation for several of the songs.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d7-d2-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Ta Hoe—Songs for Dances Performed with Canoe Paddles</hi>
            </head>
            <lg type="verse">
              <head>I</head>
              <l>Huo nanaia</l>
              <l>Ko te lepu mo kavea</l>
              <l>Ko te hoe tua hamania</l>
              <l>E tele ki nei</l>
              <l>E hapinia eoea (eo ea) iã.</l>
            </lg>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>Dip<note xml:id="fna_76" n="a"><p>Paddle is dipped down and held like a shovel.</p></note> and wave<note xml:id="fnb_76" n="b"><p>Paddle is shaken or waved as a signal before the body.</p></note> (the paddle)</l>
              <l>The stirring<note xml:id="fnc_76" n="c"><p>Paddle is carried in upright position to right side.</p></note> (of water) … ?</l>
              <l>The paddle with even-grained back<note xml:id="fnd_76" n="d"><p>Paddle is dropped in front of body with tip of blade touching the ground.</p></note></l>
              <l>Sail to here<note xml:id="fne" n="e"><p>Paddle is lifted upright again and carried across the body as if it were drifting or sailing by.</p></note></l>
              <l>Strike the fish running away in fright.</l>
            </lg>
            <lg type="verse">
              <head>II</head>
              <l>Hiahia ai vao</l>
              <l>Kou te tu ma kou te noho</l>
              <l>Ko holoholo mulia.</l>
              <l>Au fakaheka fakatia</l>
              <l>Au fakaheka fakatia.</l>
            </lg>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>?(Who) rejoices in the bush</l>
              <l>I shall stand and I shall sit</l>
              <l>I step (or slip) backwards.</l>
              <l>?</l>
              <l>?</l>
            </lg>
            <pb xml:id="n84" n="77"/>
            <lg type="verse">
              <head>III</head>
              <l>Utupeepee, utupeepee,</l>
              <l>Tangaloa talae fetokai.</l>
              <l>E angina ki Fali ma Fana</l>
              <l>Kanapa uila fati tili</l>
              <l>E numia kai fakatau mai</l>
              <l>Ko molia—Taku hoe nei</l>
              <l>Apoapo taku hoe i lalo</l>
              <l>Na tahea ite ngalutau</l>
              <l>Ke mau mai ke mau mai.</l>
            </lg>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>Spin the paddle, spin the paddle,</l>
              <l>Touch and strike (the paddle of) Tangaloa.</l>
              <l>The force of the wind to Fali and Fana</l>
              <l>The coming of lightning and thunder</l>
              <l>The whirling of water … ?</l>
              <l>My paddle here beneath</l>
              <l>I dip my paddle beneath (the canoe)</l>
              <l>(It was taken by) the flow of the backwash of the wave.</l>
              <l>Hold (it) close to the body.</l>
            </lg>
            <lg type="verse">
              <head>IV</head>
              <l>Ko hao ke mau<note xml:id="fna_77" n="a"><p>Paddle is twisted in the hands and held upright.</p></note></l>
              <l>Aukau<note xml:id="fnb_77" n="b"><p>Paddle is carried to side and held upright.</p></note></l>
              <l>Kuamaua kuapokia<note xml:id="fnc_77" n="c"><p>Paddle is waved over the head.</p></note></l>
              <l>Uhiu i te hoena</l>
              <l>Ki okutua</l>
              <l>Uhiu i te hoena</l>
              <l>Ki okuluma</l>
              <l>Uhiu i te hoena</l>
              <l>Hakapato tia ia<note xml:id="fnd_77" n="d"><p>Paddle is touched to the ground in front at the word <hi rend="i">ia</hi>.</p></note></l>
            </lg>
            <lg type="verse">
              <head>V</head>
              <l>Te fili tupua</l>
              <l>Te fili momono</l>
              <l>Na koe ia</l>
              <l>Na koe ia</l>
              <l>E ngaulua</l>
              <l>E na koe ia</l>
              <l>E na koe ia</l>
              <l>E na ulua</l>
              <l>E na koe ia</l>
              <l>Te fili tupua.</l>
            </lg>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d7-d2-d3" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Ta Paki—Songs for Dances Performed with Dance Paddles</hi>
            </head>
            <lg type="verse">
              <head>I</head>
              <l>Te kanave tau kailove,</l>
              <l>Te kanave tau kailove,</l>
              <l>Te fia vaka vakai e.</l>
            </lg>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>Toss the handle of the paddle,</l>
              <l>Toss the handle of the paddle,</l>
              <l>Wishing to look for the canoe.</l>
            </lg>
            <lg type="verse">
              <head>II</head>
              <l>Holiholia vaka heua</l>
              <l>E uhu Tonga,</l>
              <l>E voliao.</l>
              <l>Manu afe</l>
              <l>Ie ie e lua.</l>
            </lg>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>Step in time, turning the canoe about (?)</l>
              <l>To start a journey to Tonga,</l>
              <l>To dance.</l>
              <l>A thousand birds</l>
              <l>Point to things (point out the way).</l>
            </lg>
            <pb xml:id="n85" n="78"/>
            <lg type="verse">
              <head>III</head>
              <l>Ta paki ko tu mai.</l>
              <l>Ko te paki na holitia</l>
              <l>Mai.</l>
              <l>Kapuna kapunake lea</l>
              <l>Ko te paki katele ki Uea.</l>
            </lg>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>The dance paddle stands near.</l>
              <l>The dance paddle standing near</l>
              <l>Is stepped on.</l>
              <l>Rising to the surface</l>
              <l>The dance paddle sails to Uvea.</l>
            </lg>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d7-d2-d4" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Songs for Dances Performed Without Paddles</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d7-d2-d4-d1" type="section">
              <head>I</head>
              <p>This song refers to a turtle hunt in which Tinilau, a mischievous character of Polynesian mythology, allows the turtle to escape.</p>
              <lg type="verse">
                <head>Song of Catching the Turtle</head>
                <l>Honu a levaleva,</l>
                <l>E hala honu a levaleva.</l>
                <l>Tulituli atu tamafanau.</l>
                <l>Kai amutia ko Tinilau</l>
                <l>Oi avalau ma lualau.</l>
                <l>Kae Tinilau e voliao.</l>
              </lg>
              <lg type="verse">
                <l>The turtle of the deep sea,</l>
                <l>The turtle of the deep sea is hunted.</l>
                <l>Chase away the young children.</l>
                <l>Who congratulates Tinilau</l>
                <l>Alas! there is nothing.</l>
                <l>Tinilau continues to dance.</l>
              </lg>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d7-d2-d4-d2" type="section">
              <head>II</head>
              <p>The following song tells of two lovers who exchange their garlands of Tahitian gardenia (<hi rend="i">tiale</hi>) blossoms, which they wear in their hair, signifying their engagement to be married. The last line refers to a second suitor who enters the house and is told to retire.</p>
            </div>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d7-d2-d5" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Song of Lovers</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d7-d2-d5-d1" type="section">
              <lg type="verse">
                <head>
                  <hi rend="c">Hakauta</hi>
                </head>
                <l>Hakauta atu te hautiale,</l>
                <l>Hakaakeake ke ahiaki,</l>
                <l>Lihaki atu te fautiale,</l>
                <l>Hakaake afiake,</l>
                <l>O tuku atu, O tuku kai,</l>
                <l>O ponopono ke hoki ai.</l>
              </lg>
              <lg type="verse">
                <l>Give and place the tiale wreath on (her) head, (to the man)</l>
                <l>Wear it in the evening and walk about, (to the girl)</l>
                <l>Let the (your) tiale flower wreath give out its scent, (to the girl)</l>
                <l>Put it on and wear it about in the evening, (to the man)</l>
                <l>Oh, give away and take (exchange your wreaths) (to both)</l>
                <l>Send back again (anyone who enters).</l>
              </lg>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d7-d2-d5-d2" type="section">
              <head>III</head>
              <p>The following song deals with a canoe which sails to two islands, Leuaniua (the native name of Ontong Java) and Laloata (an unknown island).</p>
              <lg type="verse">
                <head>Ancient Dance Song</head>
                <l>E tau te vaka i Luaniua,</l>
                <l>E taha te vaka,</l>
                <l>E taha te vaka i Laloata.</l>
                <l>Hateu e teu mamao.</l>
                <l>E neni aue<note xml:id="fn9_79" n="9"><p><hi rend="i">E neni</hi> (literally, the jerk of a fishline when it is struck), meaning the canoe darts forward with the first motion of the paddles.</p></note> tao.</l>
              </lg>
              <lg type="verse">
                <l>The canoe anchors at Luaniua,</l>
                <l>The canoe travels close,</l>
                <l>The canoe travels close to Laloata.</l>
                <l>Make ready to go (?) far away.</l>
                <l>The canoe moves suddenly and goes.</l>
              </lg>
              <pb xml:id="n86" n="79"/>
              <lg type="verse">
                <head>IV</head>
                <l>Ka po te talinga pola</l>
                <l>Kaha tu mai tu maia</l>
                <l>Kaha tu mai tu mailoa</l>
                <l>Te ika taulia o ka taulia te akau</l>
                <l>Ka taulia te mate, e - e.</l>
                <l>Langa mai la te aoao</l>
                <l>Po le taua.</l>
              </lg>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
      </div>
      <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d8" type="section">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">Tales</hi>
        </head>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d8-d1" type="section">
          <p>The tales of Tokelau contain many references to mythological characters and events found in tales from other parts of Polynesia. Many myths mention voyages to Fiji and the people found there, a common feature of Samoan tales. Elements characteristic of myths of the Cook Islands and New Zealand are often incorporated in basically Samoan tales. The only local stories are those concerning the nature spirits inhabiting specific spots on the islands (p. <ref target="#n68">61</ref>).</p>
          <p>The most frequently mentioned figure is Sina, who is the sister of Maui in the most wide-spread Polynesian story. She is sometimes associated with the moon as its goddess and with Tinirau or Tinilau whom she marries. In western Polynesia, as in the tale of Sinalangi given below (p. <ref target="#n88">81</ref>), she is the daughter of Tangaloa and descends to earth.</p>
          <p>The following tales heard in Tokelau are derived from Samoa or Tonga: The courting of Sina, princess of Fiji, by Tinilau, a chief of Vavau (5); the story of the pearl shell (9, p. 243) in which Alo'alo, son of the sun, marries Sina, the Fijian princess (the Tokelau version adds Kui, a blind woman, who appears in myths of Tahiti and the Cook Islands); how counting came to be as it is (9, 32) in which the appearance of the snake (<hi rend="i">ngata</hi>) is obviously from Samoa; and the tale of Tae-a-Tangaloa which contains an element of the creation stories of Samoa and Tonga.</p>
          <p>The story of Manini, the fish, put together after it was killed by Tinilau, is found in Tonga (6) and Rotuma (15). How fish got their colors (5) is found in western Polynesia and the Cook Islands. In this myth Sina loses valuable property of her parents and is carried away by a fish, shark, or turtle, which deserts her for the insult of touching food to his head, but which finally returns or is succeeded by another sea creature that carries her to the land of Tinilau. Her restoration to her parents by her brother, Lupe, is part of the fundamental Sina episode in the Maui myths. Except for the tattooing of the fish this myth is more closely parallel to the similar story in other islands than any Tokelau tale.</p>
        </div>
        <pb xml:id="n87" n="80"/>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d8-d2" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Sina Myths</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d8-d2-d1" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">The Story of Sinaiono</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Maliliona Tane and Maliliona Fafine were married and had two children, a boy and a girl, named Mangeleponapona and Sinaleulu. The boy, Mangeleponapona, was married to Lafailafaitonga. She became pregnant and desired some fish.<note xml:id="fn10_80" n="10"><p>Such a desire for special foods on the part of pregnant women is called an <hi rend="i">umiti</hi> by the Tokelau people, and the greatest effort is made to fulfill such desires.</p></note> When Mangeleponapona heard the request of his wife, he went straightway to his parents' house and told them of his wife's wish. They sent his sister, Sinaleulu, to the reef to catch fish for Mangeleponapona to take to his wife. Sinaleulu had no net to fish with on the reef, so she sat in the inlet facing the current and spread her legs apart, and in this way made a fork trap into which the fish must run. When the fish swam against her, she caught them with her hands. After catching many in this way she took them home to her brother, who brought them to Lafailafaitonga. He cooked them for her to eat, but when she swallowed them she immediately vomited.</p>
            <p>Again Mangeleponapona went to his parents with a request for fish for his wife who wished some to eat, and again they sent Sinaleulu to the reef to catch some. She sat as before in the inlet, and when the fish swam between her legs she caught them with her hands and took them to her house. Her brother Mangeleponapona prepared them for his wife, but these too made her sick when she ate them.</p>
            <p>Mangeleponapona asked his parents for fish a third time, and watched from a distance to discover how his sister was catching them. When she came back he took the fish from her but did not cook them or allow his wife to touch them.</p>
            <p>The next day he went to his parents and told them how his sister had caught the fish. Sinaleulu was lying on the mats in the house when her brother came in and he thought she was asleep. But she listened to what he told their parents and became very angry. As soon as he had left the house she went to a point of the island and pushed it off with a pole (<hi rend="i">toko</hi>) for propelling a canoe in shallow water, thus separating it from the rest of the land. Then she poled her way to the land of Saluelakaniva, whom she married.</p>
            <p>Lafailafaitonga had a baby girl, Sinaiono, who married Tinilau and went to his island. Here Tinilau had many wives, the Kaunofoitalau, but Sinaiono became his favorite. The Kaunofoitalau were jealous of her because Tinilau always carried a bonito to her when he returned from fishing but made the Kaunofoitalau get their fish from the canoe. One night these women made a dish of young coconuts, <hi rend="i">tamokomoko</hi> worms, and starfish, which they ground together and then mixed with their urine. When Tinilau was out early the next morning catching bonito, they forced Sinaiono to drink the food they had prepared. She died, and then they examined her body to find out why she was the favorite of her husband. They decided it was because of her well-formed genitals.</p>
            <p>When Tinilau returned with a large bonito for Sinaiono he found her lying dead on the floor. He went to the Kaunofoitalau, his spirit wives (<hi rend="i">aitu</hi>), and ordered them to bring her back to life. He told them that they must build an island near his own for her by piling rocks on the bottom of the sea where they were to live and take care of Sinaiono, bring her food each day, and make a fire to give her light at night. The island was small and round, and nothing grew on it but the flowering <hi rend="i">tiale</hi> trees.</p>
            <p>After the women and Sinaiono settled on the island they took her soul from her each day and left her alone. They forced the body of Sinaiono to clean up the island and throw the rubbish into the sea each morning and make a fire for herself each night so that Tinilau would believe they were tending her.</p>
            <p>One day the Kaunofoitalau went away as usual but forgot to take the soul of Sinaiono. She went about her work, picking up all the dead leaves and flowers and throwing them into the sea. These dead bits floated away and came to the island where
<pb xml:id="n88" n="81"/>
Sinaleulu, her father's sister, was living with Saluelakaniva. Sinaleulu saw these things and wondered where they came from, and set out in search of the land. She found Sinaiono and discovered their relationship.</p>
            <p>When the Kaunofoitalau returned at the end of the day, Sinaiono went down to the beach to show her shame before them and perform <hi rend="i">singo</hi>, (sitting crosslegged with the back to the superior people and then sitting forward on the knees so that one's buttocks are exposed to those behind). The Kaunofoitalau told Sinaiono that they were doing all that Tinilau had commanded of them. When Sinaleulu heard this she threw all the Kaunofoitalau into the sea, where they were devoured by sharks and fish.</p>
            <p>Then Sinaleulu called all the fish to her and made them carry Sinaiono to Tinilau's island in a house built on a raft. When Sinaiono arrived she found a long house with 10 doors called the <hi rend="i">Faitutoka o fafine</hi>, the doors of which were called <hi rend="i">pouangafulu</hi> (tenth door), <hi rend="i">pouangahiva</hi> (ninth door), <hi rend="i">pouangavalu</hi> (eighth door), and on down to <hi rend="i">pouangatasi</hi> (first door). Behind each door there were as many women as the number marked on the door. When she came to the first door, where Tinilau slept, she went in and lived as his first wife.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d8-d2-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">The Story of Sinalangi</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Tangaloa-langi, who was half man and half god, lived in the sky. He sent his daughter, Sinalangi, down to the world to live, but before she left he gave her a mother-of-pearl shell called Tipi, and said, “If men come to make love to you when you go down and live upon the land, throw the Tipi at them. It will cut off their heads and fly back to you.”</p>
            <p>Sinalangi had a song for her pearl shell:</p>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>Taku tipi e fano ki Olomanga,</l>
              <l>Ko te tipi kula ma Apaitoa,</l>
              <l>Taki te kafa ma Tangaloa,</l>
              <l>Te poipoi ka lele taku tipi</l>
              <l>E fano ki te afu ma te afi.</l>
            </lg>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>My Tipi goes to Olomanga,</l>
              <l>The red Tipi for Apaitoa<note xml:id="fn11_81" n="11"><p>Apaitoa, the name of Sinalangi's son.</p></note></l>
              <l>? the sennit for Tangaloa,</l>
              <l>The division as my Tipi flies</l>
              <l>And goes to the smoke and the fire.</l>
            </lg>
            <p>Sinalangi married a great chief of the earth, Talitau, and by him bore a son whom they called Apaitoa. After she had lived with Talitau for some time she fell in love with Lesia, his brother, who asked her to marry him. Sinalangi went to her husband and confessed her love for Lesia and pleaded that she might marry him. Talitau refused, and though Sinalangi went to him each day, he would not consent. Finally she ran away with Lesia and they lived together in the bush away from the village. They lived there for many years and Sinalangi bore two daughters, Te Titisamakia and Te Titipokia. After the birth of the second daughter, a famine came and no food grew where Lesia and Sinalangi were living. A drought killed all the trees. Lesia had to steal food for himself and his family from his brother's village. When the people discovered that food was disappearing, they banded together to search for the thief. After hunting along the shore and through the forests, they found Lesia hiding in a well and killed him with spears.</p>
            <p>Sinalangi waited for many days, but when her husband did not return she sent her daughters to look for him. They found him dead in the well, his body swollen from the water, and trees growing from his back. The girls sang a song to their father and he returned to life.</p>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>Te masiku tu tua e tu i te vae</l>
              <l>O to ma tamana ko Lesia e.</l>
              <l>Matafi.</l>
            </lg>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>The small <hi rend="i">masiku</hi> bush stands in the back and stands in the leg</l>
              <l>Of my father, Lesia.</l>
              <l>Sweep it away.</l>
            </lg>
            <pb xml:id="n89" n="82"/>
            <p>Lesia went back home with his two daughters. When his disappearance was reported to the village, the men held a council and set out in a war party to find him again.</p>
            <p>When Sinalangi saw all the war party approaching her house, she went outside and threw her Tipi at them. Of the hundreds who were before her, all fell dead except the chief, Talitau. He fled back to his village. With the remainder of his villagers he returned to the house of Lesia and Sinalangi. Apaitoa, the son of Sinalangi and Talitau, was standing beside his mother holding the Tipi. She ordered him to throw it at the party coming to kill Lesia, but Apaitoa refused to throw it at his own father. Sinalangi took the Tipi from her son and threw at Talitau, killing him and all the people with him.</p>
            <p>After this, Apaitoa and his two sisters, Te Titisamakia and Te Titipokia, played a game called <hi rend="i">pei</hi> with two coconuts. The girls thought they had won the game and sang a little song to Apaitoa, claiming that they were above him because he had lost.</p>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>Lalalo, lalo, lalalo e mai koulua e,</l>
              <l>Ko Te Titisamakia ma Te Titipokia</l>
              <l>E kae la lunga, lalunga e kae.</l>
            </lg>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>The two (girls) spring from under, under, under,</l>
              <l>Te Titisamakia and Te Titipokia</l>
              <l>Go above, above, (they) rise above Paitoa.</l>
            </lg>
            <p>Apaitoa turned around and sang the same song, but said that he was above his two sisters. When their mother heard them singing this, she rebuked her daughters for saying that they were superior to their brother. “You are girls,” she said, “and it is right that a boy should be above you.”</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d8-d2-d3" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">The Story of Alomoanaki</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Once a chief went down to the sea to bathe and when he had finished, he dried himself with coconut husks. He threw these down and went away, but a woman named Sinafatukimoa came by and picked them up and sucked them. From the husks she became pregnant and had a boy whom she called Alomoanaki and a girl, Sinamoanaki, whom Tinilau married and took to his island.</p>
            <p>When Alomoanaki was still a little boy playing on the floor by his mother, he asked her who his father was. She would not tell him, and he continued asking until Sinafatukimoa told him his father was Fatutaulalanga, the rock that was holding down one end of the mat on which Sinafatukimoa was plaiting. The boy asked the rock, “Fatutaulalanga, are you my father?” The stone did not reply, so he asked his mother again. She would not tell him though he asked her each day for several days. Finally she told him his father was Kaupuipui, the rack between two posts in the house. Alomoanaki asked, “Kaupuipui, are you my father?” But the table between the posts was silent, and Alomoanaki asked his mother again to tell him the name of his father. Sinafatukimoa did not answer him for several days; then she said that his father was Pou, the post of the house. Again the boy went to talk with his father but the Pou did not speak. Alomoanaki went back to his mother and asked her again and again each day until she finally told him that Alo, the chief in the village, was his father. She told him how she had gone to the beach after he had been bathing and had sucked the coconut husks he had used to dry himself. Then she sent Alomoanaki to the village to find his father. “Go to the house of all the chiefs whom you will find sitting in a council. One will be sitting on a pile of mats higher than the others. This is Alo, your father. Go to him and stay by him until he asks you who you are. Then you must tell him that you are his son and how you came to be born.”</p>
            <p>Alomoanaki went to the village and found his father in the meeting house and sat by him. The chief asked him who he was, and when he heard that Alomoanaki was his son, he came down from his seat, put Alomoanaki in his place, and went to sit with the other chiefs. While Alomoanaki was sitting in the council house, he heard a noise outside and asked what it was. His father replied that he was not to go out and join the
<pb xml:id="n90" n="83"/>
young men who were making the noise and were about to throw darts in a contest. But Alomoanaki went out and joined them in the match. The target was the house of the village maiden. Any man who could hurl his dart through the wall of the house to this maiden won her as a wife. The first young men who hurled their spears pierced the walls of the house, but as the spears came through, Meto, who was sitting inside, waved them aside. When it was Alomoanaki's turn he threw and pierced the wall. Meto watched the stranger throwing and guided his dart toward her, calling, “Come to me, come to me.” The dart went across the floor and slid through her leaf kilt as she sat on the floor. When all the men saw this they shouted, “Avanga! Kaitauso, kaitauso” (The husband! The fish has his bait!, the Tokelau announcement of a marriage). When Alomoanaki went into the house to get his dart, Meto took him by the arms and drew him to her.</p>
            <p>Afterwards they were married, and the first night Alomoanaki slept with his wife the roof of the house leaked from the rain. In the morning Meto asked Alomoanaki to thatch the roof and he went to his father to ask help. Alo replied that he had told his son not to go out with the young men who were competing for Meto and sent him on to his mother to seek help. His mother went to his cousins, the four rats, and asked them to come and thatch the house of Meto and Alomoanaki. Alomoanaki went home and slept. Early the next morning he heard the four rats crying, “Ki, ki, ki” on the roof and scurrying about putting in new thatch.</p>
            <p>When the roof had been repaired Meto asked her husband to bring some pearl shells to make a flooring for the house. This time Alomoanaki went to Tonga to ask the help of his sister who had married Tinilau. A servant of the chiefess of Tonga saw Alomoanaki sitting on the bank of a river and reported to his mistress the arrival of a very handsome stranger. She promptly sent the servant, Te Lulu, back to invite the stranger to her house, but Alomoanaki refused the invitation. Then Alomoanaki asked Te Lulu the name of his mistress and he replied, “Faufauitafafine”. Alomoanaki said, “I am Faufauitatane”, and as he spoke these words, the chiefess died. The servant returned and found a council gathered to elect a new ruler and to discover the cause of the death of the chiefess. Te Lulu told the council that she had died from a sickness of the heart, and he related the story of the stranger. Alomoanaki was sent for and when he looked at the woman she came back to life.</p>
            <p>Then Alomoanaki returned to the river and sat there. Kalesa and Tafaki, the two sons of his sister, Sinamoanaki, saw him and noticed how much he looked like one of them. They told their mother and she sent them to bring the man to her. Sinamoanaki gave her brother pearl shells to put on the floor of his house. Alomoanaki gave his nephews a necklace of <hi rend="i">Hibiscus</hi> blossoms that he had brought from his house and then sailed back to his wife. After he had given the pearl shells to his wife he went down to bathe. He sent his wife to the house to bring some coconut husks to dry himself, but while she was in the house, he jumped into his canoe and started back to the chiefess of Tonga, to whom he had promised to return. Alomoanaki went into her house, but as soon as she entered the door, he smelled the <hi rend="i">Hibiscus</hi> necklace that he had given to the sons of Sinamoanaki. He knew that their father, Tinalau, had stolen it and given it to Faufauitafafine and was sleeping with her. Alomoanaki left the house and departed from Tonga.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d8-d2-d4" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">The Story of Sifo</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Once there was a very beautiful virgin named Sina who had four suitors: Pili, Ulio, and Moko, who were lizards; and Sifo, who was a man. Pili came first to ask her to marry him and as he approached he sang a little song: “I am Pili, the lizard, who has come to ask you to marry me; but, alas, I can not walk and can only creep.” Sina turned to Pili and said, “How can you be my husband? You can not walk and you can not do your work.” Then Ulia came to her and sang a little song: “I am Ulia, the lizard, who has come to ask you to be my wife; but, alas, I can only creep and can not walk.” Sina sent Ulia away, for he too could do no work. Moko came next but Sina
<pb xml:id="n91" n="84"/>
sent him away too because he was a lizard. Finally the man, Sifo, came to Sina and said, “I am coming. I am a man who walks and does not crawl. I would like you to be my wife.” Her parents agreed to her marriage and Sina became Sifo's wife and went with him to his island to live.</p>
            <p>When they were in Sifo's house, Sina made a sucking sound with her lips (<hi rend="i">misi</hi>).<note xml:id="fn12_84" n="12"><p>Done by drawing the corners of the mouth back over the teeth while the lips are kept shut. A common Tokelau custom to signify that something is desired or to call a person.</p></note> Sifo asked what she wished and she said that she wanted to drink. Outside the house were two coconut trees, one the tree of the gods and the other the tree of men. Sifo climbed the tree of the gods, which was a tapu tree whose nuts no one could drink without dying, and picked a nut for his wife. Tinilau was halfway up the tree, caught the nut, and threw it into the tree of men, thus taking away the tapu before the nut fell to the ground. Sina drank the coconut and ate the kernel without disastrous effect.</p>
            <p>After that Sifo took his wife into the bush which was owned by the spirits. He went along the sea side of the bush but sent his wife by the middle path. As they proceeded Sifo called out to his wife to see if she was still living and to ask where she was. Tinilau was walking behind her and as they came to each spirit place (<hi rend="i">malae aitu</hi>) in the bush, of which there were very many, he told her the name and she called it out to her husband. Thus with Tinilau she escaped being taken by the spirits of the bush. Finally they came to an old man, Patikole, who was pounding coconut husks to get fiber for rope-making. Tinilau asked Patikoli to put Sina under his leg as he sat there tailor-fashion. Sifo came up to them and just then Sina made a sound with her lips (<hi rend="i">misi</hi>) calling him. Sifo heard her and asked what it was, but Patikoli said it was his knee making the sound. Patikoli was very angry because Sina had made a <hi rend="i">misi</hi> and would not let her get up. Sifo returned home and brought his flute to the edge of the bush and played for his wife. She heard him but could not go to him. Finally Tinilau took her to his land and married her, and Sifo returned home to grieve for his wife.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d8-d2-d5" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">The Story of Matilafoafoa</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Matilafoafoa, the king of heaven (<hi rend="i">tupu o lunga</hi>) saw a women from his place in the sky. She was picking up rubbish on the earth below. Matilafoafoa sang, “I am king above and below. Let a wind come and carry me to the woman below.” Immediately a wind and a strong rain came and carried him down to earth and set him down beside a woman named Sina. She turned to Matilafoafoa and asked, “Who are you, a man or a god?” Matilafoafoa replied, “I am a man.” He stayed with Sina on earth until she became pregnant. Then he wished to return to his home in the skies. When he left his wife he told her that if she gave birth to a son she must call him Limaleimakoloa.</p>
            <p>Sina later gave birth to a son and named him as his father had desired. Not long after Matilafoafoa had left, Sina married Punga, and by him she had many children. Punga went fishing every day, and when he beached his canoe on his return at evening, all his own children ran to carry his fish; but they drove off Limaleimakoloa, because Punga was not his father.</p>
            <p>Limaleimakoloa, angry at the taunts of the other children, asked his mother why Punga was not his father. Sina told him Matilafoafoa was his father and sent him to his father in the sky, but Punga called him back. Limaleimakoloa shouted at him, “Punga, you like your own children but you do not love me”, and he proceeded on his way.</p>
            <p>During the journey, Limaleimakoloa met many spirits and evil creatures who tried to prevent him from reaching the sky. As soon as the boy told them that he was the son of the king of the sky, they fled from him. Beyond these beings he came upon two women, Limalei and Makoloa, sisters of the king of the sky, who struck at him and cut his flesh. When he reached Matilafoafoa, he told him of the treatment he had received from the two sisters of his father. Matilafoafoa sent for these two women and killed them. Then he took the son of Sina and put him in his own high place.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n92" n="85"/>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d8-d2-d6" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Legend of the Stars</hi>
            </head>
            <p>There were two brothers, Kupenga and Kakau, each of whom had two sons. The four boys went fishing together, but Filo and Mea, the sons of Kupenga, always caught the most fish. They played games together and wrestled, but Filo and Mea always won. The sons of Kakau became jealous of their cousins, so Kakau sent for the two sons of Kupenga and ordered them to go and catch a big <hi rend="i">sumu</hi> (a fish).</p>
            <p>Filo and Mea went to the beach and collected all the waste they could find and threw it into the sea. It floated to the large <hi rend="i">sumu</hi> that was lying at the mouth of the channel. The fish ate it and swelled up. Then the two boys went out, caught the fish, and brought it ashore. Kakau was astonished and asked, “How did you boys manage to kill such a great fish?”</p>
            <p>Kakau sent them out again, this time to kill the great Matuku, a bird that had caught their sister and carried her off to be his wife. The two boys went to Matuku and killed him and then started on their return with Sina, their sister. On their way they came to a big hole that led to the bottom of the sea. In their attempt to cross, Sina and one boy jumped over it, but the second brother fell in. The brother who remained with Sina told her to return to their father and to tell him, when she reached there, to go out that night from his house and he would see his two sons. Then he jumped into the hole. The boys and the Matuku went to the sky, where they may be seen with the <hi rend="i">sumu</hi> in the four-star constellations: Na Tangata, the boys; Te Manu, the bird husband of Sina; and Te Sumu, the fish they had caught. They can be seen above the islands of Samoa.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d8-d3" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">The Story of Tae-A-Tangaloa</hi>
          </head>
          <p>Once Fakataka and his wife, Paua, and Luafatu and his wife, Kui, were traveling in a canoe from Fakaofu to Fiji. A quarrel arose between the two couples which finally resulted in a fight. Fakataka and Paua jumped from the canoe and went down to the bottom of the sea, where they remained as the shells called <hi rend="i">fasua</hi> and <hi rend="i">paua</hi>.</p>
          <p>Kui and Luafatu continued in their canoe toward Fiji, but they encountered a great storm. The canoe sank and Luafatu was thrown out and drowned. His body sank to the floor of the ocean and became a rock (<hi rend="i">fatu</hi>). Kui swam through the storm, praying that she might set her foot on land: “ko au, ko au, ko Kui e oku lunga, e oku lalo, ke akahi toku vae ke tu ki he motu” (I … I … Kui. My kicking above, my kicking below, may my foot stand on an island).</p>
          <p>Soon she came to the reef of an island and crawled on to it. Kui was pregnant, and when she came to a hole (<hi rend="i">tafeta</hi>) in the reef, she lay down and gave birth to her child and then walked to the beach and died.</p>
          <p>Tangaloa, in the sky, saw the new-born child dying on the reef below and sent down the snipe, <hi rend="i">Tuli</hi>, to name it. Tuli flew down with two gifts for the child, a small adz (<hi rend="i">atupa</hi>) and a long-handled ax (<hi rend="i">ualoa</hi>). When he came upon the baby he called it Tae-a-Tangaloa and named the parts of its body after himself; calling the knee <hi rend="i">tuli vae</hi>; the elbow <hi rend="i">tuli lima</hi>, the head <hi rend="i">tuli ulu</hi>, and naming the other parts in the same way.</p>
          <p>The child, Tae-a-Tangaloa, walked ashore, and on the beach he found the pool of blood left by his mother and her dead body. Then he walked among the trees along the shore and came upon Kui Kava, a carpenter, who was making a canoe with the help of his son, Pepe-le-kava. Tae-a-Tangaloa regarded the hull they were piecing together and said to Kui Kava, “Your canoe is crooked.” Kui Kava became angry and replied, “You are an evil boy. I am the chief canoe builder and yet you tell me my canoe is crooked.” Tae-a-Tangaloa repeated many times that the canoe was made out of line, and at last Kui Kava came and stood with him at the end of the canoe and saw that Tae-a-Tangaloa was right. Kui Kava asked Tae-a-Tangaloa to remain with him and help to build the canoe with his ax and adz.</p>
          <p>Tae-a-Tangaloa set to work with the carpenter. First he laid down several short coconut logs in a row, as a cradle for the hull, while he fitted the sections of the hull in
<pb xml:id="n93" n="86"/>
line. But Pepe-le-kava, angry because Tae-a-Tangaloa had found his father's canoe crooked, put his foot on an end of one of the logs and threw the section resting on it out of line. When Tae-a-Tangaloa found they had made a mistake, he commenced again to fit the hull; but each time he finished he found the sections would not join. Working again to make the canoe right, he saw Pepe-le-kava tipping a section by pressing down one of the logs with his foot, and killed him with his ax. After this, Tae-a-Tangaloa finished the canoe in three days.</p>
          <p>When this was done, Tae-a-Tangaloa took the body of Pepe-le-kava to Tangaloa and asked that the boy's life be restored. They returned to the island of Kui Kava, where Tae-a-Tangaloa found the people sailing for Fiji. He stood in the canoe passage as the canoes filed out to sea and requested each one to take him in the canoe, but each refused because he was too young. As the last canoe went out to the reef, Tae-a-Tangaloa offered to go with them as living food (<hi rend="i">oso o te vaka</hi>) to be eaten by the party during the journey; and he was taken.</p>
          <p>During the voyage a great storm arose and many of the canoes sank. Tae-a-Tangaloa stood up in his canoe and prayed to Tangaloa to save them from the strength of the waves: “Tangaloa, kua ita kuku ki faitalia kae tafia, tafia, tafia” (Tangaloa, why does your anger seize us? Let it be driven away). Then the water became calm, but the people in the canoe demanded that they should eat the man who had offered to come as food. Tae-a-Tangaloa stood up again in the canoe and prayed to Tangaloa for food, and it fell from the sky into the canoe. The people ate and then turned to Tae-a-Tangaloa and cried that they were thirsty. He told them to drink the water that had leaked into the canoe, and when they tasted it they found that it was fresh and drank.</p>
          <p>With plenty of food and a fair wind they traveled on and finally came in sight of Fiji. Near the passage lived the high chief, Tui Viti, who destroyed all canoes which came to his island. Tae-a-Tangaloa stood in the canoe again and said to the people, “When Tui Viti lifts his hand, do not look at him but look at me.” (Tui Viti lifted his right hand in signal to the entering canoes; the crews raised their hands in salute, and fell dead.) When Tae-a-Tangaloa came to the passage, the people in the canoe all looked at him and he recited:</p>
          <lg type="verse">
            <l>Sua, lau putuputu lau manunu</l>
            <l>Kaho ia ka he kaho lakulu</l>
            <l>Talotalo ki le tua i manunu. Sua.</l>
            <l>Sua, sue ma tukutukua mataseua</l>
            <l>Kae mulisau ma le tokamea</l>
            <l>Tu ki tai se kava se ula ma ke</l>
            <l>Tapatapa keli ake te ika he</l>
            <l>Palaoa e fakatalau ki te taotao</l>
            <l>Amakula ko ai le ia le kava ola</l>
            <l>Koa ia le ia le kava kona ui ifo</l>
            <l>Aliki kei na ola ko au ko</l>
            <l>Tae-a-Tangaloa. Sua.</l>
          </lg>
          <p>At the end of this recitation Tui Viti died. Tae-a-Tangaloa went ashore and brought back to life all the people whom Tui Viti had killed as they arrived at his island and had hung from trees. He took a young coconut and the end of a coconut leaf and went to the place where Tui Viti had died. He fanned the old chief with the leaf and broke the young nut, pouring the juice over Tui Viti's face, and brought him back to life. Tui Viti ruled again over his island and married Te Malamafitakia<note xml:id="fn13_86" n="13"><p>The daughter of Tae-a-Tangaloa appears in the story without any reference to her origin or how she came to be in Fiji.</p></note>, the daughter of Tae-a-Tangaloa.</p>
          <pb xml:id="n94" n="87"/>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d8-d4" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">The Story of Pupunatavai</hi>
            <note xml:id="fn14_87" n="14">
              <p>Pupunatavai was said to mean “one wind”; literally, it means “a spring”. In Vaea's song it is given as <hi rend="i">punapuna te vai</hi>.</p>
            </note>
          </head>
          <p>Once there was a married couple of the same name, Pupunatavai. With them lived a spirit, Matapula, who noticed that Pupunatavai, the woman, was pregnant; and he began to count her months. At the approach of the last month, Matapula sent a message to this woman: “When you give birth to your baby, you must send it to me to eat.” When the child came, she did as Matapula had ordered and sent the baby to him; and he ate it.</p>
          <p>Some time later Matapula noticed that Pupunatavai was pregnant again, and he counted the months of pregnancy until it was about time for the child to arrive. Again he sent his servants with the message, “Pupunatavai, if you are going to have another child you must send it to me to eat.” The child was born not long after Matapula's servants had delivered the message, and Pupunatavai sent her second child to Matapula, who ate this one also. Her pregnancies continued, and each time Matapula sent his servants with the same message and each time the child was sent for Matapula to eat, as soon as it was born. This went on until Matapula had eaten nine children of Pupunatavai.</p>
          <p>When the tenth child was about to be born, Matapula sent his servants as usual to Pupunatavai with the demand for the child. But the child still in its mother's womb heard what the servants had told her and sang to her:</p>
          <lg type="verse">
            <l>Punapunatevae … e</l>
            <l>Auma ia ko te tamaliki.</l>
            <l>Ke faiai ko te kava.</l>
            <l>Fakatali mai koe.</l>
            <l>Ke fano ifo au.</l>
            <l>Punapunatevai</l>
            <l>The swelling of the child.</l>
            <l>Make the kava.</l>
            <l>You wait here,</l>
            <l>I shall come down.</l>
          </lg>
          <p>Then the child said to his mother, “Where is the place to go down?” The mother answered, “Come straightway from my foot.” But the child replied, “No, I do not wish to come from the foot because the legs always stand in the excrement of birds and in dirty things.” And he shouted, “Where is the way to come out?” Then the mother replied, “You must come out from my hand.” But the baby answered, “No, I do not wish to come out from your hand because the hand always smells of the eggs of the lice in the hair.” And again he asked loudly, “Where am I to come out?” Then his mother said, “You had best come out as all people are born, from between a woman's legs.” Then the child was born and a tall man stood before Pupunatavai.</p>
          <p>This son of Pupunatavai asked the two servants of Matapula, “Are you the two who came with Matapula's message? You know I am a strong man and can break you two into pieces in no time. I can even break your legs.” And with that he broke the legs of one servant and the jaw of the other servant and sent them away. The servant with the broken jaw ran to his master, while the other crawled. When the first arrived, Matapula asked him, “Where is the child I sent you to bring here?” The servant tried to reply, but all he could do was to make unintelligible sounds. Then the second servant arrived, dragging himself along with his hands, and he told his master all that had occurred—how the child had talked to them from his mother's womb and how, when it was born, there stood before them a giant who broke the legs of one of them and the jaw of the other.</p>
          <p>Upon hearing this, Matapula beat his log drum and summoned all his people. They assembled at his house, and the giant child came with them. Matapula stood before his people. To show them his strength he seized a great stick and brandished it over his head, but no stones moved where he stood, and the people saw that he was weak in his legs.</p>
          <p>Then Vaea, the newly born giant, took the stick from Matapula and told him to sit down. He brandished the stick and all the stones flew away. Matapula became alarmed and shouted, “No giants in the world or in the sky will come and fight with the strong man, Vaea.” Matapula's people abandoned him, and Vaea returned to his mother.</p>
          <pb xml:id="n95" n="88"/>
          <p>That evening Vaea asked his sister to go and catch some fish for him. The girl took her torch and went down to the sea where she saw a canoe approaching. The canoe contained Malokilafulu, a giant, and his brothers, Tauaputuputu, Tauatiniulu, Talofialekava, and their sister, Apakula. They came up to the reef but could not beach their canoe. Vaea's sister ran back to tell Vaea and fell weeping. Vaea said to her, “Do not cry for me or be afraid.”</p>
          <p>The giants thought that no one had seen them arrive in the dark, so they anchored their canoe and went to sleep in it. Vaea went down to the sea, picked up the anchored canoe by one finger, set it on the shore, and slept beside it. During the night one of the sleeping giants was awakened by a dream. He aroused the rest and said, “My dream is that we bailed our canoe on the shore and not on the land.” When he finished, his brothers told their dreams; each one had dreamed the same thing. Malokilafulu said, “We are still in the night, but tomorrow we shall eat the liver of Vaea.”</p>
          <p>With the rising of the sun they found that they had been taken into Vaea's house. They were very frightened and pleaded with Vaea not to kill them. Malokilafulu promised their sister, Apakula, to Vaea if he would let them live. Vaea married Apakula.</p>
          <p>After he had been married for some time, he said to the four brothers, “I want to go and look at some other islands. You wait here and live with your sister.” Then he said to his wife, “If you have a son born to us while I am away, you must give him my name; but if you have a daughter, you may name her as you wish.” Apakula lived with her brother, Malokilafulu, who was angry when she named her baby boy Vaea. He went to his brothers and told them that Apakula had a son whom she had named Vaea and that they must plan to kill him.</p>
          <p>When Malokilafulu was not with them one day, the brothers told their sister all that Malokilafulu planned against her son. When Malokilafulu returned to her house, Apakula said, “If you are angry with me and wish to kill my son, you must bring me his heart.” Malokilafulu immediately went out of the house. He prepared some fibers of coconut husk to make a sennit rope and spread them out on the ground. Then he poured water from a coconut shell over them and returned to his place in the house of the brothers. “Did Apakula's baby break my fibers?” he asked them. But their answer was that no child had come near the fibers. Then he ordered them to bring the baby to him, saying that he wished to kill it, for if he did not, the child would go to its father. The baby was brought, and while the brothers were sitting in the house, Malokilafulu beat the child to death with a club.</p>
          <p>Apakula came to the house and asked for the heart of her baby. They wrapped it in tapa and gave it to her. She carried it out and went to the reef, where she cried:</p>
          <lg type="verse">
            <l>Sihusihu launiu</l>
            <l>Mau kau fakalava</l>
            <l>Ko leo lauatau</l>
            <l>O laku tama.</l>
          </lg>
          <lg type="verse">
            <l>Kai ke ko puakina atu</l>
            <l>Takumea nei fatu manava</l>
            <l>Namaumau ete mea te alofa.</l>
          </lg>
          <p>She dived into the sea and swam to the place where Vaea had gone to live. She related to him the story of her child and gave him the heart. Vaea restored the child to life. Then Apakula told him that all her brothers loved her except Malokilafulu, who had been very cruel and angry with her. Vaea said, “We shall return to our land and fight.” So he, his wife and child, and three boys—Fakataufili, Vakataufiki, and Lae—whom he had taught to be clever in fighting and quick in running, set out for home.</p>
          <p>When they came to their land where the giant brothers were living, Apakula pointed out to Vaea the brothers who had been kind to her and then Malokilafulu. Vaea and the three boys went to the house of the giants and started to fight. Apakula hid under a rough coconut leaf on the canoe. Malokilafulu ran away from Vaea to the place where the canoe was and stood by the mat under which Apakula was hiding. She recognized her brother's legs and slashed at them with an adz. He cried out, “Apakula e lofuatini.” His sister replied, “Ko koe tena na e te pofepoa.” Then she killed him with her adz.</p>
        </div>
      </div>
      <pb xml:id="n96" n="89"/>
      <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d9" type="section">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">Nature Lore</hi>
        </head>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d9-d1" type="section">
          <p>Much of the Tokelau nature lore is based on shrewd observations of natural phenomena. Clouds traveling rapidly or fish jumping from the water (<hi rend="i">sumu, lautiapua</hi>) foretell strong winds which are dangerous for canoes. Still clouds indicate safe weather but little sailing breeze. When the sky shows small clouds “an arm's length in size” it is called <hi rend="i">te langi o atu</hi>, a bonito sky. The west wind, which brings the bonito close to the island, usually blows at this time. When the sky is red and solidly cloudy except for a few small breaks, it is called <hi rend="i">langi o teo</hi> (the sky of the <hi rend="i">teo</hi> fish). Orange reflection of the sunset in the clouds, common near the equator, is <hi rend="i">la sila fonu</hi> (the sun like a turtle's breastplate). When the south wind is chilled it is <hi rend="i">tafenga a le malu</hi> (the cooling freshet). Although this wind is refreshing it is dreaded for it is believed to bring death to some member of the population. Rain which makes the surface of the lagoon red or yellow also signifies death. A rainbow is <hi rend="i">nuanua</hi>.</p>
          <p>Violent phenomena of nature were dreaded in ancient times. Close thunder (<hi rend="i">faitilitili</hi>) and distant thunder (<hi rend="i">tangulu</hi>) were thought to come from supernatural objects rolling about on the shelf (<hi rend="i">takataka</hi>) of the sky. Thunder and lightning (<hi rend="i">uila</hi>) bring out the <hi rend="i">ufu</hi> and <hi rend="i">kone</hi> fish that live in the coral of the lagoon.</p>
          <p>An eclipse of the sun predicts some catastrophe. The sun is thought to lose its blood and become lifeless, <hi rend="i">ngase toto o te la</hi> (the sun's blood becomes like that of a sick person).</p>
          <p>A full moon setting in a clear sky is an indication of calm weather. According to Turner (32) the ancient people believed that the moon was a residence of departed chiefs and that its waning (<hi rend="i">kaina te masina</hi>, the eating of the moon) was caused by its being eaten by the inhabitants. This was cause for great consternation and feasts and ceremonies were held. The name for an eclipse of the moon, which brings the <hi rend="i">atu</hi> and <hi rend="i">malau</hi> to the surface of the sea, suggests that this was explained in the same way as the waning moon.</p>
          <p>Stars and constellations were used as guides in navigating among the islands and on voyages to Samoa. The following stars are remembered at Atafu as part of the old voyaging captains' lore of navigation.</p>
          <p>
            <table rows="19" cols="2">
              <head>List of Stars used in Navigation</head>
              <row>
                <cell>Fetu ao or Kui salimona</cell>
                <cell>The Morning Star, which gives a bearing on the east. The origin of the name, Kui Salimona, could not be explained and its does not appear to be a true Polynesian word.</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>Famau malanga</cell>
                <cell>The Evening Star, which gives a bearing on the west. <hi rend="i">Famau</hi> is an ancient Tokelau name whose meaning has been lost; <hi rend="i">malanga</hi> means “a journey”.</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>Kaniva</cell>
                <cell>The Milky Way, which gives general bearings.</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>Na tangata</cell>
                <cell>These two stars are guides for voyages from Tokelau to Samoa.</cell>
              </row>
              <pb xml:id="n97" n="90"/>
              <row>
                <cell>Tolu</cell>
                <cell>The three stars in the Belt of Orion. In their zenith these are a direct guide from Nukunono to Atafu.</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>Matiti</cell>
                <cell>Stars said to be guides in voyages to Hawaii.</cell>
              </row>
            </table>
          </p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d9-d2" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Winds</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The winds are counted and named in 12 points of the compass. Burrows (5) and Lister (14) collected lists of these names in Fakaofu and I collected one at Atafu. The names in these three lists are identical except for the omission of Luata and Tefa by Lister, but their order and arrangement in quarters is different. Burrows' list is probably the correct one. Tefa should undoubtedly precede Sema in the Atafu list. Atafu has two local names which are synonymous with names in the list: tafenga a le malu (a south-southwesterly wind) and taumuliava (west wind or wind which comes from behind the passage in the reef; at Atafu this is on the west side of the village). The lists are arranged in table 5 for comparative study.</p>
          <p>
            <table rows="13" cols="3">
              <head>Table 5. Wind Names</head>
              <row>
                <cell role="label" rend="center">
                  <hi rend="sc">Atafu List</hi>
                </cell>
                <cell role="label" rend="center">
                  <hi rend="sc">Burrows' List</hi>
                </cell>
                <cell role="label" rend="center">
                  <hi rend="sc">Lister's List</hi>
                </cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>N. Tokelau</cell>
                <cell>N. Tokelau</cell>
                <cell>N. Tokelau</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>  Fakalua</cell>
                <cell>  Fakalua</cell>
                <cell>  Pakalua</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>  Luatu</cell>
                <cell>  Luatu</cell>
                <cell/>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>E. Tonga</cell>
                <cell>E. Tonga</cell>
                <cell>E. Tonga</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>  Sulu</cell>
                <cell>  Sulu</cell>
                <cell>  Sulu</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>  Sema</cell>
                <cell>  Tefa</cell>
                <cell/>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>S. Tefa</cell>
                <cell>S. Sema</cell>
                <cell>S. Sema</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>  Lafalafa</cell>
                <cell>  Lafalafa</cell>
                <cell>  Lafalafa</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>W. Laki</cell>
                <cell>  Lakalua</cell>
                <cell>  Lakilua</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>  Lakilua</cell>
                <cell>W. Laki</cell>
                <cell>  Fakatiu</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>  Fakatiu</cell>
                <cell>  Fakatiu</cell>
                <cell>W. Laki</cell>
              </row>
              <row>
                <cell>  Palapu</cell>
                <cell>  Palapu</cell>
                <cell>  Palapu</cell>
              </row>
            </table>
          </p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d9-d3" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Calendar</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The Tokelau year is divided into 12 lunar periods, thus omitting one moon for which no system of intercalation is provided. My informant at Atafu stated that the first month of the year (<hi rend="i">tausanga</hi>) was December. Burrows' (5) informant said that January was the first month, an attempt to adjust the native calendar to the European. But if the year begins in December or January the succession of months does not coincide with the sequence of winds, stars, and fish habits described for each month. However, if the year begins in June as in the calendar given to Lister (14) at Fakaofu in 1889 the natural phenomena described coincide with their actual occurrence in the equatorial year. In Samoa the ancient calendar began in June. At Vaitupu in the Ellice Islands the calendar year was divided into two seasons,
<pb xml:id="n98" n="91"/>
one of the westerly winds beginning in November-December and the other of the trade winds beginning in June. The Tokelau calendar may have been similarly divided.</p>
          <list>
            <head>Table 6. Lunar Calendar given at Atafu</head>
            <item>Palolo mua, June-July.
<list><item>Beginning of the trade wind season, blowing strongly from the southeast. Little fish, <hi rend="i">kalo, talatala, malili</hi>, and <hi rend="i">lupo</hi>, appear in the lagoon. Large fish, bonito and turtles, are plentiful. Many birds from the west and northwest. The stars Melemele and Langafu rise.</item></list></item>
            <item>Palolo muli, July-August.
<list><item>Continuation of the weather of <hi rend="i">palolo mua</hi>. Land grubs and fish are plentiful. Stars Melemele and Langafu show.</item></list></item>
            <item>Mulifa, August-September.
<list><item>Strong winds and big waves. <hi rend="i">Mulifa</hi> = “four sides” or “the winds shift and blow from the four directions.” Star Matiti shows.</item></list></item>
            <item>Takaonga, September-October.
<list><item>Sea turtles appear off the island for mating season. Takaonga is derived from <hi rend="i">taka ika onga</hi> (to go around to mate). Star Nataki shows.</item></list></item>
            <item>Silinga, October-November.
<list><item>The trade winds cease, intermittent winds from northeast. <hi rend="i">Ngatala</hi> and <hi rend="i">fapuku</hi> fish go out to sea to lay their eggs. The Pleiades (Mataliki, the little eyes) appear in the east.</item></list></item>
            <item>Toe silinga, November-December.
<list><item>A continuation of the weather of <hi rend="i">silinga. Toe</hi> means again.</item></list></item>
            <item>Utua mua, December-January.
<list><item>The hottest months of the year and most feared for tempestuous storms. The <hi rend="i">fapuku</hi> fish, large at this time, go to the shoals. <hi rend="i">Utua</hi> means shoals.</item></list></item>
            <item>Toe Utua, January-February.
<list><item>A continuation of the weather of <hi rend="i">utua mua</hi>. Stars tolu (Orion's belt), Lefulefu, and Tulalupe show.</item></list></item>
            <item>Vainoa, February-March.
<list><item>The name means “troubled waters”. Great shoals of <hi rend="i">pone</hi> and <hi rend="i">ufu</hi> fish appear in the lagoon and inside the reef. Star Lua tangata (two men) shows.</item></list></item>
            <item>Fakaafu, March-April.
<list><item>The hot month when everything fades. Meamanga manga (4 stars in form of Y), sumu (name of fish), Manu (southern cross), and Na tangata (two stars) rise. Manu and Na Tangata show every night.</item></list></item>
            <item>Kaunonu, April-May.
<list><item>The name is given as kaununu or kaunuunu in other islands. Changing and shifting winds, mostly from the east. Manu appears every night.</item></list></item>
            <item>Oloamanu, May-June.
<list><item>The name means “the flying about of birds”. Beginning of the trade wind season. Birds fly low and near the land because the winds are becoming strong.</item></list></item>
          </list>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d9-d4" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Nights in the Phases of the Moon</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The lunar month is divided into the nightly phases of the moon which are all named and counted in two series of tens, the first ten nights of the waxing of the moon and the last ten nights of the waning and dying of the moon. With the eleventh and twelfth nights a second counting begins, but the thirteenth and fourteenth are named utua, the night when the moon is “drawn up”, and malama, the night of the full moon. After the full moon
<pb xml:id="n99" n="92"/>
there is a period of growing and the counting recommences with the fifteenth night with one and ends on the twentieth night, fakatutupu (the plural of the verb, “to change into” or “to cause to grow”). The twenty-first night is counted as 10 and the counting diminishes to the fifth night, before the moon disappears or becomes completely dead. The last four nights of the lunar month are called: “the night when the moon's head has perished in the shadow,” “the night when the moon's heart has perished in the shadow,” “the night when the moon dies above the horizon,” and “the night of long death” when the moon is completely lost for a whole night.</p>
          <p>The last night of the month, the moon and sun travel together (fanoloa). The first two days of the month are celebrated with feasting and a general holiday.</p>
          <list>
            <head>List of Nights of the Moon</head>
            <label>1.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fakatasi</p>
            </item>
            <label>2.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fakalua</p>
            </item>
            <label>3.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fakatolu</p>
            </item>
            <label>4.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fakafa</p>
            </item>
            <label>5.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fakalima</p>
            </item>
            <label>6.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fakaono</p>
            </item>
            <label>7.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fakafitu</p>
            </item>
            <label>8.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fakavalu</p>
            </item>
            <label>9.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fakaiva</p>
            </item>
            <label>10.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Mangafulu</p>
            </item>
            <label>11.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fakatasi</p>
            </item>
            <label>12.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fakalua</p>
            </item>
            <label>13.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Utua</p>
            </item>
            <label>14.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Malama</p>
            </item>
            <label>15.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fakatasi</p>
            </item>
            <label>16.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fakalua</p>
            </item>
            <label>17.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fakatolu</p>
            </item>
            <label>18.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fakafa</p>
            </item>
            <label>19.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fakalima</p>
            </item>
            <label>20.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fakatutupu</p>
            </item>
            <label>21.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Mangafulu</p>
            </item>
            <label>22.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Po hiva</p>
            </item>
            <label>23.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Po valu</p>
            </item>
            <label>24.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Po fitu</p>
            </item>
            <label>25.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Po ono</p>
            </item>
            <label>26.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Po lima</p>
            </item>
            <label>27.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fanouluata</p>
            </item>
            <label>28.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fanolotoata</p>
            </item>
            <label>29.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Mate ki lunga</p>
            </item>
            <label>30.</label>
            <item>
              <p>Fanoloa</p>
            </item>
          </list>
        </div>
      </div>
      <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10" type="section">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">Material Culture</hi>
        </head>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Fishing</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d1" type="section">
            <p>The lack of fertile soil in the Tokelau atolls forces the inhabitants to depend on the sea for sufficient nourishment. The life of the men centers around fishing and canoes and the religion is permeated with gods of the sea, who must be continually propitiated to insure good fortune in fishing quests. Unfortunately few of the religious observances, prayers, and tapus have been remembered since the complete destruction of the former religion, but their significance at one time may be inferred from the memory of old rites and from the fishermen's lore concerning the proper technique and behavior.</p>
            <p>Fish are abundant near Tokelau. Schools of large fish are attracted to feed at these isolated reefs, and the broad lagoons are filled with varieties of smaller fish. The population is so small that there is no danger of “fishing out” the holes and banks as in thickly populated islands like the Hawaiian group.</p>
            <p>Fishing is the prerogative of men and they have become expert fishermen due to a lifetime spent on the water and the great accumulation of
<pb xml:id="n100" n="93"/>
fishing lore handed down through the generations. The men fish all day and there is always someone on shore watching for shoals of small fish. Though there are many methods of fishing, the principal ones are seine fishing and angling. Much of the seine fishing and net casting is carried on in the lagoon by individuals for the reefs are not broad enough for large communal fishing expeditions. Some angling is done in the lagoon by solitary fishermen in canoes, but most of this is done from the edge of the reef with pole and line or from canoes over the deep banks where the castor oil fish and similar species live. The greatest sport of the fishermen is the pursuit of the schools of bonito when they feed at the surface in the early mornings. When the bonito are running, every man devotes all his energy to this type of fishing.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Groping and Probing</hi>
            </head>
            <p>It is the women's work to search the reefs for fish and edible crustaceans left in pools at low tide. They gather little fish, sea eggs, and crabs by hand and drop them into coconut-leaf baskets slung by a cord over their shoulders. They carry small sticks with which to probe the quarry out of holes.</p>
            <p>To catch squid (<hi rend="i">feke</hi>) they thrust a stick (<hi rend="i">ngangie fou feke</hi>) into the squid, twirl it about to irritate the squid, and slowly withdraw it. The squid reaches out to secure its antagonist, and the fisherwoman drags it out of its hole. While enticing the squid she sings a little song.</p>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>Feke tu ake aua ia pusi ma</l>
              <l>Mango o ka kati ki te pito.</l>
            </lg>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>Squid, stand up because the eel</l>
              <l>And the shark will bite at your head.</l>
            </lg>
            <p>Intermittently the singer makes a sucking sound (<hi rend="i">misi</hi>) through her pursed lips, a noise commonly used to attract another's attention and particularly to call children to the house. She kills the squid by pushing the head into the body and turning it inside out.</p>
            <p>Men, women, and children swim under water about the coral heads of the lagoon, catching in their hands the small bright-colored fish that live in the deep recesses.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d3" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Lures</hi>
            </head>
            <p>A man fishes for squid from a canoe. He drops a lure, which is attached to the end of a stick 3 or 4 feet long, over a hole and sings to entice the squid out.</p>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>Tuolo mai feke te pilipili kavei valu e tuolo,</l>
              <l>Mai tuolo mai.</l>
              <l>Ko nohonoho i lo kaoa</l>
              <l>Fakalongona ake pule kua, hoa, hoa, hoa.</l>
            </lg>
            <lg type="verse">
              <l>Crawl out, little squid, with eight legs,</l>
              <l>Crawl out, crawl out.</l>
              <l>You stay in your hole</l>
              <l>When you hear the sound, hoa, hoa, hoa, of the crab, crawling.</l>
            </lg>
            <pb xml:id="n101" n="94"/>
            <p>When the squid reaches for the lure, the fisherman draws it up slowly until the squid seizes it. Then he jerks it into the canoe and turns the squid inside out or bites out its eyes to render it helpless.</p>
            <p>Squid lures (<hi rend="i">pule taki feke</hi>) are made of shell (<hi rend="i">Cypraea tigris</hi>) and strips of leaf to represent crabs. They resemble the “rat” lures of Samoa (28, p. 434) and are derived from a now forgotten legend of a crab and a squid.</p>
            <p>The lure is composed of a brown spotted shell lashed over the lower section of a second shell. A piece of sennit knotted at the end runs from the top surface of the upper shell through a hole above the distal end of the mouth, makes a half hitch around the middle of the under shell section and comes up through a hole at the proximal end of the upper shell, where it is knotted. The lure is dangled by the extension of this lashing. A stick 6 to 8 feet long is lashed longitudinally beneath the under shell with a piece of sennit secured at the ends by encircling the rim of the upper shell. Strips of coconut leaf are wrapped around the stick and secured by the end of the lashing that holds the stick. Strips of leaf are also wrapped around the lashing on the sides of the upper shell, the projecting leaf ends resembling legs. The upper shell is partly filled with small pebbles which rattle when the lure is jerked about imitating the “hoa, hoa” sound made by the <hi rend="i">ula</hi> crab when it is crawling along the bottom.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d4" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Fish Traps</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Fishing traps are not in common use in Tokelau. None were seen at Atafu, and only a few of one type at Fakaofu and Nukunono. This type (<ref target="#MacTokeP001a">pl. 1, <hi rend="i">A</hi></ref>) is made of twigs bent in an inverted <hi rend="i">U</hi> and lashed to a flooring of twigs laid lengthwise over three stout cross-pieces. The bent twigs form a hood over each end of the trap projecting from the entrance. Each end wall is made of vertical twigs held rigid by four cross-pieces. A circular opening is left in the middle of each end. A conical passageway of pointed sticks with the broad end at the opening projects into the trap. The pointed ends of the sticks prevent the fish from leaving the trap.</p>
            <p>A circular fish trap with an entrance in the top was used in the past. It was made of stems of a vine and is identical with the Samoan trap illustrated by Hiroa (28, pl. XLII, <hi rend="i">C</hi>).</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d5" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Spear</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The fishing spear is seldom used at Atafu. The present weapons have single or multiple barbs, and iron points, fashioned from iron rods with a file, lashed to the end of a wooden shaft. The exact appearance of the ancient fishing spear (<hi rend="i">kalolo</hi>) could not be exactly ascertained.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d6" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Bow and Arrow</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Formerly the bow and arrow (<hi rend="i">tika</hi>) were used along the reef for shooting fish. However, it was more a pastime of young boys than an established pursuit of procuring fish by the men.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n102" n="95"/>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d7" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Nets</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d7-d1" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Scoop Nets</hi>
              </head>
              <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d7-d1-d1" type="section">
                <p>Small fish are caught both in the shallow water of the lagoon and in the deep sea with scoop nets (<ref target="#MacTokeP001a">pl. 1, <hi rend="i">B</hi></ref>). These are made in different sizes ranging from small nets held in one hand to large scoop nets worked by 5 or 6 men.</p>
                <p>The scoop net consists of a rectangular net with one end folded and closed to form a pocket. The sides of the net are lashed with a cord to handles which cross at the closed end and diverge at the open end to spread the net in a triangle. The fore ends of the handle are flush with the edge of the net; the crossed ends project behind and are used as handles in the small nets. The fore edge of the large nets is weighted with shells to hold it to the bottom when the net is open. The netting of the small scoop is made of <hi rend="i">fau</hi> or sennit in a close mesh like the small Samoan scoop (28, pl. XLII, <hi rend="i">A</hi>). Nets of the large scoops are made of <hi rend="i">fau</hi> in an open mesh, like the Samoan large scoop nets (28, pp. 470–472).</p>
                <p>The small scoop nets (<hi rend="i">kalele</hi>) are placed at ends of little channels between the lagoon and the outer reef through which fish travel at low tide, from pool to pool. The fisherman holds the small scoop at the crossing of the frame and sets the two outer ends against the bottom on either side of the channel. By tossing small stones into the pool above the channel he startles the fish, which dart down the channel and into the net. The fisherman closes his net by holding his thumb over the fulcrum of the crossed sticks and squeezing them together with his fingers. As he closes it, he scoops it out of the water and drops the fish into a deep basket.</p>
                <p>Large scoop nets are worked on the same principle in larger passages of water. One or two men hold the net while several others form a semicircle some distance from the net and drive the fish into the passage leading to the scoop.</p>
              </div>
              <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d7-d1-d2" type="section">
                <head>Large <hi rend="i">O</hi> Scoop Net</head>
                <p>At Atafu a large scoop net made of sennit cord (<ref target="#MacTokeP001a">pl. 1, <hi rend="i">C</hi></ref>) is used for catching <hi rend="i">o</hi>, a tiny fish on which the bonito feed. The scoop (<hi rend="i">kupenga ta o</hi>) is a broad bag narrowed to form a pocket in the bottom of the net. One end is left open; the closed end is seamless. The open end and sides are edged by a heavy sennit rope under which the lashing to the frame is passed. A loop of this rope is left at each end of the sides, and the poles are run through them. Two heavy ropes are seized to the middle of the open end. When the net is filled they are pulled up and wrapped around the frame so that the fish will slide into the pocket of the net.</p>
                <p>When the shoals of <hi rend="i">o</hi> move toward the reef of the island, the bonito fishermen in their canoes wave their paddles as a signal to the people on shore. Then the men and boys run from every part of the village to help
<pb xml:id="n103" n="96"/>
take down the large <hi rend="i">o</hi> scoop net from the beams of the meeting house where it is kept. Directed by one of the canoes following the course of the shoal, they carry the net across the reef and give it to the men in a canoe, who carry it out to sea and float it in the course of the shoal. Swimmers form two lines diverging from the net and, as the fish approach, plunge the far end of the net under water. Upon the signal of a leader who constantly watches the approach of the fish, the lines close in, driving the thousands of tiny fish to the net. The swimmers close the two poles of the frame together and pull up the two heavy ropes to close the fore end. The canoe comes alongside and the crew throws the catch from the net into the hull. Meanwhile the swimmers circle about the school of fish, trying to halt its progress. The fish come in such numbers that it is often possible to fill three or four canoes with them before the shoal has passed. The catch is always brought to the <hi rend="i">malae</hi> and divided among the entire population.</p>
              </div>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d7-d2" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Dip Nets</hi>
              </head>
              <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d7-d2-d1" type="section">
                <head>Small <hi rend="i">O</hi> Dip Net</head>
                <p>A dip net of fine mesh on a handle 5 or 6 feet long (<ref target="#MacTokeP002a">pl. 2, <hi rend="i">B</hi></ref>) is used for scooping the small <hi rend="i">o</hi> fish from the surface and for scooping other small fish from shallow water.</p>
                <p>The frame of the net is made of two arms 3 feet long which diverge from the handle 14 inches above the end in a V-shape. They are held rigid by being lashed to a crossbar 1 foot long, under which they pass. The crossbar is lashed with sennit cord in figure-of-eight turns across the lower end of the stout handle. A <hi rend="i">fau</hi> net of very close mesh shaped in a truncated triangle is stretched between the arms of the frame. A sennit cord is threaded through the marginal meshes on three sides and passed along the open end of the net. It is twined three times around the end of each arm, secured with a half hitch, and brought up the sides, making several turns around the arms and at the corners of the narrower end. It is then lashed about the crossbar and arms to prevent the net from sliding off the frame.</p>
              </div>
              <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d7-d2-d2" type="section">
                <head>Flying-Fish Nets and Fishing</head>
                <p>Long-handled dip nets are used to catch flying fish, abundant off the reef at night.</p>
                <p>The net is made of twisted <hi rend="i">fau</hi> bark knotted in 1.5 inch mesh. The frame is oval, made by lashing together the butts and tips of two peeled <hi rend="i">ngangie</hi>. The greatest diameter of the frame is near the supple tips at the outer edge. A crossbar about 12 inches long is lashed across the frame 10 inches from the butt end, flush with the end of the handle. The handle, 6 or 8 feet long, is lashed over the butt ends of the frame and under the crossbar. The net is tied to the crossbar at the ends and laced to the frame on the sides by a cord running through the marginal meshes and around the frame arms.</p>
                <p>The usual time for catching flying fish is between dusk and moonrise or between the setting of the young moon and sunrise. The canoes set out at
<pb xml:id="n104" n="97"/>
sunset but wait along the reef on the lee side of the island for full darkness. Then a pair of canoes starts out. The bow paddler in each stands with the dip net, and the second paddler stands with a torch, made of dead coconut leaves and lighted with a smouldering piece of coconut husk. The canoes travel abreast and about 20 yards apart. When they have gone between a fourth and a half mile, a second pair light their torches and start out along the same course. The fish rush to the light, and skim the surface blindly around the canoes, frequently striking against the hulls. As a fish flies or swims into the net, the fisherman gives a quick turn to the handle with his wrist, catching the fish in the loose bag and taking up any rebound from the impact. With a second snap of his wrists he carries the net behind him and flicks the fish into the narrow hull of the canoe. The crews shout directions and cheer excitedly. The canoes travel along the reef until all the torches are expended. Then guided by lights of the village fires or the first glow of the rising moon, the canoes return to the passage in the reef, over which they plunge on a high coasting wave to the beach.</p>
              </div>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d7-d3" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Seines</hi>
              </head>
              <p>Seines (<hi rend="i">talitali</hi>) with wooden block floats and shell sinkers (<ref target="#MacTokeP002a">pl. 2, <hi rend="i">C</hi></ref>) are more commonly used than any other nets. They are used for casting, as barriers across a channel or inlet, and as traps in a fishing weir. They are made in various lengths; the shorter ones are used for seining and casting, the larger ones, usually 5 feet deep, for big fish drives.</p>
              <p>In casting the net is folded evenly in the right hand with the upper edge partly turned down and its ends tied together. It is swung back and forth three or four times, gaining momentum from the hanging shell sinkers. It is heaved, as in discus throwing, with a motion that swings the whole body and extends the arm. A twist of the hand and arm at the finish of the throw swings out the sinkers and drops the net in a circle about the shoal of fish.</p>
              <p>The boys and younger men of a family often fish with a seine on the reef when the tide is at the proper depth. They set up their net across a small inlet with the lower edge lying closely against the sea bottom. One person stands at each end of the net. The others form a line at the opposite end of the inlet and, by shouting and splashing the water with sticks or their arms, drive the fish toward the net. The men at the net force the fish to the middle of the net. The others dive to catch with their hands the fish not enmeshed. The net is brought up and emptied, and the party moves on to another channel.</p>
              <p>Seines are also placed around the coral heads or piles of large pieces of coral built in shallow water. Small fish enter the crevices to feed or hide; these are searched and the fish there driven into the net.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n105" n="98"/>
              <p>V-shaped weirs for fish drives are built of coral blocks in certain broad shallow parts of the lagoons where the water is seldom disturbed. These are found particularly on the south side of Atafu where the reef scarcely rises above the water line. At low tide when the tops of the walls are above water, a fishing party assembles above the opening of the V, some of the party forming a great semicircle and the rest forming two lines that continue the walls of the weir. The semicircle slowly closes in, driving the fish into the weir by shouting and splashing the water and probing the hiding places in the coral. A winged net with a deep purse or sack in the middle of it is set at the fork or point of the weir. Two men stand beside the mouth of the net and signal when the driving must go more slowly. When the purse is filled, the man at its mouth closes the net by tugging on the cord which runs around the mouth of the purse and signals the drivers to stop. The fork is blocked with a small net while the long purse is emptied into a canoe and reset. The drivers move closer and closer until they reach the ends of the weir and all the fish are hemmed within.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d7-d4" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Rites</hi>
              </head>
              <p>In olden days a net was not used without the proper invocation to the gods to bring good fortune to the fisherman. When a new net was completed, the maker invited another fisherman of the village to take it and fish with it. This was the rite of dipping the net and making the first catch. When the fisherman returned, the owner gave a feast (<hi rend="i">te auata</hi>) for all the fishermen of the village. The net was tapu until these initiatory rites had been performed and the feast given. A net not properly recognized would bring misfortune and ridicule to its owner.</p>
            </div>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d8" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Noose Fishing</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Four large fish in the Tokelau waters are snared from canoes by noosed ropes into which they are led by baits. Kingfish (<hi rend="i">pala</hi>), a large <hi rend="i">aseu (ulua)</hi>, a large variety of tuna (<hi rend="i">takuo</hi>), and sharks are so caught. The method of snaring is the same for all except sharks (p. <ref target="#n106">99</ref>).</p>
            <p>The crew paddle up and down the fishing banks to troll. The fishing captain stands facing aft and trails a bonito head attached to a light line behind the canoe. He watches for the rising of a fish to the surface, and as soon as the water breaks behind the bait he jerks the bait ahead to lead the fish to the canoe and orders the man who sits before him (<hi rend="i">te liu</hi>) to throw out bits of the prepared chopped fish bait and to hold ready the noosed rope. He quickly draws in the bait line and takes the rope from the <hi rend="i">liu</hi>. This rope has a small stiffly-seized loop at the end through which the line is doubled to make a running noose and twisted three or four times over the end of the short stick by which it is suspended over the water. As the <hi rend="i">liu</hi> continues
<pb xml:id="n106" n="99"/>
to toss out bits of the ground bait, the fishing captain lowers the line into the water so that the noose stands vertically, withdraws the stick and lets the noose drift beside the canoe. The canoe moves slowly ahead as the fish is led closer and closer with the deftly distributed bait. The <hi rend="i">liu</hi> drops a handful of bait under the water ahead of the noose. The fish, excited with the increasing amount of bait and unwary, moves forward for this food and enters the loop. At the moment the dorsal fin passes under the noose the fishing captain heaves backward with all possible effort and speed to pull the noose about the base of the broad tail of the fish. The <hi rend="i">liu</hi> seizes the rope also to prevent the fish from struggling away from the side of the canoe, where it can be clubbed with a short, stout killing stick (<hi rend="i">te siki</hi>), always carried on fishing expeditions to dispatch any large fish whose thrashing makes it too dangerous to be taken into the canoe alive.</p>
            <p>Sharks are caught with hooks, but snaring with a noose along the edge of the reef is a more popular method because it demands more activity and skill of the crew and captain (<hi rend="i">tautai</hi>). The bait consists of the pounded flesh of two or three white eels of the unedible variety (<hi rend="i">pusi tea</hi>). When these are tied at the stern and dragged in the water, small particles wash off and leave a tempting trail in the wake of the canoe. As soon as the <hi rend="i">tautai</hi> sees the pointed dorsal fin of a pursuing shark, he calls to his crew to slacken their pace and drops his running noose, loosely turned about the end of the stick, just behind the eels. As the shark strikes at the eels, the fishing captain snaps the noose snug behind the dorsal fin with a sudden and tremendous jerk. He and the <hi rend="i">liu</hi> pull together and snare the shark around the tapering juncture of its body and tail. As soon as they can draw it alongside, they kill it with the club. If the shark is too large and powerful and cannot be drawn in without endangering the crew and upsetting the canoe, the line is slacked and quickly slipped over the shark's tail before it is carried away.</p>
            <p>The Tokelau natives differ from the Samoans in this method of catching sharks, but use the same technique in snaring sharks alongside the canoe and in catching kingfish and <hi rend="i">ulua</hi>. They have recently copied the Samoan shark rattle, made of halves of coconut shells strung on a stick and tied in a ring. The rattle is shaken violently under water causing a commotion which attracts the sharks (28, p. 432).</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d9" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Turtle Fishing</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Many turtles are caught off the sandy shores of the atolls during the mating period and the season when the females come ashore to lay their eggs. They are sometimes caught with a noose held alongside a canoe, but most commonly by swimmers catching them by hand.</p>
            <p>When anyone sees the black back of a turtle, he shouts “Fonu! Fonu!” (Turtle! Turtle!). The men of the village run to the reef below the point
<pb xml:id="n107" n="100"/>
where the turtles lie offshore, dive into the sea, and swim to the turtles from the side. Two men swim ahead and submerge before alarming the turtles. Coming up from underneath, one man puts his arms under the fore flippers of the female while the other swimmer climbs quickly over the back of the male and hooks his arms under its fore flippers in a “full nelson” grip. As soon as there is the slightest disturbance of the water about the turtles, the remaining men swim quickly to assist the first two in holding the turtles vertical so that the fore flippers are out of the water.</p>
            <p>Two men attack a single turtle from beneath, one on each side lifting a fore flipper. A single turtle is always caught if two men can reach it before it sounds, but often one of a pair escapes a single man before his companions can close in to assist.</p>
            <p>The men float the turtle to the reef in a vertical position, and carry or drag it to the beach by the flippers. Four young men carry it on their shoulders to the <hi rend="i">malae</hi> in the village for a ceremonial division. The turtle is first put on view and later cut up by a specially appointed man who divides the meat, blood, and immature eggs among the people of the village. The man who first sees the turtle at sea is the rightful owner and may claim a share of the better portion of the meat. Formerly the head was tapu and was given, on Fakaofu, to the head chief, a custom almost universal in Polynesia.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d10" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Angling</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d10-d1" type="section">
              <p>Tokelau fishhooks are of two types: a hook with the point projecting toward the shank, used with bait in line fishing; and a hook with the point projecting upward or outward without a barb, used in trolling with line and pole. The first type belongs to a class of hooks whose principle of construction and use is unique in the Pacific. These hooks are either a single piece or are composite. The parts are shank, bend or fork, point leg, and point, which, in the composite hooks, is formed of a small forked branch having a point and point pin. The shank has either an angular projection or a knob to keep the lashing of the snood from slipping.</p>
              <p>The method of securing the fish is more complex than with the simple European barbed hook. The weight of the bait lashed on the point leg holds the shaft at an angle to the line. The fish strikes down the hook toward the bend (fork of the point and point leg), taking the point into his mouth through the clearance between the point and shank with the point directed outward. When the fish closes his jaws on the bait, the tip of the point penetrates the lining of his mouth or throat. The upward pull on the line, given by the fisherman as he feels the fish take his hook, tilts up the point leg which follows through the penetration made by the point and slides the fish down to the bend or fork of the hook. The downward and inward
<pb xml:id="n108" n="101"/>
projection of the point now acts as a barb to prevent the fish from freeing itself (<ref target="#MacToke101a">fig. 8, <hi rend="i">c</hi></ref>).</p>
              <p>The second type of hook is the widely distributed trolling hook composed of a turtle-shell or bone point lashed to a pearl-shell shank (<ref target="#MacToke101a">fig. 8, <hi rend="i">b</hi></ref>). It is trolled by a long rod and line from the reef or a canoe. The shank attracts the fish to the surface, where they are hooked and quickly lifted out of the water. There is no inward projection or barb on the point in this type of hook, for the fish is quickly taken from the surface before it has opportunity to free itself. The straight point is absolutely essential in bonito fishing where the hook must be quickly freed and trolled again.</p>
              <p>
                <figure xml:id="MacToke101a">
                  <graphic url="MacToke101a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke101a-g"/>
                  <head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 8.—Fishhooks, <hi rend="i">a</hi>, one-piece turtle-shell hook (<hi rend="i">matau sumi</hi>): 1, shank, 7/16 inch long; 2, point leg, ¾ inch long; 3, point, ¼ inch long; 4, shank-lashing projection. <hi rend="i">b</hi>, trolling hook: 1, shank; 2, point; 3, tip of point; 4, bend; 5, point base; 6, hackles; 7, snood; 8, lashings. <hi rend="i">c</hi>, Pacific type of hook: 1, shank; 2, bend; 3, point leg; 4, point; 5, shank-lashing projection.</head>
                </figure>
              </p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d10-d2" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">One-Piece Hooks</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The smallest hook (<hi rend="i">matau sumu</hi>) is used with line and pole for catching <hi rend="i">sumu</hi> off the reef. The hook is made of turtle or coconut shell. It varies from the common Pacific type in having a short shank one half the length of the point leg, a wide angle between these two, and an extremely wide clearance between point and shank. The hook collected (<ref target="#MacToke101a">fig. 8, <hi rend="i">a</hi></ref>) does not function on the principle of the Pacific type of bent point hook, for the pull of the line on the shank set at such a wide angle to the longer point leg does not slide the fish into the fork between the point leg and shank. The small <hi rend="i">sumu</hi> is hooked in the fork between the point and point leg and quickly jerked out of the water.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n109" n="102"/>
              <p>Larger single-piece hooks of the bent point type with narrower angle between shank and point leg and with small clearance between point and shank are made from the strong, lower halves of the hard shells of fully ripened coconuts. The bend, which receives the greatest amount of strain in the hook, is formed from the thick base; and the shank and point from the side of the shell. The point projects inward and downward at an angle of 35 to 40 degrees, a distinguishing characteristic of Tokelau hooks, for the hooks of this type from neighboring islands have wider angles. The shank tapers toward the upper end and is slightly shorter than the point leg (<ref target="#MacToke102a">fig. 9, <hi rend="i">a, d</hi></ref>). The end of the looped snood is placed along the inner edge of the shank and lashed above and below the lashing knob.</p>
              <p>
                <figure xml:id="MacToke102a">
                  <graphic url="MacToke102a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke102a-g"/>
                  <head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 9.—One-piece coconut-shell hooks. <hi rend="i">a</hi>, hook with shank end below tip of point, and slight clearance; <hi rend="i">b</hi>, typical hook with straight, angular point. <hi rend="i">c</hi>, hook with curved point leg; <hi rend="i">d</hi>, hook with short shank, possibly remade from the stub of a broken shank, and wide clearance. 1, Shank; 2, bend; 3, point leg; 4, point; 5, shank-lashing projection; 6, looped snood; 7, lashing of snood to shank. Measurements in inches inside and outside (respectively) are: hook <hi rend="i">a</hi>, shank 1¼ and 1½, point leg 1¾ and 2, point 5/16 and 11/16, maximum width ¾ and 1⅛, clearance 3/16; hook <hi rend="i">b</hi>, shank 1¾ and 2¼, point leg 1¾ and 2⅜, point ¾ and 15/16, maximum width 15/16 and 1⅜, clearance ¼; hook <hi rend="i">c</hi>, shank 2⅜ and 2 15/16, point leg 1¾ and 3, point 1 and 1⅜, maximum width 1½ and 2⅛, clearance 7/16; hook <hi rend="i">d</hi>, shank 1 and 1 9/16, point leg 2 and 2 13/16, point ¾ and 1⅛, maximum width 1½ and 1 13/16, clearance 1 11/16.</head>
                </figure>
              </p>
              <p>The hooks described above were the only ones seen that were made of native materials, except for a wooden <hi rend="i">Ruvettus</hi> hook. Most present-day hooks are made from iron rods but the ancient forms have been retained in the iron hooks and are thought superior to European hooks sold by the trading schooners. Four iron hooks retaining the shape of native hooks are shown in figure 10. One hook (<ref target="#MacToke103a">fig. 10, <hi rend="i">a</hi></ref>) for catching <hi rend="i">malau</hi> has a double shank lashing now made by notching the projection at the end of the shank. It is more usual to bend over the end of the shank to form a small loop for attaching the snood (<ref target="#MacToke103a">fig. 10, <hi rend="i">e</hi></ref>).</p>
              <pb xml:id="n110" n="103"/>
              <p>The largest one-piece hook (<ref target="#MacToke103a">fig. 10, <hi rend="i">b</hi></ref>) seen at Atafu was used for catching <hi rend="i">fapuku</hi>, formerly a sacred fish. In olden days this hook was made of two forked branches, like the <hi rend="i">Ruvettus</hi> hook or the small wooden hooks used by the Tahitians to catch <hi rend="i">Epinephelus</hi> sp. (<hi rend="i">hapu'u</hi>; Tokelau, <hi rend="i">fapuku</hi>) (21). The shank has a lashing knob at the tip. The snood is looped and lashed below the knob and seized by the lashing thread. One end of the loop is divided from the snood and continued as a long sinker line. A short line is lashed to the point leg for binding on the bait. Other iron hooks (<ref target="#MacToke103a">fig. 10, <hi rend="i">c, d</hi></ref>) are made in the form of the ring-shaped hooks of bone and shell used in olden times. The points project characteristically downward as in the angular hooks. The end of the shank is doubled over, and a wire snood is looped through.</p>
              <p>
                <figure xml:id="MacToke103a">
                  <graphic url="MacToke103a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke103a-g"/>
                  <head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 10.—One-piece iron hooks. <hi rend="i">a, matau malau</hi>: 1, slightly curved shank with (5) notched lashing projection; 2, bend; 3, rounded point leg; 4, downward projecting point. <hi rend="i">b, matau fapuku</hi>: 5, lashing knob at end of (1) shank; 6, seized double snood secured by (7) lashing around (1) shank; 8, continuation of one end of (6) snood as attachment for sinker. <hi rend="i">c</hi>, ring-shaped hook (<hi rend="i">matau lulu</hi>). <hi rend="i">d</hi>, ring-shaped hook (<hi rend="i">matau palumalau</hi>). <hi rend="i">e</hi>, 5, looped end of (1) shank for attachment of (6) wire snood, characteristic of <hi rend="i">c</hi> and <hi rend="i">d</hi>. Measurements in inches are: hook <hi rend="i">a</hi>, shank 1½, point leg 1⅜, point ½, maximum width 1, clearance 5/16; hook <hi rend="i">b</hi>, shank 3⅜, point leg 3 7/16, point 1⅛, maximum width 2¼, clearance ¾; hook <hi rend="i">c</hi>, shank 2⅝, point leg 1¾, maximum width 1 9/16, clearance 5/16; hook <hi rend="i">d</hi>, shank 2⅛, point leg 1½, maximum width 1 7/16, clearance 9/16.</head>
                </figure>
              </p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d10-d3" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Ruvettus Hook</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The <hi rend="i">Ruvettus</hi> hook (<ref target="#MacToke104a">fig. 11</ref>) is composed of two forked branches of <hi rend="i">ngangie</hi> wood. The larger fork forms the shank and point leg, and the other the point and the pin which is joined to the point leg. The fork of the shank and point leg make an angle of about 40 degrees. The branch of the fork forms the shank, and the stem forms the point leg; the stem below the bend is cut off and thinned down. Both branches are left round in cross section. The upper end of the shank is trimmed and pointed and is provided with two knobs on the inner and outer parts for lashing the snood. A V-shaped groove is cut along the outer part of the upper end of the point leg, and a deep notch is cut in the tip. The inner part of the point pin has an angular face to fit this groove, and the angular under side of the point fits into the notch.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n111" n="104"/>
              <p>The point is quadrangular in cross section tapering to a point with the angles sharply defined. The upper sides of the point are broader than the under sides and form a more acute angle at the upper edge which is slightly convex. The angle between the point and point leg is approximately 35 degrees. The point deflects very slightly to the left from the axis of the point leg when the hook is held with the point directed toward one. This deflection is so slight that it appears to be accidental or due to rough workmanship. Gudger (10) does not mention any deflection in the Tokelau hooks that he studied. Kennedy (13) suggests that this characteristic deflection is due to the difficulty of making the scarfing for the joint with the point on the inner part of the point leg. The
<figure xml:id="MacToke104a"><graphic url="MacToke104a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke104a-g"/><head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 11.—<hi rend="i">Ruvettus</hi> hook. <hi rend="i">a</hi>, side view: 1, shank; 2, point leg; 3, notched end of (2) point leg; 4, point; 5, pin of point joined to outer part of (2) point leg, lashed and wrapped with (6) coconut stipule covering which is secured by (7) braided sennit binding; 8, bait lashing of sennit cord; 9, heavy sennit snood secured to (10, 11) two lashing knobs, covered by (12) piece of stipule, lashed by (13) sennit braid. <hi rend="i">b</hi>, scarf joint of <hi rend="i">Ruvettus</hi> hook: 1, point leg and 2, pin of point; 3, bilateral facing of inner part of pin of (2) point fits (4) V-shaped groove of (1) point leg; 5, angle of underside of (1) point fits in (6) notch at tip of (1) point leg. Measurements in inches inside and outside (respectively) are: shank 9½ and 12½, point leg 9⅛ and 12¾, point 3¼ and 4 3/16, maximum width 3⅝ and 4¾, clearance between tip of point and shank 1¼, length of snood 18¼.</head></figure>
<pb xml:id="n112" n="105"/>
shank interferes with the handle of the adz and makes it impossible to cut the facing on the point leg squarely opposite. The Tokelau hook maker avoided this by putting the scarfing on the outside of the point leg, and the complementary scarfing of the point on the inner side of the pin, which can be more easily worked (<ref target="#MacToke104a">fig. 11, <hi rend="i">b</hi></ref>).</p>
              <p>The scarf joint is lashed securely and wrapped with a piece of the fabric-like stipule of coconut leaves folded on the outer part. This is lashed with light sennit braid three times around the lower edge, twice around the middle, and six times around the upper edge (<ref target="#MacToke104a">fig. 11, <hi rend="i">a</hi></ref>). A bait lashing is secured at one end to the point leg outside the stipule wrapping. The snood is made of heavy 3-ply sennit braid ⅜ inch wide. Its lashing to the end of the shank is covered by a small piece of coconut stipule, which extends above the tip of the shank and is lashed spirally. These wrappings protect the inner lashings of the snood and scarf joint from being sawed by the fish's teeth.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d10-d4" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Ruvettus Fishing</hi>
              </head>
              <p><hi rend="i">Ruvettus</hi> (<hi rend="i">palu</hi>) does not hold a large place in the diet of the Tokelau people due to its purgative effect and is therefore only occasionally sought. Only two <hi rend="i">palu</hi>-fishing expeditions took place during the 10 weeks of the field trip to Atafu.</p>
              <p>A calm sea is preferred for <hi rend="i">Ruvettus</hi> fishing because the canoe remains still and the fisherman can distinguish the pull of a fish from the drag of the heavy sennit lines. For this reason the expeditions go to the banks on the protected lee side of the island. But if a wind rises it blows the canoes away from the island. Therefore expeditions are held on moonlight nights when the fishermen can see the island to get their bearing.</p>
              <p>The Atafu method of fishing for <hi rend="i">Ruvettus</hi> with a single hook corresponds identically with <hi rend="i">Ruvettus</hi> fishing at Vaitupu in the Ellice Islands, as described fully by Kennedy (13).</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d10-d5" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Trolling Hooks</hi>
              </head>
              <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d10-d5-d1" type="section">
                <p>Composite hooks made of a pearl-shell shank and a turtle-shell barbless point are employed for casting from the edge of the reef and for trolling from canoes. The hooks used for casting and shore trolling are made in different sizes and are modified in construction for the different species of fish for which they are used. But they all adhere in general to the pattern of the single type of hook used in trolling for bonito.</p>
                <p>The principal parts of these hooks are shank (<hi rend="i">pa</hi>), point (<hi rend="i">manga</hi>), hackle (<hi rend="i">senga</hi>), line or snood (<hi rend="i">afo</hi>), and lashings (<hi rend="i">alaloaloa</hi>). (See <ref target="#MacToke101a">fig. 8, <hi rend="i">b</hi></ref>.)</p>
                <p>This type of hook is made to represent a small fish. The shank is cut in a long strip from the shell with the thick base portion left to make a raised head on the upper or concave side. The point is lashed at the tail end—the thin outer portion of the shell—through two holes in the point base. The distal lashing includes a hackle of feathers which project as a broad tail from the end of the shank. The end of the snood is looped through the proximal hole of the point base and seized. The upper part of the snood is secured along the head by a lashing which passes through a hole in this thicker part of the shank.</p>
                <pb xml:id="n113" n="106"/>
              </div>
              <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d10-d5-d2" type="section">
                <head>Malau Hook</head>
                <p>The smallest hook of this type (<hi rend="i">pa si malau</hi>) is used for fishing with a long pole and line from the edge of the reef on moonlight nights for a reddish fish called <hi rend="i">malau</hi>. The shank is made of a transparent, amber-colored shell called <hi rend="i">fole</hi>. The head and tail of the shank are broadly rounded (<ref target="#MacToke106a">fig. 12, <hi rend="i">a</hi></ref>). The greatest width is across the under side of the head. The top is rounded between the flatter sides of the head. The flat, thin, turtle-shell point has only two perforations in the short base in order not to weaken it. The proximal point lashing and the snood run through the proximal hole. The <hi rend="i">malau</hi> hook differs from the type hook in having a feather attached from each side of the eye of the head to represent gill fins. This was the only hook seen with this type of hackle, but it is evidently not an abnormal form, for Lister (14) noted similar hooks in Fakaofu. He says, “In some cases the feathers are so fastened that the front ones resemble the two lateral fins; and the end one, the forked tail fins of the fish.”</p>
                <p>
                  <figure xml:id="MacToke106a">
                    <graphic url="MacToke106a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke106a-g"/>
                    <head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 12.—Fishhooks. <hi rend="i">a, malau</hi> hook (<hi rend="i">pa si malau</hi>), upper surface and side views: 1, shank; 2, head of shank, broad and rounded on upper surface; 3, point with two lashing holes in point base; 4, feather head hackle; 5, feather tail hackle; 6, snood. <hi rend="i">b</hi>, shank of <hi rend="i">takipalu</hi> hook, upper surface and side views: 1, shank with slightly concave upper surface, convex lower surface and beveled side; 2, raised head of shank with (3) eye for lashing snood; 4, feather tail hackle.</head>
                  </figure>
                </p>
              </div>
              <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d10-d5-d3" type="section">
                <head>Takipalu Hook</head>
                <p>A small hook is used for trolling from a canoe along the edge of the reef for <hi rend="i">takipalu</hi>. The hook of this type collected at Atafu had lost its point (<ref target="#MacToke106a">fig. 12, <hi rend="i">b</hi></ref>). The shank is made of a dark brown shell proportionately thicker and broader in body than the shanks of larger hooks and is cut with the edges of the upper surface meeting in a single mesial ridge over the head. This shank has a single black feather hackle lashed on the under surface of the tail.</p>
              </div>
              <pb xml:id="n114" n="107"/>
              <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d10-d5-d4" type="section">
                <head>Aseu Hook</head>
                <p>A slightly under-sized trolling hook (<hi rend="i">pa si aseu</hi>), identical in construction with the bonito hooks, is used in fishing for <hi rend="i">aseu</hi>. The shank of this hook (<ref target="#MacToke107a">fig. 13</ref>) is made from the discarded ends of the pearl shells which are too short for shanks of bonito hooks. The different lusters of the pearl shell attract the fish. The hinge at the end of the shells is narrow and makes a small and abruptly formed head. A thin piece of shell which has no section of the shell base to form the raised head has been used for the shank of one hook (<ref target="#MacToke107a">fig. 13, <hi rend="i">b</hi></ref>). Two holes have been bored at the head end through the flat surface of the shank for the lashing of the snood.</p>
                <p>
                  <figure xml:id="MacToke107a">
                    <graphic url="MacToke107a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke107a-g"/>
                    <head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 13.—<hi rend="i">Aseu</hi> hook (<hi rend="i">pa si aseu</hi>). <hi rend="i">a</hi>, top and side view of hook with raised head shank; <hi rend="i">b</hi>, top and side view of hook with flat head shank: 1, shank; 2, head of shank with (<hi rend="i">a</hi>) transverse eye, (<hi rend="i">b</hi>) with two vertical eyes; 3, concave belly or upper surface of shank; 4, lashing of snood; 5, snood; 6, turn of snood through proximal hole of (3) point base; 7, tip of point; 8, proximal lashing of hook through middle hole of point base; 9, distal lashing of point through distal hole of point base; 10, thread hackle; 11, feather hackle; 12, back of shank; 13, point base of hook.</head>
                  </figure>
                </p>
                <p><hi rend="i">Aseu</hi> are trolled for with a long line and pole from the edge of the reef. The fisherman stands on a head of coral projecting beyond the outer line of the reef. He whips his hook over the breaking waves and flicks it over the surface like a small fish in flight from a larger one. If a fish does not rise for the hook, he changes it for a differently colored one and tries again, moving along the reef if his hooks do not attract fish at the first place.</p>
              </div>
              <pb xml:id="n115" n="108"/>
              <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d10-d5-d5" type="section">
                <head>Bonito Hook</head>
                <p>At Atafu the largest of the trolling hooks (<ref target="#MacToke108a">fig. 14, <hi rend="i">a</hi></ref>) vary in length from 2.5 inches to 3.5 inches. All are made with pearl-shell shanks and turtle-shell points, but at Fakaofu Lister (14) observed bone points as well.</p>
                <p>The parts of the hook are prepared with the utmost care and the making of each bonito hook follows a prescribed technique. The shank is obtained from the black-lipped pearl shell, <hi rend="i">Meleagrina</hi> (<hi rend="i">tifa</hi>), by cutting a strip transversely across the rounded half of the shell. The hinge of the shell forms the thick head, and the outer surface makes the convex under surface. Formerly the cutting was done with files made of the skin of a sting ray and rough coral stone (<hi rend="i">punga</hi>). <hi rend="i">Punga</hi> was also used to rub down the rough outer surface of the shell to produce the nacreous sheen and the proper shade for the under side of the shank. Three colors in the shells are distinguished by the natives: pearl-white (<hi rend="i">lau tiale</hi>, petal of the Tahitian gardenia); a golden yellow which often grades into brown (<hi rend="i">lau milo</hi>, petal of the <hi rend="i">milo</hi> flower); and a black-tipped shell ranging from pale to deep gray (<hi rend="i">siku uli</hi>).
-
<figure xml:id="MacToke108a"><graphic url="MacToke108a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke108a-g"/><head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 14.—Bonito hook and rod. <hi rend="i">a</hi>, hook (<hi rend="i">pa atu</hi>): 1, shank (<hi rend="i">pa</hi>); 2, head of shank (<hi rend="i">ulu pa</hi>); 3, tail of shank (<hi rend="i">siku pa</hi>); 4, back or lower surface of shank (<hi rend="i">tua pa</hi>); 5, belly or upper surface of shank (<hi rend="i">alo pa</hi>); 6, eye of head of shank (<hi rend="i">fao</hi>); 7, point (<hi rend="i">manga</hi>); 8, tip of point (<hi rend="i">matamanga</hi>); 9, bend of point (<hi rend="i">mulimanga</hi>); 10, point base (<hi rend="i">tapuvae i manga</hi>); 11, snood (<hi rend="i">afo</hi>); 12, seizing of the snood (<hi rend="i">kofekofe</hi>); 13, lashing of the snood (<hi rend="i">alaloaloa</hi>); 14, lashing thread through (6) eye of shank (<hi rend="i">fausanga</hi>); 15, lashing of hook through middle hole (<hi rend="i">fausangaloto</hi>); 16, lashing of feather hackle (<hi rend="i">fusienga</hi>); 17, thread hackle (<hi rend="i">senga atautunu</hi>); 18, feather hackle (<hi rend="i">senga</hi>); 19, hole in head of (10) point base for attaching (11) snood; 20, hole in middle of (10) point base for lashing (7) point to (1) shank; 21, hole in tail end of point base for attaching (7) point to (1) shank and (18) feather hackle. <hi rend="i">b</hi>, rod (<hi rend="i">kofe</hi>): 1, pole (<hi rend="i">kofe</hi>); 2, butt, with (3) groove and (4) elbow; 5, net-hook holder (<hi rend="i">safenga</hi>); 6, lashings of pole and butt.</head></figure>
<pb xml:id="n116" n="109"/>
Bonito are attracted by different colored hooks depending on the weather and the kind of fry upon which they are feeding. If the fish do not take one hook, they may take another. Therefore hooks of all shades are desired to fit all conditions. A fisherman has three or four lines to his pole, each with a bonito hook having a differently colored shank.</p>
                <p>The tip of the head of the shank is usually round and blunt. The two sides are sloped from a mesial longitudinal crest which diverges at the lower tip into the edges of the lower surface of the shank. From the distal slope of the head the ridge diverges and descends to the edges of the upper surface. A hole is bored transversely through the head with a pump drill or a shaft tipped with a pointed shell which is twirled between the hands.</p>
                <p>The turtle-shell point with the base extending proximally is of the western Polynesian type, as distinguished by Hiroa (30). The point base has three holes: the proximal or head hole for the loop of the snood, the middle and distal or tail holes for the lashings which secure the hook to the shank. The sides and the outer edge, which rests against the upper surface of the shank, are made flat. The points differ in form; some are flat-sided, some flat-sided and beveled, and others round. The longitudinal axes of the point and point base vary from an almost parallel position to a divergence of 40 degrees. The inner curve of the point varies from a sharp form to a broad bend, and the outer edge is either straight or curved from the edge of the base.</p>
                <p>In assembling the hook, the point is laid at the tail end of the upper or concave surface of the shank. The lashing is commenced by running a thread of <hi rend="i">fau</hi> bark through the middle hole in the point base and around the shank four times, knotting an end on each side with a half hitch. The lashing thread for the snood is next passed through the proximal hole, and one end is secured by a reef knot around the head of the base. The long end of this thread is brought to the head of the shank on the side on which it extends from the pole of the base. It is passed through the eye of the shank and back through the proximal hole in the base, and is knotted around the two strands leading to the head of the shank.</p>
                <p>The snood is looped through the proximal hole of the point base and brought back to the head of the shank. The lashing left at the head of the base is given two half hitches about the snood. It is wound spirally with eight turns up the snood to the head of the shank and is passed through the eye and around the snood again. The lashing is seized about the end of the snood and brought four times through the eye again, being given one turn around the snood each time. It is finally secured by four half hitches below the seizing.</p>
                <p>The hackle is made of the quills of two feathers which are inserted in two running half hitches at the tail of the shank while one end of the thread is held loosely in the teeth and then drawn taut with the free hand. The quill ends of the feathers are held with the convex side against the back of the shank at the tail while one end of the lashing is passed through the hole of the tail of the point base and brought around the shank and quills five times. This end is temporarily secured by a half twist around the tip of the point; the other end is similarly run through the hole and around the quills. The ends are given a half hitch around the lashing and knotted together at the end of the hook and left long as part of the hackle.</p>
                <p>The only variation in the construction of this bonito hook from the Samoan hooks described by Hiroa (28) is a third hole at the head of the shank in the Tokelau hook, which is used only for the attachment of the snood. In this characteristic it corresponds to the hooks of Vaitupu, Ellice Islands, described by Kennedy (13).</p>
              </div>
            </div>
            <pb xml:id="n117" n="110"/>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d10-d6" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Bonito Rod</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The bonito fishing rod is composed of two pieces, a pole of <hi rend="i">puka, fetau</hi> wood, or imported bamboo 14 to 18 feet long, and a butt of <hi rend="i">kanava</hi> wood which is a combined handle and attachment piece for erecting the rod for trolling. The attachment of the two pieces is shown in <ref target="#MacToke108a">figure 14, <hi rend="i">b</hi></ref>. Along the upper end the butt has a groove which receives the lower end of the pole. The lower end of the butt turns into a short elbow which hooks into the socket of the stern seat when the rod is stood in the grooved block of the stern cover of the canoe. Around the butt is a small net of sennit cord for holding the several bonito hooks, each of which is attached to a separate line.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d10-d7" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Tapus</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The shell used for shanks is valuable and the supply has grown less as succeeding generations comb the lagoon for the precious material. If a man paddling over the lagoon sees a shell at great depths and is unable to obtain it at the time, he claims it by announcing his discovery and its location on his return to the village. The discovered <hi rend="i">tifa</hi> shell is then tapu. In former times any man who removed it and hid it in another spot in the lagoon to recover it later as his own could be cursed to death by the original finder.</p>
              <p>Formerly the making and keeping of a bonito hook was strictly an affair of the fishing captain, and his materials were not to be contaminated or his work interrupted. Each fishing captain (<hi rend="i">tautai</hi>) kept a wooden bowl in which he bathed his hooks in fresh water after each expedition. This water was kept in coconut water bottles and could not be used for any other purpose. His bowl and mat were also tapu.</p>
            </div>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d1-d11" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Bonito Fishing</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Trolling for bonito (<hi rend="i">alo</hi>) is the greatest sport of Tokelau men. They fish daily during the season when the bonito rise to the surface near the island to feed on small <hi rend="i">0</hi> fish. Several canoes go out together and fish in one or more fleets according to the number of schools of bonito. Each fleet is led by a head fishing captain. Each canoe is manned by a crew of 4 or 5 men led by the fishing captain (<hi rend="i">tautai</hi>) who is the stern paddler and conducts all the fishing.</p>
            <p>Before starting after a school of bonito the fishing captain sets up his fishing rod in the grooved block behind him. When he moves near the fish he drops his hook, sits against the butt of the rod so that he can feel any lift given to it by the pull of a striking fish, and continues to paddle and guide his canoe to the shoal. As soon as a bonito takes his hook he springs to his feet and picks up the rod. In the midst of a shoal he stands facing aft and skims the hook rapidly from side to side over the water, holding the butt with both hands, braced high up on the inner side of the right leg. The line is the
<pb xml:id="n118" n="111"/>
length of the pole so that, when the rod is lifted, the fish swings in at the height of the fisherman's chest. When a fish takes the hook, the fisherman brings the rod up sharply with his right hand, and catches the fish against his body with his left arm. He may remove the hook and drop the fish into the canoe with his left hand, while with his right he drops the top of the rod and swings the hook into the water. The entire movement takes only a few seconds for an experienced fisherman. In a large school with the fish biting well, he can take 100 fish in less than half an hour. He must work as fast as possible, for the fish frequently disappear quickly from the surface. While the captain fishes the crew paddle hard to keep the canoe in the midst of the swiftly traveling school.</p>
            <p>The utmost skill is necessary to land bonito and it is a great disgrace to let a fish slip back into the sea or to dip the end of the rod in the water. This blunder is known as <hi rend="i">te maumau</hi> (literally, wasting). If a fishing captain disgraces himself in either of these ways, he must give a feast to all the other fishing captains who accompanied him in the day's fishing. If a new fishing captain, with as yet little standing in the fleet, commits either of these errors he loses his right to the stern seat and a new captain is appointed. The natives have observed that many schools disappear following the dropping of fish overboard. They believe a dropped bonito will tell the others, so that all immediately flee from the fishermen. This is similar to the explanation advanced by Vaitupu fishermen (13) that a half-stunned bonito slipping into the water sinks rapidly with a tail-spin motion, and his strange descent alarms the school that follows.</p>
            <p>There is a tapu placed on swordfish and shark fishing during the bonito season. One informant said that the old men had told him in his youth that these two large fish prey upon the bonito and that the killing of either a shark or a swordfish sends the bonito into such ecstasies that they swim all over the sea in their joy.</p>
            <p>Bonito-fishing expeditions begin about 4 o'clock in the morning. The crews take the canoes from the beaches to the passage into the lagoon where the fishing captains get in. The captains never assist with the canoes until they are on the water. As soon as all the canoes in the fleet have safely passed the reef, the head captain says <hi rend="i">lotu</hi> (pray), the crews ship paddles, and all pray for good fishing and protection at sea. This prayer is a survival of the ancient rite to O Te Moana who lived in the sea and controlled the bonito.</p>
            <p>The location of a school of bonito is indicated by birds hovering over the shoal to prey on the fish. The head captain raises his stern paddle in the air as a signal for the fleet to dash after the bonito. As the canoes approach the school, the crews and captain splash the water with their paddles to attract the fish to the hook. As bonito expeditions start before
<pb xml:id="n119" n="112"/>
the morning meal, the crews often eat raw fish while they work. The number of fish eaten is limited by the fishing captain.</p>
            <p>When the bonito are running well the head captains may decide to hold a community ceremonial fishing (<hi rend="i">talangi</hi>) in which every canoe and every fisherman of the village partakes. The catch is divided among all the people. The head fishing captains announce the event several days before it takes place and all prepare hooks and canoes with special care. In the old days the priests invoked the gods of the sea to send a large run of fish for the village. On the morning of the <hi rend="i">talangi</hi> all the canoes meet beyond the reef, and the fishing captain of the village leads them to the fishing grounds. He starts the dash toward the rear of the first school, from which direction the bonito are best approached. The individual canoes carry on their pursuit of the fish until the fishing captain calls them all in. They assemble around the canoe of the fishing captain, who takes the report of the catch and decides whether each canoe will keep its catch or whether the whole will be divided among the community. The canoe with the record catch leads the file over the reef to the village. The rest follow, each taking precedence in line according to the number of fish in its hull. If the catch is large, the crew may raise their paddles as they approach the village; if they are bringing in 100 or more bonito, the fishing captain holds up his pole.</p>
            <p>On the beach the children and old people of the village await the expedition and count the poles eagerly to learn the success of the fishermen. “Siaki, siaki-mauatuo,” they cry in greeting. The women carry the fish in baskets to the <hi rend="i">malae</hi>. It is their privilege to eat any remains of raw bonito and to take for themselves any fish which the men have left in their canoes.</p>
            <p>The official (<hi rend="i">tauraenga</hi>) selected by the village council to supervise the division of any community food divides the bonito piled on the <hi rend="i">malae</hi> and gives a portion to each family. One large portion is set aside for the fishing god and his priest, who have lent their power to the good luck of the fishermen. Formerly as each division of the fish was counted out the older men exclaimed, “<hi rend="i">Aiooo-aoo</hi>”, a word of thanks for the great number of fish given by the god of fishing. At the end of the division the priest made an offering of fish and thanked the god. The ceremony ended, as it does today, by the entire village feasting on roasted bonito.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Canoes</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d1" type="section">
            <p>The canoe is the most important and valuable property of an atoll islander. It is a vital necessity in procuring his food supply from the sea and from his plantations across the lagoon. All contact with other islands is dependent on the canoe. The Tokelau men were skilled navigators, visiting Samoa, Uvea, and Fiji as well as the other Tokelau atolls.</p>
            <p>Double canoes were used for long journeys but single-outrigger canoes
<pb xml:id="n120" n="113"/>
were used in fishing excursions from Fakaofu to Atafu, and in war fleets, raiding among the islands of the group. The double canoe has been completely abandoned since the government prohibited its use for travel between the atolls. Many lives have been lost in canoes blown off their courses. All inter-island travel must now be made on the trading schooner from Samoa.</p>
            <p>Three classes of canoes are recognized on the island today: the small outrigger canoe (<hi rend="i">paopao</hi>) with a single-piece hull, the single-outrigger fishing canoe (<hi rend="i">vaka</hi>) (<ref target="#MacTokeP003a">pl. 3, <hi rend="i">B</hi></ref>) made of segments of tree trunks, and the double canoe (<hi rend="i">lualua</hi>). <hi rend="i">Paopao</hi>, the Samoan name for the smallest dugout canoe, is said to be also a native Tokelau name. However, there is only one <hi rend="i">paopao</hi> in the group, and that was made for the use of the Samoan missionary on the lagoon at Atafu. This <hi rend="i">paopao</hi> is modeled after the <hi rend="i">vaka</hi> and has two outrigger booms and the Tokelau attachment to the float. The hull is made from a single tree trunk, but the sides are built up in one or two places where the sinuous growth of the tree left depressions. The small size and the name are probably Samoan features.</p>
            <p>The fishing canoe is usually made of three sections of tree trunks. It has five outrigger booms indirectly attached to the float and carries five men. Each canoe is equipped with a support in the stern to carry a fishing pole for trolling for bonito. Some variation in the shape was observed between the canoes of Atafu and Nukunono. The Nukunono canoes have slightly rounded hulls in cross section and the upper part of the cutwater curves outward, whereas the Atafu hull has straight sides and the cutwater is straight, though sloped.</p>
            <p>The double canoe is composed of two hulls lashed together by cross booms. These canoes were sailed with a mat lateen sail attached to the mast and were steered with an oar at each hull.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Rites in Canoe-Building</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The making of a canoe is an important event for which the supernatural agencies associated with the trees have to be propitiated. A family, having obtained permission to use their <hi rend="i">kanava</hi> trees, formally requests a master carpenter (<hi rend="i">tofunga</hi>) to perform the work. He proceeds the next day with the male members of the family to the plantations and prays before each tree to the god Tongaleleva, that it may fall and be carried away. Abasing himself before each tree spirit the carpenter says, “Topalapala kai o tae. Aloha mai.” (Spirit bring your excreta to me to eat. I bring you aloha.)</p>
            <p>At the beginning of each day, the master carpenter is given a new breech-cloth to wear and he and his assistants receive food for their morning meal. The carpenter makes a prayer for success in the day's work. The master carpenter is tapu during the period of the work—his clothes, his mats, the water bottles and wooden basin which he uses for washing are all untouch-
<pb xml:id="n121" n="114"/>
able, and he bathes apart from his assistants. However neither he nor they live apart from their families. All women are tapued from the vicinity of the work.</p>
            <p>At the completion of the task there is a large gift of mats, sennit, and garments made to the carpenters. A great feast (<hi rend="i">te auata</hi>) is held at the launching and the other canoes of the village meet the new vessel on the lagoon and race it to test its speed.</p>
            <p>The master carpenter, as designer and overseer, is known as the <hi rend="i">matamai</hi>. His apprentices do most of the labor, and younger assistants (<hi rend="i">te tino</hi>) sharpen the dulled edges of the shell adzes on a variety of hard coral.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d3" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Materials</hi>
            </head>
            <p>Few varieties of trees grow on the atolls and most of these are unsuitable for canoe building. The <hi rend="i">kanava</hi> (<hi rend="i">Cordia subcordata</hi>) tree in Tokelau grows sufficiently thick to make canoe hulls. It is durable, resistant to water, but heavy and hard, making construction and handling difficult. The <hi rend="i">kanava</hi> is a stumpy tree with twisted trunk which quickly tapers from its broad base. Only the lower section of the tree can be used in the hull which must therefore be built of three or four sections lashed together at the ends. <hi rend="i">Kanava</hi> trees have never been plentiful, and their use has been rigidly controlled in order to preserve the supply (p. <ref target="#n65">58</ref>). The trees are larger and more numerous on Atafu and have always been demanded as gifts by the people of the southern atolls.</p>
            <p>The one <hi rend="i">paopao</hi> seen was made from the wood of the <hi rend="i">puka</hi> tree (<hi rend="i">Hernandia ovigera</hi>) which is straight-grained and light but not as durable as <hi rend="i">kanava</hi>. The outrigger floats of both the large and small canoes are also made of <hi rend="i">puka</hi>.</p>
            <list type="simple">
              <head>Terms Associated with Canoes and Canoe-Building</head>
              <item>
                <p>fakanafala: posts used in bracing sections while joining them</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>foe: paddle</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>saumani: stern paddle of tautai</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>paopao: small lagoon canoe dugout</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>palelafa: split of coconut midrib lashed against seams</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>felakaaka: name of lashing design (interlaced)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>fakasumusumu: name of lashing design (triangular)</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>tata: bailer</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>kofe: fishpole</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>tautai: fishing captain, steersman</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>mua: fore</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>muli: aft</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>pou kofe: rest for fishpole on outrigger</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>lango: cradle for hull, logs on which hull rests in building, skids</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>falelo: awl of coral</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>la: sail</p>
              </item>
              <item>
                <p>velo: shell ornaments on cover pegs</p>
              </item>
            </list>
          </div>
          <pb xml:id="n122" n="115"/>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d4" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Fishing Canoe</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d4-d1" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Construction of the Hull</hi>
              </head>
              <p>In felling a tree the roots are often cleared and a fire built around them to burn through the base, but usually the tree is chopped with shell axes to avoid the chance of fire destroying the heart of the tree. The top and branches of the tree are cut or burned from the felled trunk, and the log is taken to the beach and floated to the workshop. Here the log is divided into three sections hollowed out by fire. The fire is controlled by cutting back the burning wood with adzes and soaking it with water kept at hand in wooden bowls. One section for the middle of the canoe is hollowed out completely; the other two sections for bow and stern are hollowed through one end, to be fitted to the middle section.</p>
              <p>The sections are set end to end across a row of short lengths of coconut logs which are cut out on their upper surfaces to fit them. The joining ends of the sections are squared off and the centers dubbed out with an <hi rend="i">ualoa</hi> adz, a <hi rend="i">Tridacna</hi> shell blade hafted to an angular handle with long head which will reach deep into the hull but allow the worker's hands to remain above the sides. The finished surface is worked with a smaller and lighter adz. The shell of each section is left thick enough so that the outside may be shaped. The utmost care is taken to avoid cutting the inside too deep or driving an adz through the bottom. The carpenters periodically snap their fingernails against the sides to judge the thickness from the resonance of the sound and place a stick perpendicularly in the section to estimate the thickness of the bottom from the ground.</p>
              <p>Holes are bored with a shell awl along both ends of the middle section and the inner ends of the bow and stern sections. The holes of one section are exactly opposite those of the joining section and often in sets of three pairs. A temporary lashing is made to hold the three sections together. The hull is turned over, and bow and stern are shaped. The bow section is tapered to the cutwater, which stands at slightly more than a right angle from the fore foot. The stern is tapered and cut down on top and bottom into the shape of a fishtail. The keel curves up to the cutwater and tail of the stern. A smooth surface is made over the entire underbody by light chipping with small adzes. At this time the master carpenter sets the sections in line. The canoe is turned over again in upright position and unlashed. The squared ends are trimmed to as even a surface as possible. Then one face of each joining is coated with a black mixture prepared from water and charcoal of coconut fibers, and the ends are laid together. The paint marks the high spots where further trimming is necessary.</p>
              <p>A press of four stakes with a binding rope is set up to hold two sections of the canoe together while the permanent lashing is made. Two stakes are driven into the ground behind one end of the middle section and one stake on each side of the middle section in line with this pair. The end of the middle section is braced against the middle pair of stakes and the end section is held against the middle section by the binding rope carried around the outside stakes and the end section. Temporary lashings hold the sections together at the gunwales. Sennit braid is run through the top pair of holes on one side and drawn tight. A peg is driven into each hole to hold this end of the sennit while the entire joint is securely lashed. The sennit is carried through the small holes by a needle made from the midrib of a coconut leaflet.</p>
              <p>The sides and edges of the sections are cut away in those places where, due to natural twists, the trunk does not provide ample breadth. Irregular edges and sides are not straightened. All that can be used of the solid piece is retained for strength and a saving of the precious wood. The sides are built up with pieces of planking trimmed to fit the uneven edges of the hull sections. These seams, with their lashings, have a zigzag pattern which gives an appearance of patching and crude construction.</p>
              <p>The planking is hewn from the smaller pieces of the tree, which are first split by being burned through with fire. The edge of the plank is shaped to fit the edge of the section on which the plank is to be attached. The plank is then secured by sennit braid run through the holes of the section, around the planking, and pulled taut through the
<pb xml:id="n123" n="116"/>
next hole. The plank is cut down and thinned in place. By smearing a charcoal mixture on the section edge irregularities can be detected on the plank edge and trimmed down. Holes are then bored in the lower edge of the plank opposite those of the section, and the plank is lashed to the hull. After the wallstrake sections are built up, they are joined.</p>
              <p>Flaws or knots on the edges of the sections are cut out in triangular notches in which small pieces of planking are inserted and lashed with sennit braid.</p>
              <p>The lashing in all parts of the hull of a fishing canoe is made directly through the sides and exposed on the outside (<ref target="#MacToke116a">fig. 15, <hi rend="i">a</hi></ref>). Between the sections it is usually evenly spaced from gunwale to gunwale. The holes are set back about an inch and a half to two inches from the edge and are made in opposing pairs. The permanent lashing commences at one gunwale. One end of the braid is knotted and the other is led through the topmost hole from the inside, across the outside, and through the opposing hole of the other section. The knotted end is pulled up to the hole but is tucked under the braid on
<figure xml:id="MacToke116a"><graphic url="MacToke116a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke116a-g"/><head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 15.—Outrigger canoe: <hi rend="i">a</hi>, view of starboard side; <hi rend="i">b</hi>, cross section of canoe and middle outrigger boom attachment; <hi rend="i">c</hi>, bow or stern outrigger attachment; <hi rend="i">d</hi>, top view of canoe. 1, canoe (<hi rend="i">vaka</hi>); 2, underbody (<hi rend="i">tua vaka</hi>); 3, inside of canoe (<hi rend="i">liu</hi>); 4, keel (<hi rend="i">takele</hi>); 5, lower strakes (<hi rend="i">tuta</hi>); 6, upper strakes (<hi rend="i">tafai</hi>); 7, bow section (<hi rend="i">saumi mua</hi>); 8, stern section (<hi rend="i">saumi muli</hi>); 9, middle section (<hi rend="i">potopoto, fukaloto</hi>); 10, bow (<hi rend="i">puoso mua</hi>); 11, stern (<hi rend="i">puoso muli</hi>); 12, bow and stern cover (<hi rend="i">puke</hi>); 13, guard or breakwater on bow cover (<hi rend="i">talingalu</hi> or <hi rend="i">fatupuke</hi>); 14, fishpole rest or block on stern cover (<hi rend="i">futia</hi>); 15, tail piece of stern (<hi rend="i">fakaika</hi>); 16, hole for fishpole to rest in (<hi rend="i">pu kofe</hi>); 17, stern seat of canoe (<hi rend="i">nofoa muli</hi>); 18, carrying grip at stern boom (<hi rend="i">fua-tanga</hi>); 19, shelf platform between booms for <hi rend="i">tuluma</hi> (<hi rend="i">papanaki</hi>); 20, outrigger boom, bow, stern (<hi rend="i">kiato mua, muli</hi>); 21, outrigger boom stringers (<hi rend="i">tolutoluama</hi>); 22, connecting sticks to outrigger float (<hi rend="i">tutuki</hi>); 23, outrigger float (<hi rend="i">ama</hi>); 24, lifting grip athwart bow of canoe (<hi rend="i">manu</hi>); 25, piece inserted to fill flaw in sides of planking (<hi rend="i">kaufono</hi>).</head></figure>
<pb xml:id="n124" n="117"/>
its second course through the hole. Four turns are made through each pair of holes, and the braid is then carried down on the inside to the next pair. After each turn the braid is pulled taut; and when the braid is carried to the next pair, the holes of the pair above are wedged and calked with small wooden pegs.</p>
              <p>The planks are lashed in the same manner, but the lashings are not so closely spaced. At angles in the seams a triangular binding is made between one hole on the upper side and the two which are directly opposite on the section below. Eight-ply sennit braid (<hi rend="i">kaha vaka</hi>) is used for all these lashings.</p>
              <p>A calking made from coral lime is sometimes used to plug the holes over the lashings. Calking is not used between the seams or sections of the underbody unless leaks develop. Then the lashing is loosened, strips of coconut-leaf midrib inserted, and the lashing pulled tight.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d4-d2" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Bow Cover</hi>
              </head>
              <p>A cover, measuring six hand spans, is placed over the bow of the hull. The gunwale of the bow section is slightly stepped so that the cover, which extends to the point, will lie with its stern end almost flush with the uncovered gunwales aft. The point of the cover projects upward continuing the line of the cutwater. Behind the line of this projecion are several knobs or pyramidal projections, broader but not as high. White cowrie shells (<hi rend="i">Ovula</hi>) were formerly tied on these projections but they have become rare in the lagoons and were seen on only two canoes at Fakaofu. In modern canoes these ornamental projections have a connecting bar across the top.</p>
              <p>The outer side of the bow cover is cut at an angle of 75 degrees to the deck and stands obliquely forward, keeping the water from spilling into the hull. In some canoes this guard is triangular; in others, convex on the fore side and straight across the aft side.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d4-d3" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Stern Cover</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The stern section slopes from the angle behind the stern seat to the beginning of the tail piece and is inset to receive a stern cover. The tapering of the sides and the decline of the stern deck give a pleasing line to the hull as well as eliminating interference from the canoe in trolling or snaring with a noose. The stern cover is slightly shorter than the bow and also has pyramidal projections to which white cowries were formerly fastened. A grooved block to hold a fishpole for trolling stands on the forward end. The fore face of this block is oblique and flush with the end of the cover and has a deep slot to brace the fishpole which rests in a hole or against a raised brace in the stern seat. On each side is a wing or brace extending from the middle of the block to the edge of the cover. Although the block is cut out at different heights and in varying forms, it is either on a horizontal plane or tilted down, parallel with the decline of the cover. No leaf-shaped blocks tilted up at the rear, as seen in the Ellice Islands and Samoa, were observed on the stern covers of the Tokelau canoes.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d4-d4" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Outrigger</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The outrigger, which balances the long, narrow hull in the water, is composed of a set of booms, connecting pegs, a float, longitudinal stay poles, complementary lashings, and a platform. The usual number of booms is five, the foremost and aft booms extending beyond the float, and the three middle booms reaching just short of the float and connected to it by oblique pegs (<ref target="#MacToke116a">fig. 15, <hi rend="i">d</hi></ref>). The first four booms are evenly spaced between the ends of the bow and stern covers. The stern boom is close to the fourth, and between these two is hung a single plank as platform. The booms are lashed to the gunwales with sennit which is run through holes below the gunwale. The lashing is made through two holes under the bow and stern booms and through a single hole under the intermediate booms.</p>
              <p>There are two techniques in lashing the booms. In the first, the braid is brought alternately from a hole on the inside of the gunwale, diagonally across the boom, to a hole on the outside. The next crossing is at a right angle to the first, and the lashing
<pb xml:id="n125" n="118"/>
is continued in this manner. In the second technique, the sennit is looped on the boom and secured by a loop from the other side. The braid is brought from the hole to the center of the boom and caught with the thumb while being carried to the other hole on the same side of the gunwale. It is again brought up to the center point of the boom from the other side and caught over the last turn. The second loop, curved over the first, holds it in position effectively, as the rough surface of the sennit will not slip over itself.</p>
              <p>The float is made in various shapes but usually with pointed ends, the bow being more tapering than the aft end (<ref target="#MacToke116a">fig. 15, <hi rend="i">d</hi></ref>). Some floats are made from wood with a sharp S-crook at the forward end, thus raising the point above the water line. The bow end of the float projects at some length beyond the bow connecting pegs, but the end behind the stern connecting pegs is extremely short. The float is toed in so that the bow point is closer to the hull than the stern point. This somewhat offsets the drag to port which the outrigger gives to the canoe. Unlike the Ellice Islands canoes, no compensation for the outrigger drag is made in the shape of the hull.</p>
              <p>The float is attached to the booms by connecting pegs and a supplementary lashing from the bow and stern booms (<ref target="#MacTokeP003a">pl. 3, <hi rend="i">B</hi></ref>). The bow and stern booms have four connectives, two on each side of the boom, which stand obliquely diverging from the float (<ref target="#MacToke116a">fig. 15, <hi rend="i">c</hi></ref>). The tops of the connectives are flush with the top of the boom. The inner pair are lashed to the boom inside the outer stringer. The ends are tapered and set into the top of the float, one pair opposing the other. No wedges are used to secure the connectives in the float. A single connective attaches each intermediary boom with the float (fig. 15, <hi rend="i">b</hi>). It is lashed to the side of the boom outside the outer stringer. It stands obliquely from the boom and sets in the float along the same line with the inner pairs of connectives of the end booms. The pegs hold the float rigidly from the booms but do not keep the float and booms strongly connected. A suspensory lashing is made around the end booms and is the true binding between the two. The lashing is commenced at the end of the boom, where it is carried around both peg ends and then over and around the float on the inside. It is then brought up to the boom at the point where the inner pegs meet. The lashing is carried back again around the float, twice more to the end of the boom, the last time binding the crossing of the lashing together above the float and knotting the end under the boom.</p>
              <p>The second longitudinal stringer is laid parallel to the first about a third of the distance in to the hull and is lashed to each boom. The plank platform is hung underneath the two after booms and extends from the inner stringer to the side of the hull. All canoes in the Atafu fleet today have this thin piece of planking which is said to be a modern feature for carrying fishing boxes and equipment. A piece of netting strung between two booms inside the hull is also used for carrying small articles. This is most common today in Nukunono canoes.</p>
              <p>Two short, forked uprights to carry the fishpole when not in use are lashed to the bow and stern booms of some canoes. The stern rest is lashed to the center of the stern boom, and the bow rest is lashed near the hull on the bow boom. This keeps the pole away from the port paddlers and yet within ready reach of the fishing captain in the stern.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d4-d5" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Lifting Pieces and Seats</hi>
              </head>
              <p>A lifting-grip is set at the juncture of the stern boom and the port gunwale. This is a short, flat piece of wood, broader at the boom end and cut out in the center. The broad end is trimmed down so that it does not stand up from the boom and is lashed through a single hole. The other end is lashed to the gunwale. In lifting the canoe, the right hand grips this handle and the left grips the stern boom. At the bow, just behind the end of the cover, is a convex cross piece lashed over each gunwale. This is the bow lifting-grip grasped by two men on either side of the canoe.</p>
              <p>A seat is placed before each boom except the stern boom. These seats vary in form from mere cross planks to carved, concave seats with flanges across the ends on the under side. The stern seat, in which the canoe captain sits, is placed against the end of the stern cover.</p>
            </div>
            <pb xml:id="n126" n="119"/>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d4-d6" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Bailer</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The bailer (<hi rend="i">tata</hi>) of the Tokelau canoe is made of <hi rend="i">puka</hi>. It is similar to one type of Samoan bailer described by Hiroa (28) as “the typical Polynesian sugar scoop form”. The handle is a raised piece extending from the back edge to the center of the hollow and perforated to allow the hand to slip through and take a firm grip. It is carried in the bottom of the canoe and the man seated before the fishing captain does most of the bailing.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d4-d7" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Care</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The canoes are kept on the lagoon side of the village; in Atafu and Fakaofu they are kept on beaches or slips between stone jetties. Each canoe is carried well above the high water line on slides of coconut leaf butts. These broad butts, when turned with the concave back uppermost, make excellent rests for the canoe and prevent the braid of the lashings on the bottom of the canoe from being worn down by rubbing against the sand and coral of the shore. Each canoe is covered with palm leaves, often roughly woven together or tied with the midribs of several leaflets.</p>
              <p>The canoe is in constant use and requires much attention to keep it in good repair. Some members of a crew are always at work on the beach renewing rotted and worn braid or relashing the booms or seams. When the lashing between two sections is to be replaced, the carpenter sets up two braces to support the canoe. He drives a short stake into the ground to the height of the side of the canoe, beside the joint to be unlashed. He lays another stick across the end of the section and lashes it to the two gunwales and to the stake. This framework prevents the section from spreading when it is unlashed from the adjoining section and holds it in an upright position.</p>
            </div>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d5" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Sailing Canoe</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The outrigger canoe is sailed with the western Polynesian type of Oceanic lateen sail, stretched between a yard and the boom.</p>
            <p>The yard is stepped on the bow cover. The boom is lashed to the yard about a foot and a half above the deck, where the yard is scarfed to keep the lashing from slipping down. The end of the boom projects a few inches beyond the yard. The mast is propped at an angle against one of the center booms and lashed at its top to the yard which it supports. A single stay braces the mast, running from the mast top to the outer end of the forward boom. The sheet is attached at a point three-quarters of the length of the boom and is held by the man before the helmsman in the stern.</p>
            <p>The sail is long and narrow and sets aft at an angle up and away from the canoe. The mast stands forward at the same angle as the yard from the outrigger boom, against which it rests. The stay running from the crossing of the mast and the yard forms a tripod with these two and counterbalances the effect of the mast and yard pressing the sail to windward.</p>
            <p>Canvas sails are made today in the form of the old triangular lateen sails. Formerly they were made of plaited strips of <hi rend="i">laufala</hi>. A bolt rope of sennit braid is lashed around the three sides. Along the head and foot seized loops of sennit are attached to the braid,
<pb xml:id="n127" n="120"/>
through which the lashing to the spars is made. The leech or free margin of the sail is doubly reinforced by a broad strip of <hi rend="i">laufala</hi> folded over the edge and sewn to either side of the sail. The bolt rope is sewn outside this leaf strip. The ends of the bolt rope meet at the peak of the sail, where they are tied to the tip of the yard. At the tack and clew of the sail the bolt rope is knotted about the ends of the boom in the notches provided for these lashings. The sail is lashed by two sennit lines tied into the forward loops of the head and foot of the sail and wound spirally around yard and boom, and with each turn passed through a loop on the margin of the sail.</p>
            <p>A temporary sail of coconut fronds is commonly used on the lagoon when traveling with the wind. Two or three interlaced fronds are stood on their butts in the bottom of the bow of the canoe with the breadth of the leaves facing the wind.</p>
            <p>In sailing the outrigger canoe, the Tokelauans always keep the outrigger to windward as a balance to prevent capsizing. In a strong wind the float rides out of water, and one of the crew moves in and out on the boom with the changes of wind. In tacking against the wind, as the outrigger must always be windward, the sail is put in the stern and the canoe sailed stern forward.</p>
            <p>Sailing today is almost totally limited to the lagoon. All inter-island voyaging is prohibited by the government, and there are few times when sailing outside the reef is required.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d6" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Double Canoe</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d6-d1" type="section">
              <list type="simple">
                <head>Parts of a Double Canoe</head>
                <item>
                  <p>fualua, lualua: double canoe</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>vaka katea: starboard hull</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>vaka ama: port hull</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>itu ama, ama: port side</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>itu katea, katea: starboard side</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>vaialovasa: space between hulls</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>kiato: cross boom</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>kiato mua: fore cross boom</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>kiato loto: center cross boom</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>ulu kiato: ends of center boom</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>kiato muli: aft cross boom</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>puningalu: fore and aft weather boards</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>sai: side weather boards</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>laupapa: deck between hulls</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>pupuni: deck boards of hulls</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>pupuni liu: hatch covers</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>tafafa: cross bar just forward of stern weather board for securing sheet</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>faufau: lashings (general term)</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>fana: mast</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>tulafana: mast step</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>taulele: fore and aft mast stays</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>tauama: port mast shrouds</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>taukatea: starboard mast shrouds</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>ungakoa: “pulley loop” for halyard</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>taulanga: cleat or pin for securing halyard</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>tafue te la: moving mast forward of aft on step</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>tilatu: upper spar, yard</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>tilalalo: lower spar, boom</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>tungapoupou: end of upper spar below joining with boom</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>toku: halyard</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>fafa: sheet</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>la: sail</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>mulila: apex of sail, tack</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>sukui: peak and clew</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>ulula: leech or free edge of sail</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>kafa la: rope reinforcement along edges of sail, bolt rope</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>kafa taenga: bolt rope stitched along sail</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>ungakoa: sail loops</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>taufakaoko: lashing rope to spars</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>taupule, velo: ornamental shells</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>pule vaka: white cowrie (<hi rend="i">Ovula</hi>)</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>ulupokofana: cowrie atop mast head</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>hoe matua, katea uli: steering oar held on starboard side of canoe</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>hoe fakalakatau: steering oar held on port side of same canoe</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>hoe: paddle</p>
                </item>
                <item>
                  <p>hale vaka: deck house</p>
                </item>
              </list>
              <pb xml:id="n128" n="121"/>
              <p>The following description of the double canoe is based on a model constructed during my visit under the guidance of Mika, an old canoe builder. Throughout the building Mika discussed with me the parts and order of construction. Just before I left, I was presented with a model of the simple traveling canoe built from the hulls of fishing canoes for temporary use.</p>
              <p>This temporary double canoe is made by lashing together two fishing canoes, from which the outriggers have been removed, by a set of four cross booms lashed over the same points in which the outrigger booms had been secured. This canoe is called <hi rend="i">faulua</hi>, a name derived from the verb, <hi rend="i">faulualua</hi>, which in Samoan (22) means “to bind together as two canoes”. The bows of the two hulls point in opposite directions. The sail is rigged like that of the fishing canoe, with back and outrigger stays and a mast set on the gunwale or bow cover.</p>
              <p>The hulls of the large, decked sailing canoe, <hi rend="i">lualua</hi>, (<ref target="#MacTokeP003a">pl. 3, <hi rend="i">A</hi></ref>) are built in the same way as those of the fishing canoes. The largest hulls, 70 or 80 feet long, are said to have been composed of 5 or 6 sections. The two hulls, one shorter than the other, are placed side by side with bows pointing in opposite directions. Heavy cross booms are lashed to each gunwale of the hulls, the number of booms depending upon the length of the canoe. The middle booms extend beyond the sides of the canoe, providing projections for lashing the mast stays.</p>
              <p>The bulwarks or weather boards are placed on the gunwales and ends of the deck covers as protection from the spray and overwash. Weather boards are lashed also at each end of the center deck between the inner, side weather boards. The lower edges of the side weather boards are cut away to fit snugly over the cross booms and are lashed directly through holes along the lower edge and through holes in the gunwales. The ends are lashed to the bow and stern weather boards which stand higher than the side boards. The bow weather board is convex on its outer face and concave on its lower edge to fit over the wave guard of the bow cover. The stern weather board is flat with slightly rounded ends. The lower edge is undercut to set closely over the fishing pole block, which runs completely across the forward end of the stern cover. A deck plank is placed between the hulls over the cross booms and lashed at the ends to the inner, side weather boards. The weather boards are sometimes ornamented with cowrie shells.</p>
              <p>The decks of the hulls are in three sections: a long and a short piece of planking which are cut to set against the bow and stern weather boards, and a hatch cover which is placed between them. The longer plank extends over the first and middle cross booms, and the shorter plank over the last, leaving a space between the third and fourth booms as a hatchway. The opposing ends of the planks have projecting lips on the lower sides over which the undercut flanges of the hatch cover fit to make a watertight joint.</p>
              <p>The hatch cover has two pairs of holes, through which two ropes are run from the under side, where they are knotted at each end. These form handles to raise the covers when it is necessary to bail the canoe or bring up stores from below.</p>
              <p>In some double canoes the hulls were left undecked and the crews paddled as well as sailed. The largest double canoes had a small house or shelter constructed on the center deck between the two hulls.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d6-d2" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Mast and Block</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The mast is stepped on a short, broad plank set on edge across the middle of the center deck between the hulls and lashed at its ends to the inner, side weather boards. A large U-shaped notch is cut in the upper side. The base of the mast is U-shaped and fits over the step so that it can be rocked forward or backward to the proper angle for the sail. The mast is of one piece tapering gradually to the top, surmounted by a white shell fastened with a fine cord.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n129" n="122"/>
              <p>The mast is stayed with six ropes, two to each side, one forward, and one aft. The port stays are made of one rope which is wrapped three times around the mast near the top and secured with a half-hitch. The two ends are brought down and lashed to the two projecting ends of the middle cross booms. The starboard stays are similarly secured but are lashed at the mast with a seized rope loop which acts as a pulley for the sail halyard. Below the lashing of the side stays, the fore and aft stays pass through a hole running abeam in the mast. They are knotted on each side of the hole to prevent the mast from sliding forward or backward and are lashed through holes in the weather boards of the center decking. A cleat for holding the halyard is tied to the mast near its base.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d6-d3" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">The Sail</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The sail of the double canoe is the usual western Polynesian triangular mat sail supported on its apex between a boom and an upper spar. The base and sides of the sail are straight. The spar is straight and somewhat broadened at its lower end, which rests on the deck of the starboard canoe against the weather board. The fore end of the boom is suspended from the spar by a short rope, which is run through holes in the spar and boom and knotted at either end. Two thirds of the length up the spar is a hole through which the halyard is led and knotted on the lower side. The halyard passes through the loop above on the mast and down to the cleat at the foot of the mast. The sheet is lashed around the boom and tied to a horizontal bar between the side weather boards at the aft end.</p>
              <p>When the sail is hoisted, the apex is forward of the mast and the spar rests against the forward weather board. The mast is stood at an angle slightly sloping aft.</p>
              <p>The sail is made of one piece of matting, plaited in check and reinforced along its sides by a basting of sennit. In preparing the sail for lashing to the boom and spar, a bolt line of sennit braid is laid along the edges, commencing and ending at the apex. A large loop is left at both peak and clew, and the ends are left projecting beyond the apex. The head and leech are folded over this line and basted down with a twisted cord. In the middle of the leech the basting cord is given a dozen turns about the fold to make it secure. Although the foot is not folded over, the basting is continued from the clew to the apex, which is bound to hold the fold of the head and the edge of the lower foot together. The bolt which is now projecting from the lower end of the leech is brought along the edge of the foot, leaving a large loop at the clew. The basting cord left at the apex is drawn between the strands of the bolt line, then through the sail, stitching the bolt line along the foot.</p>
              <p>The sail is lashed to the spars by a rope running spirally around the spar and through five loops sewn on the head and foot. These loops are made of twisted cord doubled and seized and sewn on the edge of the sail. The peak and clew are tied to the ends of the spar and boom with the loops of bolt line. The ends of the bolt line are tied about the short rope between the fore end of the boom and spar.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d6-d4" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Steering Oars</hi>
              </head>
              <p>A steering oar is used today in sailing canoes on the lagoon. It is smaller but shaped identically like the steering oars of the old double canoes. These are short-handled, broad-bladed, and blunt-ended oars, entirely different from the Samoan canoe paddle or steering oar. The blade is exceedingly long and broad in proportion to the handle.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d6-d5" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Sailing the Double Canoe</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The principle of sailing outrigger canoes (p. <ref target="#n126">119</ref>) is carried over in sailing the double canoe. The leeward canoe carries the sail, and the windward canoe
<pb xml:id="n130" n="123"/>
is the counterbalance. The sail is hung from the center mast by a halyard and rests with its spar on the deck of the leeward hull, braced against the forward weather board. To avoid bringing the canoe about on a tack, the sail is reversed in the other hull and the canoe sailed with opposite end forward. To change the tack, the sail is furled to the upper spar and carried to the stern of the canoe. The fore and aft stays are released and the mast set at the proper angle for the new direction, and then the sail reset. The double canoe is steered by an oar at the stern of each hull.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d6-d6" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Houses</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The modern Tokelau village has a great variety of houses due to the introduction of house types from other parts of Polynesia and innovations inspired by European houses. A common form of roof, said to be introduced from the Ellice Islands, has secondary rafters which extend from the high eaves to cover verandas which are supported by two outer rows of posts (<hi rend="i">poupo letito</hi>). Kennedy (13) describes this in a modern house at Vaitupu. Gilbert Islanders have built raised dwellings with an upper floor for sleeping and storage, and a ground floor of strewn coral for living quarters. Houses on piles and houses with many windows and doors are also seen. The usual house has walls of plaited coconut sheets (<hi rend="i">polatatau</hi>) or of evenly trimmed pandanus sheets (<hi rend="i">faselau</hi>) of the tapering leaf points, which make a very neat shingled effect (<ref target="#MacTokeP004a">pl. 4, <hi rend="i">A</hi></ref>).</p>
            </div>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d7" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Types of Ancient Houses</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d7-d1" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Dwelling House</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The ancient dwelling houses were all rectangular with the four house posts in the corners. The gabled roof extended from 2 to 3 feet above the ground and was thatched with pandanus sheets. Lister (15) says, “There were no walls, but a low fence or railing formed a definite limit to the inside of the house.” A low terrace of coral pebbles retained by a curbing of coral slabs was laid under and around the house. The house floor of coral pebbles was raised about a foot above the foundation terrace.</p>
              <p>Hale (11) describes the dwelling houses as being “of oblong shape with eaves sloping nearly to the ground. The height of the ridgepole was from 10 to 15 feet, and it projected at each end about a foot beyond the walls of the house, being covered over the whole length with thatch” (<ref target="#MacTokeP006a">pl. 6,<hi rend="i">A</hi></ref>).</p>
              <p>Inside the house was divided into two parts for sleeping. There was no material boundary, but the side on which the men slept was the <hi rend="i">fasi</hi>, and the women's side, the <hi rend="i">faitotoka</hi>. The woman, who remained in her own home after marriage, slept by the entrance. Compartments were made for sick people or visitors by hanging mats from the beams.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n131" n="124"/>
              <p>A platform (<hi rend="i">fatatakataka</hi>), entirely or partially covering the space between the tie beams, was constructed by laying several poles across the tie beams (<hi rend="i">utupotu</hi>). Small saplings were laid side by side on these poles to make the floor. If the platform entirely covered the space under the roof, a rectangular opening was left at one end (occasionally in the middle) by using shorter saplings in the flooring on either side. The platform was reached by a ladder (<hi rend="i">kakela</hi>) made of a log that was notched for steps or had short pieces lashed across it. These platforms were used mainly for storing sleeping mats and surplus mats, fishing boxes, and extra clothing.</p>
              <p>A net (<hi rend="i">tata</hi>) was often hung between the tie-beam plates as a place for storage.</p>
              <p>Shelves (<hi rend="i">aloalofata</hi>) for water bottles, food bowls, and small articles were made of short pieces of wood lashed horizontally to the main house posts.</p>
              <p>People lived and slept on the floor and the household furnishings were very simple. The coral floor was covered with coarsely plaited floor mats (<hi rend="i">taka-pau</hi>). The finer mats (<hi rend="i">moenga</hi>) for sitting or sleeping were taken from the platform only when needed. Whenever a visitor entered, a young person or the woman of the house immediately unrolled a fresh mat at the place where the visitor was to sit. This was rolled and stored again when the visitor left.</p>
              <p>A crude pillow (<hi rend="i">ulungalakau</hi>) cut from a solid block is used today and is said to be of the same type as that used formerly. The modern pillow is made of a section of <hi rend="i">pukapuka</hi> wood (<hi rend="i">Hernandia ovigera</hi>) sawed squarely off at the ends and cut away underneath to leave two stout rests. Some pillows are undercut at the bases of the rests to give the barest suggestion of feet. Only one pillow seen on Atafu had a lip or extension of the upper surface beyond the rests. The surface of the pillows is straight and slightly convex in cross section.</p>
              <p>A softer pillow was formerly made of finely woven <hi rend="i">fala</hi> pandanus matting folded over and the edges sewed together. The inside was stuffed with coconut fiber. This made a thin but sufficient pillow.</p>
              <p>Water bottles and oil bottles were hung from the ends of the shelves or house posts, and food bowls for bathing babies were kept on the platforms. Fishhooks and small articles were kept in fishing boxes (<hi rend="i">tulunga</hi>).</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d7-d2" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">God House</hi>
              </head>
              <p>Large houses were built in ancient times as residences of chiefs and gods. The framework differed slightly from that of the dwelling house in having center poles (<hi rend="i">poutu, poulotu</hi>) to support the ridgepole and roof and a greater number of wall posts. Kingposts (<hi rend="i">poutala</hi>) were lashed at the ends of the house to the cross beams and under the fork of the end rafters. This construction is still seen in houses with heavy framework of logs (<ref target="#MacTokeP005a">pl. 5, <hi rend="i">B</hi></ref>) and in the
<pb xml:id="n132" n="125"/>
long meeting houses. Hale (11) describes the ancient house of the supreme god (<hi rend="i">fale atua</hi>) (<ref target="#MacTokeP006a">pl. 6, <hi rend="i">B</hi></ref>):</p>
              <p>The house was oblong about 40 feet [according to Wilkes, 50 feet] by 30, and at the ridgepole about 20 feet in height. The roof, which curved inward somewhat like that of a Chinese pagoda, descended at the eaves to within 3 feet of the ground, below which the house was open all around. The circumference was supported by many short stanchions, small and roughly hewn, placed a few feet apart. But the ridgepole rested upon 3 enormous posts, of which the largest was about 3 feet in diameter. The roof was loosely thatched with coconut leaves, not disposed with that neatness for which the Samoans are noted.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d7-d3" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Men's House</hi>
              </head>
              <p>Long houses were used by the men of a group or family for their meetings (<hi rend="i">fono</hi>), feasts, and daily lounging. These houses (<hi rend="i">fale pa</hi>) were supported by 6 or 8 posts and some had a center post. Today the long house (<hi rend="i">fale loa</hi>) (<ref target="#MacTokeP005a">pl. 5, <hi rend="i">C</hi></ref>) of Atafu has 8 wall posts but no center post. The walls are higher than the wall of the former <hi rend="i">fale pa</hi>.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d7-d4" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Cook House</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The construction of the four-post small dwelling (<hi rend="i">fale paito</hi>) was also used for the kitchen (<hi rend="i">fale umu</hi>) and other small, lightly constructed houses and shelters. The kitchen was large enough to shelter the oven (<hi rend="i">umu</hi>) and to store food baskets, a little food, and utensils. A wall screen of plaited coconut leaf sheets protected the oven fire from prevailing winds.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d7-d5" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Canoe House</hi>
              </head>
              <p>A gable roof with eaves resting on the ground was formerly built as a canoe shelter (<hi rend="i">fale afolau</hi>). It was long and high enough to allow men to carry in the outrigger canoe. The land end was closed, the sea end left open. The construction followed that of the roof of the small dwelling (p. <ref target="#n130">123</ref>) and the principal rafters supported the entire dwelling.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d7-d6" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Storage House</hi>
              </head>
              <p>A storage house (<hi rend="i">umusokosokai</hi>), similar to the canoe shelter with the roof resting on the ground but shorter and somewhat lower, is common today on Atafu. Purlins lashed underneath the rafters hold them rigid, and lighter purlins support the thatching. A light ridgepole rests in the crotch formed by the rafters. One end is often walled with plaited coconut sheets as a shelter. The construction is identical to that of the houses (<hi rend="i">whare tuku whakararo</hi>) built on Manihiki and Rakahanga during hurricane season (30).</p>
              <p>My informant, Mika, said that the storage house was not used formerly, but other men in the village said that it was built to store coconut husk fuel in the early days. These houses are moved about the atoll during the copra-cutting season and set down wherever the copra is drying. If bad weather
<pb xml:id="n133" n="126"/>
seems probable, the drying copra on the beach is picked up and piled in the houses. They also serve as shelters over ovens, and their name suggests that this may have been their original purpose.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d7-d7" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Construction</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The regulations and observances held during the construction of the canoe were the same as those held during house-building.</p>
              <p>
                <figure xml:id="MacToke126a">
                  <graphic url="MacToke126a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke126a-g"/>
                  <head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 16.—Dwelling-house framework. <hi rend="i">a</hi>, end view; <hi rend="i">b</hi>, side view: 1, supporting post (<hi rend="i">pou</hi>); 2, tie-beam plate (<hi rend="i">sasanga</hi>); 3, tie beam (<hi rend="i">utupotu</hi>); 4, principal rafter (<hi rend="i">kasomatua</hi>); 5, ridgepole (<hi rend="i">kaukau</hi>); 6, upper purlin (<hi rend="i">talava</hi> or <hi rend="i">saialoa</hi>); 7, middle purlin (<hi rend="i">palekaso</hi>); 8, lower purlin (<hi rend="i">palelau</hi>); 9, thatch rafter (<hi rend="i">tamakaso</hi>); 10, upper ridgepole (<hi rend="i">taufufu</hi>); 11, end purlin (<hi rend="i">utupotu tala</hi>); 12, log retaining wall around floor (<hi rend="i">palepale</hi>); 13, end eave batten (<hi rend="i">palelau</hi>).</head>
                </figure>
              </p>
              <pb xml:id="n134" n="127"/>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d7-d8" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Framework</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The ordinary dwelling house today is similar to the ancient house but has walls and higher eaves (<ref target="#MacTokeP005a">pl. 5, <hi rend="i">A</hi></ref>). The most usual dimensions are 25 to 30 feet long, 12 to 15 feet wide, and 15 feet high. The framework is supported by posts (<hi rend="i">pou</hi>) sunk in holes about an arm's length deep at the corners of the house.</p>
              <p>The posts are cut from tree trunks with the stump of a branch forming a crotch at the top of each post in which the longitudinal tie beams rest. The end tie beams lie across the longitudinal plates and over the axes of the posts (<ref target="#MacToke128a">fig. 17</ref>). A third tie beam lies across the middle of the longitudinal plates. The tie beams are undercut to cap the plates firmly and the joints are lashed with 3-ply sennit cord (<hi rend="i">kafa</hi>) or 2-ply sennit cord (<hi rend="i">kafaato</hi>).</p>
              <p>Three pairs of principal rafters (<hi rend="i">kasomatua</hi>), one at each end just inside the posts and one in the middle, are lashed onto the tie-beam plates. Near the top each pair is lashed with the tips crossing to form a crotch. The main ridgepole (<hi rend="i">kaukau</hi>) lies in these crotches and extends 1 to 2 feet beyond the end rafters (<ref target="#MacToke126a">fig. 16, <hi rend="i">b</hi></ref>). The principal purlins are lashed across the outside of the principal rafters. The middle purlin rests on the extended ends of the tie beams. The upper purlin (<hi rend="i">talava, saialoa</hi>) runs across the rafters midway between the wall plate and the ridgepole. The lower purlin (<hi rend="i">palelau</hi>) runs across the rafters a few inches above their ends, below the wall plate (<ref target="#MacToke126a">fig. 16</ref>). The end purlins lie across the extended ends of the middle side purlins.</p>
              <p>Parallel to the principal rafters and lying over the purlins, the light thatching rafters (<hi rend="i">tamakaso</hi>) are lashed at even intervals across the sides of the roof. These thatching rafters extend below the lower purlin and cross at the top above the ridgepole, forming a second series of crotches in which the upper ridgepole (<hi rend="i">taufufu</hi>) rests.</p>
              <p>End thatching rafters are lashed at the tips to the end pair of side thatching rafters. Near the base they are lashed over the end purlin which lies beyond the vertical plane of the end pair of thatching rafters thus giving an outward slope to the end of the roof. The sides of the roof are usually braced with struts (<hi rend="i">lakautaifi, fakatapanga</hi>) placed diagonally from the end thatching rafter at the ridgepole to the tie-beam plate at a point three-quarters along the side.</p>
              <p>To prevent the long wall screens from blowing in the wind saplings (<hi rend="i">tokapola</hi>) are set in the ground against the foundation logs and are lashed to the tie-beam plates. The screens are dropped outside the saplings, which hold them against the wind—the saplings have no supporting function in the framework of the house.</p>
              <p>Each house has a foundation (<hi rend="i">tanunga</hi>) and a floor of coral pebbles (<hi rend="i">kilikili</hi>), spread after the house is complete. Many helpers are called to carry baskets of the white, water-washed coral from the beach. The boundary of the foundation is not always defined, but there is a broad mound of coral which extends from 3 to 5 feet beyond the walls of the house and stands 1 to 2 feet above ground level. In the finished house this is retained by a wall (<hi rend="i">lotoa</hi>) composed of slabs of coral set on end or short lengths of coconut logs. Inside the house more coral is spread to build up the floor 6 or 8 inches above the level of the foundation. The coral floor is retained by small logs (<hi rend="i">palepale</hi>) or coral slabs (<hi rend="i">fatupaepae</hi>) laid around its boundary (pl. 5, <hi rend="i">C</hi>).</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d2-d7-d9" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Thatching</hi>
              </head>
              <p>During the construction of the house the women and children of the family gather pandanus leaves and coconut fronds from the family lands across the lagoon. They pick up the freshly fallen leaves about the trees and put them in piles tied with a single leaf binder. At the end of the day they gather the piles in coconut-leaf carrying sheets and transport them to the village in canoes.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n135" n="128"/>
              <p>Each pandanus leaf is smoothed by pulling it tight around a stake set in the ground. When it is flattened, it is dropped to the base of the stake where it is held bent around the stake by the foot and leg of the worker, sitting crosslegged before the stake. The next leaf is dropped over it and drawn tight. When about 50 leaves are flattened, the tip ends and butts are lashed together and the bundle slipped off the stake for storage.</p>
              <p>The midribs of coconut fronds are trimmed of their butts and thin tips and split. They are then cut into lengths of 4 feet, the usual span between the thatching rafters. The thatching sheets or pandanus are pinned over these splits.</p>
              <p>
                <figure xml:id="MacToke128a">
                  <graphic url="MacToke128a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke128a-g"/>
                  <head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 17.—House framework: corner of framework supported by forked post cut out to fit tie-beam plate; tie beam rests on end of tie-beam plate and supports middle purlin; principal rafter rests on tie-beam plate and also supports middle purlin; thatch rafter rests on purlin; end purlin is above tie beam and rests on end of middle purlin.</head>
                </figure>
              </p>
              <p>Twelve to 14 inches of the butt end of a dried pandanus leaf is folded over the coconut split at one end. A long stitch is taken near the outer edge through both folds of the leaf with a bone needle (<ref target="#MacTokeP004a">pl. 4, <hi rend="i">B</hi></ref>). The folded leaf is held together with the left hand, while a thin coconut leaflet midrib is pushed through the hole made by the needle, which has been withdrawn. A second leaf is folded over the split, partially overlapping the first leaf. A stitch is taken with the needle through both leaves at the overlapping and the leaflet midrib is pushed through, securing the first leaf in its place (<ref target="#MacTokeP004a">pl. 4, <hi rend="i">C</hi></ref>). This technique is continued until the entire length of the split is covered.</p>
              <p>Roof sheets (<hi rend="i">atopela</hi>) of plaited coconut leaf, and wall sheets (<hi rend="i">polatatau</hi>) are sometimes substituted for the pandanus sheets in modern houses.</p>
              <p>The thatching (<hi rend="i">ato</hi>) of the roof commences at the eaves (<hi rend="i">tulutulu</hi>) and works up to the ridgepole. The first sheet (<hi rend="i">atolau</hi>) is laid across the thatch rafters at one end of the roof and slightly above the eaves. The rib of the sheet is at the top and the butt ends of the doubled leaves face upward. The long tips of the pandanus hang down, forming a thick protection against the heat of the sun and making a good draining surface. The sheets are carried straight up the rafters, each new piece overlapping the one below 6 or 8 inches and extending 3 or 4 inches above it. The sheets of one row are worked in between the sheets of the preceding row as they are laid down, so that they overlap 6 or 8 inches. Two men work together on a side of the roof during the thatching, each man lashing one end of the sheet to the rafter underneath.</p>
              <p>The lashing or sewing line is of light 3-ply sennit braid fastened at the lower end of the rafter. Each worker has a thatching needle about 6 or 8 inches long made of <hi rend="i">ngangie</hi> wood (<hi rend="i">Pemphis acidula</hi>) with a barb at the pointed end. It is thrust through the thatch from the lower side close to the rib of the sheet. The free end of the lashing is brought over the upper edge of the sheet on one side of the rafter and hooked under the barb. The needle is then drawn back. The line is pulled through
<pb xml:id="n136" n="129"/>
and down the opposite side of the rafter. The needle is then disengaged, a half hitch is made around the rafter, and the braid is taken up the other side. A continuous line is used for securing the sheets as they are placed on the roof. Assistants below pass up the sheets with long poles to the thatchers.</p>
              <p>The finishing piece of the roof is a sheet of plaited coconut leaf which is lashed along the ridge. In stormy seasons long coconut fronds are laid over the thatching to prevent the wind from getting underneath and blowing off the sheets.</p>
              <p>
                <figure xml:id="MacToke129a">
                  <graphic url="MacToke129a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke129a-g"/>
                  <head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 18.—Parts of mat in plaiting process: plaiting begun at “commencement corner” (<hi rend="i">a</hi>) of “commencement edge” (<hi rend="i">b</hi>) and completed at “finishing edge” (<hi rend="i">c</hi>); upper edge of last completed section is the “plaiting edge” (<hi rend="i">d</hi>), as the next section has to follow along it; the section being plaited is the “working section” (<hi rend="i">e</hi>); its right oblique edge is the “working edge” (<hi rend="i">f</hi>), composed of a number of dextral wefts; alternate ones turned back to receive the next sinistral weft; direction of these wefts is marked at left edge of working section; on left and right edges of mat, the left (<hi rend="i">i</hi>) and right (<hi rend="i">j</hi>) foundation strips project from the unfinished plaiting.</head>
                </figure>
              </p>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d3" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="c">Plaiting</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d3-d1" type="section">
            <p>The plaiting of mats, clothing and baskets is woman's work but the men also make the quickly plaited coconut leaf baskets and sheets. Plaited materials were widely used in pre-European times, for the Tokelau atolls grow no plants from which bark cloth could be made and the people did not practice weaving. Plaited breechclouts and kilts provided clothing for the men. Plaiting is still extensively used in building and furnishing houses, and for hats for both men and women. But its use for clothing and bedding has been decreased by the introduction of European cloth.</p>
            <p>Plaiting materials are coconut leaves, <hi rend="i">fala</hi> or <hi rend="i">kie</hi> pandanus, and strips of prepared <hi rend="i">kanava</hi> bark.</p>
            <p>The terminology used in the description of the plaiting process is taken from Hiroa (28) with the addition of the term “commencement corner”. (See <ref target="#MacToke129a">fig. 18</ref>.)</p>
          </div>
          <pb xml:id="n137" n="130"/>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d3-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Pandanus Leaf Plaiting</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d3-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Preparation of Materials</hi>
              </head>
              <p><hi rend="i">Fala</hi> pandanus leaves are used exclusively in the making of the finer mats. The green leaves are removed from the tree and tips and butts cut off. The thorny edges are removed by a sharp-pointed fishbone or the point of a metal scraping tool which is used to pierce through the butt just inside the edge and to slit the length of the leaf. The women use their teeth to sever the butt of the outer surface of the spiny midrib on the under side of the leaf and to peel off the outer midrib surface with its thorns. The trimmed leaves are toughened by being drawn over hot coral pebbles of a ground oven. Afterward they are laid on the beach for three days to dry and bleach to a pale buff brown in the sun. They are brought indoors each night to prevent their being wet by showers. To make each leaf flat, the butt is held by the left hand and the leaf is drawn between the extended thumb and the edge of a shell or metal hook held between the first two fingers of the right hand. With the butt still in the left hand, the first leaf is wound around the fingers into a small roll. Each succeeding leaf is added to this roll by placing the butt under the tip of the preceding leaf and winding it on. The roll is fastened by tying a thin strip of <hi rend="i">laufala</hi> around the tip of the outermost leaf and through the central hole left by the fingers.</p>
              <p>When the leaves are to be used for mat-making, each side of the leaf is stripped from the midrib, which is then discarded. The halves of leaves are flattened again and split into strips one-fourth inch wide.</p>
              <p><hi rend="i">Kie</hi> pandanus used in plaiting soft mats for babies and men's malos receives a longer preparatory heating before being trimmed and dried. The strips of <hi rend="i">kie</hi> are laid over a bed of green leaves on the hot coral of an oven and covered with more leaves; then heated coral is spread over these. They are left in this heat for an entire day and are then removed and carried to the sea in bundles, where they are weighted down and left to soak for five days. This soaking makes them soft and pliable. After being removed from the sea, the two layers of the leaf are split apart by making an incision across the butt of the leaf, and the upper, shiny layer is carefully separated from the dull, under layer. Both layers are washed in fresh water, trimmed at the ends, and placed in the sun to dry. Then they are flattened and rolled in the same way as described for the <hi rend="i">laufala</hi>.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d3-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Dye</hi>
              </head>
              <p>Many of the mats are ornamented with black strips of dyed coconut leaves which are included with the plaiting (<ref target="#MacTokeP007a">pl. 7, <hi rend="i">B</hi></ref>). The black dye is produced from the charcoal of burnt fibers of coconut husks. These are ground and
<pb xml:id="n138" n="131"/>
placed in the hollow of a coconut tree trunk where rain water has collected. The rolls of coconut leaf strips (<hi rend="i">kaulama</hi>) are set in this solution to soak until they become thoroughly blackened. Nowadays the leaf is stained with a mixture of the charred fibers and kerosene.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d3-d2-d3" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Plaiting Accessories</hi>
              </head>
              <p>Sleeping mats and plaited clothing are made on a plaiting board made from a piece of canoe hull having a slightly convex surface which tilts toward the worker (<ref target="#MacTokeP008a">pl. 8, <hi rend="i">A</hi></ref>). The section of plaiting to be worked is kept on the surface of the board where the wefts can be easily handled and evenly laid. The mat is held against the board by a stick of <hi rend="i">kanava</hi> wood 10 or 12 inches long and 4 inches wide. The stick is slightly convex on the upper surface. The worker places her right foot on the stick as she sits with her left leg crossed and her right leg flexed against her body.</p>
              <p>The fishbone points for splitting leaf strips and shells for scraping have been displaced by a single tool made of a rectangular piece of metal shaped to fit against the palm of the hand and between the fingers. One corner is sharpened for splitting.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d3-d2-d4" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Pandanus Mats</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The plating of a pandanus mat is commenced on a foundation strip (<hi rend="i">kaso</hi>) composed of two pairs of superimposed elements of weft material which overlap at the ends and extend in a line 4 or 5 feet long. As the plaiting develops, the foundation strip is increased by adding new elements and is carried around the entire border of the mat. Its purpose is to give a basis on which to commence the plaiting and to strengthen the edges of the mat. The first part of the foundation strip is laid horizontally on the plaiting board, the left half is turned forward at a right angle, and the strip shifted to place the apex of this angle pointing toward the worker and the two branches extending diagonally away from her to right and left (<ref target="#MacToke131a">fig. 19, <hi rend="i">a</hi></ref>). These branches will be referred to in the commencement of the plaiting as dextral and sinistral foundation strips.</p>
              <p>
                <figure xml:id="MacToke131a">
                  <graphic url="MacToke131a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke131a-g"/>
                  <head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 19.—Foundation strip and first position of plaiting elements. <hi rend="i">a</hi>, strip of <hi rend="i">laufala</hi> turned at right angles to form basic commencement corner: 1, sinistral foundation strip during commencement of plaiting; 2, temporary dextral foundation strip during commencement of plaiting. <hi rend="i">b</hi>, addition of horizontal wefts: 3, first horizontal weft; 4, second horizontal weft; 5, 6, and 7, 8, upper elements laid across angle of foundation strip; 9, 10, and 11, 12, lower elements laid under angle of foundation strip; 13, line across middle of upper elements dividing wefts into left and right for descriptive purposes.</head>
                </figure>
              </p>
              <pb xml:id="n139" n="132"/>
              <p>The mats are plaited with double strips of leaf material. The strips will be termed upper and lower elements and the pair termed the weft. The beginning of the first three rows of the check pattern at the commencement corner is plaited with the elements treated as individual wefts, which hold the wefts firmly in place until the plaiting process is fully established. Two weft elements are placed side by side horizontally to the worker under the angle of the foundation strip, and two more elements are superimposed on the first pair over the foundation strip (<ref target="#MacToke131a">fig. 19, <hi rend="i">b</hi></ref>).</p>
              <p>The elements and foundation strip are now in position for the beginning of the plaiting process. The fingers of the left hand are pressed against the wefts over the angle of the foundation strip, while the first weft is turned to make the first corner. The divisions of the weft elements separated at this point by the fingers will be called left and right elements; the weft nearest the worker, the first, and the next weft, the second. The upper left element of the first weft is laid back with the right hand while the lower left element is brought up with a right-angled turn and carried forward over the second weft (<ref target="#MacToke132a">fig. 20, <hi rend="i">a</hi></ref>). The upper left element of the first weft is brought into place again, turned forward at right angle, and passed under the upper left element of the second weft and the sinistral foundation strip, but over the lower left element of the second weft and placed directly under the former left element of the first weft (<ref target="#MacToke132a">fig. 20, <hi rend="i">b</hi></ref>). The left elements of the first weft have now become a vertical weft extending away from the worker.</p>
              <p>
                <figure xml:id="MacToke132a">
                  <graphic url="MacToke132a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke132a-g"/>
                  <head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 20.—Establishment of commencement corner. <hi rend="i">a</hi>, turning upper element of first vertical weft: 5, upper left element of (3) horizontal weft is placed aside; 9, lower left horizontal element is brought forward at right angles over (4) second horizontal weft at a point midway between (1, 2) foundation strips. <hi rend="i">b</hi>, turning lower element of first vertical weft: 5, upper left element of (3) horizontal weft is placed under (1) sinistral foundation strip and (8) the upper element of (4) horizontal weft, and brought forward at a right angle underneath (9) the now upper element of (14) the left vertical weft. <hi rend="i">c</hi>, turning upper and lower elements of second vertical weft: 6, upper right element of (3) horizontal weft is turned at right angles and placed under (12) the lower right element of (4) horizontal weft; 10, lower right element of (3) horizontal weft is turned at right angles and placed under (8) the upper right element of (4) horizontal weft, and over (2) the dextral foundation strip, forming (15) the right vertical weft; the left and right elements of (3) horizontal weft have now been formed into (14, 15) two vertical wefts and have established (16) the commencement corner at the angle of (1, 2) foundation strips.</head>
                </figure>
              </p>
              <p>By reversing the same technique, the right elements of the first weft are made into a vertical weft parallel to the left elements. To establish the check pattern, the upper right element of the first weft is brought forward, first with a right-angled turn under the dextral foundation and the right elements of the second weft. The lower right element of the first weft is brought up and passed with a right-angled turn under the upper right element of the second weft, over the dextral foundation strip, and placed directly over the other right element of the first weft (<ref target="#MacToke132a">fig. 20, <hi rend="i">c</hi></ref>).</p>
              <p>The commencement is now established with one horizontal weft and two vertical wefts. The right vertical weft and the upper element of the left vertical weft are next carried back to form the first shed for the introduction of a new horizontal weft. The
<pb xml:id="n140" n="133"/>
lower element of this new weft is laid under the dextral foundation strip, over the lower element of the left vertical weft, and under the sinistral foundation strip. The upper element of the left vertical weft and the lower element of the right vertical weft are put down and the upper element of the new weft is laid over these and both foundation strips. The upper element of the right vertical weft is laid over this. The second horizontal weft is turned into two new vertical wefts by the same technique as described for the first weft and is followed by the introduction of a fourth horizontal weft in the same process as described for the third weft.</p>
              <p>The beginning of the edges of the mat is defined by the turning of the elements of the second weft around the foundation strips in exactly the same way as the turning of the left half of the first weft to establish the left side of the commencing corner. This technique is continued as new wefts are introduced. To form the left edge, each weft as it comes to the foundation strip, is turned back at right angles. The lower element beneath the foundation strip is passed around and across it and over the introduced weft; and the upper element is brought across and turned under the foundation strip but above the lower element of the next introduced weft. To form the commencement edge, the right edge of the plaiting as it is now held, the upper element of each weft is turned
<figure xml:id="MacToke133a"><graphic url="MacToke133a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke133a-g"/><head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 21.—Establishing a corner in plaiting. <hi rend="i">a</hi>, commencement of first turn of corner, foundation strip (1) represented by dotted lines as it is hidden by the plaiting at this stage, completed plaiting of commencement section up to the last sinistral weft (3) omitted to simplify illustration: 1, foundation strip along commencement edge is turned forward at right angles to establish (2) foundation strip at right edge of mat; 5, upper element of (3) last sinistral weft to be introduced into section before corner is turned is carried at right angles under the angle of (1, 2) foundation strips; 4, last dextral weft turned up from commencement edge; 7, lower element of (3) last sinistral weft. <hi rend="i">b</hi>, finish of first turn of corner: 7, lower element of sinistral weft is turned forward at right angles and laid over corner of (1) foundation strip and along (5) turned part of upper element of (3) sinistral weft. <hi rend="i">c</hi>, commencement of second turn of corner: 7, now upper element of temporary dextral weft is turned at right angles to the left and placed under (4) dextral weft and (2) dextral foundation strip. <hi rend="i">d</hi>, finish of second turn of corner: 5, now lower element of temporary dextral weft is turned at right angles to the left and placed under upper element of (4) dextral weft, and over (2) right edge foundation strip.</head></figure>
<pb xml:id="n141" n="134"/>
across the right foundation strip and brought under the next introduced weft, and the lower element of each weft beneath the foundation strip is passed around and across it but under the upper element of the next introduced weft. This is exactly the same process as followed in forming the right side of the commencement corner.</p>
              <p>When sufficient weft elements have been introduced to firmly establish the corner of the mat and a working edge, the plaiting is turned, placing the sinistral foundation strip vertical and the dextral foundation strip horizontal to the worker. These strips now form the left edge and commencement edge of the mat. This also places the wefts diagonal to the worker, the former vertical wefts becoming the dextral wefts and the former horizontal wefts, the sinistral (<ref target="#MacToke133a">fig. 21, <hi rend="i">d</hi></ref>).</p>
              <p>The plaiting is now worked to the right along the working edge, and all new wefts are added as sinistral wefts. The upper end of each sinistral weft, turned on the left foundation strip, becomes a dextral weft; and the lower end, turned on the commencement edge foundation strip, becomes another dextral weft. In the plaiting process a constant number of dextral wefts are kept in the working edge. As each new dextral weft turned up at the commencement edge is added to the working edge, a top dextral weft is dropped.</p>
              <p>When the desired length of the mat has been reached on the commencement edge, the foundation strip is turned forward at right angles. The right-hand sinistral weft is turned twice, repeating the same technique of turning the weft on an edge to form the corner over the foundation strip angle. The upper element of the right-hand sinistral weft is turned at a right angle under the corner of the foundation strip but over the lower element and left projecting from the right edge (<ref target="#MacToke133a">fig. 21, <hi rend="i">a</hi></ref>). The lower element is brought over the upper element, turned at right angles, and passed across the corner of the foundation strip. This completes the normal turn on the commencement edge (<ref target="#MacToke133a">fig. 21, <hi rend="i">b</hi></ref>). The process is repeated for the first turn on the right side. The upper element, as the weft now stands, is turned left at right angles and passed under the lower element of the first dextral weft (<ref target="#MacToke133a">fig. 21, <hi rend="i">c</hi></ref>). The lower element of the weft is brought around the upper element, turned at right angles, and carried between the foundation strip and the upper element of the first dextral weft, completing the corner (<ref target="#MacToke133a">fig. 21, <hi rend="i">d</hi></ref>).</p>
              <p>When the mat has reached the desired breadth on the left edge, the upper left corner is formed by turning the left foundation strip at right angles to the left end, making two edge turns of the weft, passing over this angle by the same process as described in making the lower right corner of the commencement edge. The plaiting process is completed at the upper horizontal foundation strip by turning the dextral wefts over it, forming the finishing edge. As the last working section is plaited to the finishing edge, the sinistral wefts are left projecting beyond the foundation strip (<ref target="#MacToke135a">fig. 22, <hi rend="i">a</hi></ref>). The dextral wefts are turned by the same technique as on the other edges, but as each is turned down to become a sinistral weft, it encounters the sinistral wefts of the plaiting already laid in the shed of the working edge (<ref target="#MacToke135a">fig. 22, <hi rend="i">b</hi></ref>). The downward-projecting sinistral weft from the finishing edge is overlaid on the normal sinistral weft and included in the plaiting for several rows. The end of the downward projecting weft is allowed to extend from the plaiting until this has been finished, when all the ends and the projecting sinistral wefts at the finishing edge are torn off underneath crossing dextral wefts.</p>
              <p>The turned-in wefts of the finishing and right edges overlap as these edges approach each other at the upper right corner. To avoid extra thickness of the mat from this overlapping weft material, the inner elements are torn off at the edges and only the upper elements of wefts turned in from the finishing, and the lower elements of the wefts turned in from the right edge are retained in the plaiting. In making the upper right corner, the foundation strip of the finishing edge is torn off at the point where it crosses the right edge foundation strip. This strip is turned to the left at right angles and overlaid on the foundation strip of the finishing edge. When the turning of the wefts on the finishing and right edges is carried to the upper right or finishing corner, two dextral wefts remain projecting at the angle formed by the foundation strip. The
<pb xml:id="n142" n="135"/>
left weft of these two is torn off at the corner, the right weft is turned to form the corner, and the elements are interlaced in the plaiting covering the ends of the left weft. The technique is the same as that described for turning the right-hand corner of the commencement edge (figs. 20–21).</p>
              <p>
                <figure xml:id="MacToke135a">
                  <graphic url="MacToke135a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="MacToke135a-g"/>
                  <head><hi rend="sc">Figure</hi> 22.—Turning the finishing edge in plaiting. <hi rend="i">a</hi>, commencement of turn: 1, foundation strip; 2, a sinistral weft introduced along working edge of last section; 3, uppermost dextral weft of working section; 4, upper element of (3) dextral weft; 5, lower element of (3) dextral weft, passed under (1) foundation strip, along finishing strip, along finishing edge, and turned at right angles to cross (1) foundation strip and (7) second dextral weft, and to lie over (2) introduced sinistral weft. <hi rend="i">b</hi>, completing turn: 4, upper element of (3) uppermost dextral weft of working section is carried across (1) foundation strip, turned down at right angles, passed under foundation strip and over lower element of (7) next dextral weft to the right, and laid under (5) now become the upper element on sinistral weft; the plaiting is continued and part of (3) weft overlying (2) sinistral weft is incorporated with it; 2, 6, 8, 10, ends of sinistral wefts, are torn off at finishing edge when plaiting is completed; 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, dextral wefts, are turned at finishing edge and incorporated in plaiting as part of sinistral wefts in last working section; ends of these dextral wefts, after they have been turned as weft 3, are torn off under cross wefts, when plaiting is completed.</head>
                </figure>
              </p>
            </div>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d3-d3" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="sc">Coconut Leaf Plaiting</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d3-d3-d1" type="section">
              <p>Floor mats, carrying and roof sheets, wall screens, and baskets are plaited from coconut leaves with the leaflets left attached to the midribs or split sections of them. The process is exactly the same as that described in detail by Hiroa (28) for Samoa. The midrib is easily split and trimmed, each half making a base with the obliquely directed leaflets fixed in parallel and evenly-spaced wefts. Alternate leaflets are turned on this base at right angles across the other leaflets to form the second set of wefts, or two halves of a leaf are superimposed with the midribs parallel but with the leaflets crossing.</p>
              <p>In plaiting a section taken from the left side of the leaf, with one set of leaflets naturally directed obliquely to the right forming sinistral wefts, and one set turned to the left as dextral wefts, the worker sits with the midrib before her as a commencement edge and, beginning at the left, interlaces several leaflets to form a working section. The plaiting is conducted from left to right. In plaiting the flat sheets, the projecting sinistral wefts on the left side are turned to form new dextral wefts, and the projecting dextral wefts on the right side are turned to form new sinistral wefts for the next working section above. In making baskets, these wefts are left projecting and are later plaited together to form the sides. Working sections are added until all but the ends of the leaflets have been included in the plaiting. The finishing edge of the wall screen
<pb xml:id="n143" n="136"/>
and sheets made of a single section of leaf are completed by braiding these ends. Carrying and roof sheets are made of two sections of coconut leaf joined at the finishing edges by a double course of braiding, one half of the wefts braided to the left and the remaining half braided to the right. Baskets are similarly closed by a double course of braiding.</p>
              <p>The joined section of carrying and roof sheets, made from the right side of the leaf, is plaited from right to left as the leaflets are naturally directed to the left.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d3-d3-d2" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Food Dish</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The only serving dish, except the coconut-shell cup, is a coconut-leaf shallow bowl or platter which is used once and thrown away. It is made only for serving food at feasts and for guests. Ordinarily food is served on leaves placed on small <hi rend="i">fala</hi> pandanus mats. The serving dish is made in two forms, plaited and unplaited. The unplaited dish is made from a short section of coconut leaf midrib with 10 or 12 leaflets attached. The leaflets are divided into two bunches and knotted together. The end leaflets are pulled tightly, bending the midrib to make a curved end and leaving the middle leaflets slightly loose. The dish is turned out with the under surface of the leaflets up and with the loose middle leaflets sagging, making a shallow concavity in which the food is set.</p>
              <p>The plaited dish is composed of two short sections of split midrib and attached leaflets taken from the left and right sides of the leaf. The midrib splits are placed end to end with the under surface of the leaflets uppermost, one set crossing the other. They are plaited together in check pattern and the projecting ends of each set knotted separately.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d10-d3-d3-d3" type="section">
              <head>
                <hi rend="lsc">Baskets</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The two types of basket made in Tokelau differ in use and details of manufacture. The common basket is quickly made from green coconut leaves when needed and cast away as soon as it has served its purpose. It is made primarily for transporting food and copra. The second type is a permanent basket of closely-woven, dried coconut leaf for household use.</p>
              <p>The temporary basket (<hi rend="i">kato</hi>) is plaited in check pattern from the leaflets of a single strip of midrib which is cut off long enough to make the rim of the basket. The end leaflets are left free for the joining of the two ends, the second leaflet at one end is left in its natural position, and the third leaflet is crossed at right angles to form the first weft opposite to that established by the second leaflet. The plaiting is commenced with this pair and continued, without turning the leaflets at the edges, until only a few inches at the ends of the leaflets at the plaiting edge remain free. These ends are turned back at right angles and pushed under the first cross wefts they overlie to secure the plaiting. The two ends of the midrib are brought together and joined by slightly overlapping each other. They are so placed that the wefts of one side are parallel with those of the same series on the other side; the free leaflet at the end of the plaiting, placed between the interval of the first and second leaflets, is carried through and pulled firmly around the join of the midrib ends and carried back again as a weft in the opposite direction to its natural position. The basket is turned up on its rim to finish the plaiting. The join is toward the worker. The first leaflet left free now makes a pair with
<pb xml:id="n144" n="137"/>
the last leaflet, which was bound around the join and carried as weft opposite to its natural direction. The plaiting of the projecting wefts of each edge is now completed.</p>
              <p>The bottom of the basket is made by braiding the plaiting edge. The basket is placed with the plaiting edge up and the join of the rim away from the worker. The plaiting edge forms t